Skip to main content

Full text of "Arithmetic for carpenters and builders"

See other formats


UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 

LIBRARY 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arcliive 

in  2007  witli  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcli  ive.org/details/aritlimeticforcarOOdaleiala 


THE  WILEY  TECHNICAL  SERIES 

EDITED  BT 

JOSEPH  M.  JAMESON 


MATHEMATICS  TEXTS 

Mathematics  for  Technical  and  Vocational  Schools. 
By  Samuel  Slade,  B.S.,  C.E.,  and 
Louis  Mabgolis,  A.B.,  C.E.     ix +491  pages.     SJ  by 
8.     353  figures.     Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

Answers  to  Problems  in  "Mathematics  for  Technical 
and  Vocational  Schools." 
5by7i.    Paper,  25  cents  ne«. 

Mathematics  for  Machinists. 

By  R.  W.  BuuNHAM,  M.A.     viii+229  pages.     5  by  7, 
175  figures.     Cl.ith,  $1.75  net. 

Answers  to  Problems  in  "Mathematics  for  Machinists." 

■i  i  by  ej.     Paper,  25  cents  net. 

Arithmetic  for  Carpenters  and  Builders. 

By  R.  BuRDETTE  Dale,  M.E.  ix+231  pages.   5  by  7. 
109  figures.     Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

Practical  Shop  Mechanics  and  Mathematics. 

By  James  F.  Johnson.    ix  + 130  pages.    5  by  7.    81 
figures.    Cloth,  $1.40  net. 

Mathematics  for  Shop  and  Drawing  Students. 

l»y  H.  M.  Keal  and  C.  J.  Leonard,     vii  +  213 
pages.    4Jby7.    188  figures.    Cloth,  $1.60  nc/. 

Mathematics  for  Electrical  Students. 

By  H.  M.  Keal  and  C.  J.  Leonard,     vii  +  230 
pages.    4iby7.    165  figures.    Cloth,  $1.60  n«<. 

Preparatory  Mathematics  for  Use  in  Technical  Schools. 
By  Harold  B.  Ray  and  Arnold  V  Doub.    vili  + 
68  pages.    4J  by  7.    70  figures.    Cloth,  |1. 00  ne<. 


ARITHMETIC 

FOR 

CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


BY 

R.  BURDETTE  DALE,  M.E. 

Professor,  Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute,  Troy,  New  York 
Formerly  in  Charge  of  Vocational  Courses  in  Engineering  and  Cor- 
respondence Instruction,  Department  of  Engineering 
Extension,  Iowa  State  College 


TOTAL  ISSUE,  FOURTEEN  THOUSAND 


NEW  YORK 

•  JOHN  WILEY   &   SONS,  Inc. 

London:   CHAPMAN  &  HALL,  Limited 

125658 


525  Market  St. 
I^r1;e4d  19 

^T  Frances  " 


Copyright,  1916 

BY 

R.  BURDETTE  DALE 


Printed  in  U.  S.  A. 


i/^ 


PRESS    OF 

BRAUNWORTH    k    CO 

BOOK     MANUrACTURCRS 

BROOKLYN,  NEW  YORK 


a  A 

\  0  3 


PREFACE 


This  book  was  written  for  the  purpose  of  presenting  the 
subject  of  arithmetic,  as  used  in  the  daily  work  of  the  car- 
penter and  builder,  in  a  simple  form.     It  is  intended  for 
^  the  practical  man  as  well  as  for  the  beginner  and  the  student. 
^   The  material  is  such  that  the  work  can  be  followed  success- 

•>.\Afully  by  those  who  have  had  an  eighth-grade  education. 
Upon  the  completion  of  this  study  the  student  should  be 
prepared  to  take  up  the  problem  of  estimating  the  cost  of 
buildings, 

^1  The  author  has  not  attempted  to  treat  the  subject 
\  exhaustively.  Though  the  first  chapters  may  seem  element- 
ary to  some,  they  will  furnish  a  much-needed  review  to 
others.  Geometry  is  touched  upon  merely  to  serve  as  a 
foundation  for  the  work  in  mensuration.  Practical  appli- 
cations of  geometric  truths  are  emphasized,  while  rigid 
proofs  and  developments  are  omitted.  Two  chapters  on 
the  steel  square,  that  most  useful  tool  of  the  carpenter, 
are  included. 

Many  of  the  problems  do  not  admit  of  exact  answers 
for  the  reason  that  the  judgment  of  the  student  plays  an 
important  part  in  the  solution.  Different  results  will  be 
obtained,  depending  upon  the  lengths  and  widths  of  the 
boards  chosen  and  other  similar  details.  Careful  planning 
for  the  economical  use  of  material  is  required,  for  this  is 
an  essential  training  for  the  work  of  the  practical  carpenter. 


-i 


IV  PREFACE 

Students  will  do  well  to  take  advantage  of  this  and  every 
similar  opportunity  to  develop  their  judgment. 

It  is  believed  that  the  reader  who  follows  this  text  care- 
fully as  a  guide  may  learn  much  that  may  not  strictly  be 
classed  as  arithmetic.  If  the  manner  in  which  the  subject 
is  treated  and  the  many  applications  made  inspire  the  prac- 
tical worker  and  the  beginner  to  seek  a  better  understanding 
of  the  fundamentals  of  carpentry,  the  author's  most  san- 
guine hopes  will  be  justified. 

As  a  text  in  vocational  mathematics  it  is  believed  that 
this  little  volume  should  find  a  place  in  vocational  and  in- 
dustrial schools,  trade  schools,  manual  training  schools 
and  night  schools.  It  is  also  well  adapted  for  use  in  corre- 
spondence instruction.  The  material  has  been  used  by  the 
author  in  the  Vocational  Courses  in  Engineering  at  the 
Iowa  State  College  and  also  in  the  extension  classes  of  the 
Department  of  Engineering  Extension  in  various  cities  in 
the  state  of  Iowa. 

No  single  book  is  the  entire  and  original  product  of  one 
man's  mind;  it  consists  rather  of  accumulated  knowledge 
interpreted  and  adapted  for  a  particular  purpose.  The 
author  gratefully  acknowledges  assistance  rendered  know- 
ingly and  unknowingly  by  many  others.  Material  borrowed 
from  other  sources  is  acknowledged  in  the  text.  The 
author's  appreciative  thanks  are  due  his  colleague,  Mr.  H.  E. 
Freund,  for  reading  the  manuscript,  and  to  Prof.  K.  G. 
Smith  for  many  suggestions  and  kindly  criticisms.  In- 
debtedness is  also  acknowledged  to  Sargent  &  Company 
for  permission  to  use  illustrations  of  their  steel  square. 

R.  BuRDETTE  Dale. 

\me8,  Iowa, 
April,  1915. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   I 

UNITS     OP    LENGTH.      ADDITION,     SUBTRACTION,     MULTIPLICATION    AND 
DIVISION   OF   UNITS   OF   LENGTH. 

Units  of  Length — ^Abbreviations — Adding  Feet  and  Inches — Subtract- 
ing Feet  and  Inches — Multiplying  Feet  and  Inches — Division  of 
Feet  and  Inches 1 

CHAPTER  II 

FRACTIONS.      MIXED     NUMBERS.      LEAST     COMMON     DENOMINATOR. 
ADDITION    AND    SUBTRACTION    OF    FRACTIONS. 

Fractions — Definitions — Reading  and  Writing  Fractions — Proper  and 
Improper  Fractions — Mixed  Numbers — Fractions  of  an  Inch — 
Reduction  of  Fractions  to  Lower  Terms — Reduction  of  Fractions 
to  Higher  Terms — Changing  Whole  Numbers  to  Improper  Fractions 
— Changing  Mixed  Numbers — Changing  Improper  Fractions — 
Least  Common  Denominator — To  Find  the  Least  Common  Denomi- 
nator— To  Reduce  to  the  Least  Common  Denominator — Adding 
Fractions — Subtracting  Fractions 10 

CHAPTER  III 

MIXED    NUMBERS.      ADDITION,    SUBTRACTION    AND    MULTIPLICATION    OF 
MIXED    NUMBERS.      CANCELLATION. 

Working  with  Mixed  Numbers — Adding  Mixed  Numbers — Sub- 
tracting Mixed  Numbers — Multiphcation  of  Fractions  and  Mixed 
Numbers — The  Product  of  a  Whole  Number  and  a  Fraction — The 
Product  of  Two  Fractions — "  Of  "  means  "  Times  " — Multiplying 
a  Group  of  Whole  Numbers  and  Fractions — Multiplying  Mixed 
Numbers — Factors — Cancellation 26 


VI  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  IV 

DIVISION  OF  FRACTIONS  AND  MIXED  NUMBERS.       COMPOUND  FRACTIONS. 

Division  of  Fractions — Compound  Fractions — Dividing  a  Whole 
Number  by  a  Fraction — Dividing  Mixed  Numbers — Solution  of 
Problems — Classes  of  Problems 39 

CHAPTER  V 

MONEY.  ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION,  MULTIPLICATION  AND  DIVISION  OF 
MONEY  QUANTITIES.       CHECKS,  STATEMENTS,  RECEIPTS,  ESTIMATES. 

Money — Writing  and  Reading  Money  Sums — The  Decimal  Point — 
Addition — Subtraction — Multiplication — Division — Bank  Accounts 
— The  Bank  Check — The  Statement — The  Receipt — Assets  and 
Liabilities — Wage  Accounts — Building  Estimates 47 

CHAPTER  VI 

DECIMALS.  ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION,  MULTIPLICATION  AND  DIVISION 
OF  DECIMALS.  CHANGING  FROM  COMMON  FRACTIONS  TO  DECIMAL 
FRACTIONS. 

Decimal  Fractions — Writing  Decimals — Reading  Decimals — Signifi- 
cance of  Position — Addition  of  Decimals — Subtraction  of  Lecimals 
— Multiplication  of  Decimals — Division  of  Decimals — Accuracy  of 
Results — Changing  a  Decimal  Fraction  to  a  Common  Fraction — 
Changing  a  Common  Fraction  to  a  Decimal  Fraction — Decimal 
Equivalents  of  the  Fractions  of  an  Inch 60 

CHAPTER  VII 

THE    USE    OF    RULES.      PULLEY    SIZES.      WIDTH  OF    BELTS.       FORMXTLAS. 
SHORT  METHODS  OF  MULTIPLICATION  AND  DIVISION. 

Rules — Rules  for  Pulley  Sizes — Rule  for  the  Width  of  Belts — Using 
Letters  in  Rules — How  to  Use  Formulas — Short  Methods — Addition 
— Subtraction — MultipUcation — Division 73 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  Vli 

CHAPTER  VIII 

PERCENTAGE.      DISCOUNTS.      PROFIT.      INTEREST. 

Percentage — Changing  a  Fraction  to  a  Per  Cent — Meaning  of  Terms- 
Analysis  of  Problems — Solution  of  Problems — List  Prices  and  Dis- 
counts— Profits — Interest 82 

CHAPTER    IX 

RATIO.      PROPORTION.      CEMENT  AND  CONCRETE   MIXTURES.      SLOPES. 

LEVERS. 

Ratio — A  Ratio  is  a  Fraction — Cement  and  Concrete  Mixtures — 
Proportion  —  Inverse  Proportion  —  Solving  a  Proportion  —  The 
Statement  of  a  Proportion  —  Slopes  —  Levers  —  Arrangement  of 
Levers 91 

CHAPTER  X 

LINEAR  MEASURE.  AREA.  VOLUME.  LIQUID  MEASURE.  DRY  MEASURE. 
WEIGHT.  THE  CIRCLE.  WEIGHT  OF  BUILDING  MATERIALS.  BEAR- 
ING POWER  OF  SOILS.      FOOTINGS.      CONCRETE  MIXTURES. 

Weights  and  Measures — Measures  of  Length — Measures  of  Surface — 
Measures  of  Volume — Measures  of  Capacity — Measures  of  Weight 
— Square  or  Surface  Measure — Area  of  the  Square  and  the  Rectangle 
— The  Circle — Volume  or  Cubic  Measure — Weight  of  Lumber — 
Weight  of  Building  Material — Bearing  Power  of  Soils — Quantities 
of  Material  Required  per  Cubic  Yard  of  Concrete 105 

CHAPTER  XI 

POWERS.      ROOTS.      RIGHT    TRIANGLES.      AREA    OF    CIRCLES.      CAPACITY 
OF    TANKS    AND  CISTERNS. 

Powers — Exponents — Powers  of  Common  Fractions — Roots — Square 
Root — Directions  for  Extracting  Square  Root — Proof  of  Square 
Root — Cube  Root — Practical  AppUcations — The  Side  of  a  Square 
— The  Right  Triangle — The  Circle — Capacities  of  Circular  Tanks 
and  Cisterns 122 


viii  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  XII 

LUMBER  TERMS   AND   DIMENSIONS.      FLOORING.      SHINGLES. 

Lumber  Trade  Customs — Lumber  Terms — Allowance  for  Dressing — 
Width  of  Lumber — Standard  Lengths — Sizes  of  Common  Boards 
— Sizes  of  Dimension  Lumber — Sizes  of  Dressed  Finishing  Lumber 
— Sizes  of  Framing  Lumber — Measurement  of  Lumber — Counting 
Lumber — Flooring — Shingles — Material  Lists 142 


CHAPTER  XIII 
builders'    geometry,      geometric    constructions,      angles   and 

ANGULAR    measure.      ELLIPSE.      POLYGONS. 

Use  of  Geometry — Geometric  Points  and  Lines — Geometric  Surfaces 
and  Solids — Geometric  Angles — Circular  or  Angular  Measure — 
Sectors  and  Segments — To  Bisect  a  Line  and  to  Erect  a  Perpen- 
dicular— To  Bisect  an  Angle — -To  Erect  a  Perpendicular  at  any 
Point  on  a  Line — To  Construct  a  Right  Angle — To  Construct 
Various  Angles — To  Find  the  Center  of  an  Arc  or  Circle — The 
Ellipse — Polygons — To  Construct  a  Hexagon — To  Construct  an 
Octagon 160 


CHAPTER  XIV 

AREAS  OF  SURFACES  AND  VOLUMES  OF  SOLIDS.  AREA  OF  TRIANGLE, 
PYRAMID,  CYLINDER  AND  CONE.  VOLUME  OF  CYLINDER,  PRISM, 
PYRAMID  AND  CONE.      MEASURING  SURFACES  AND  VOLUMES. 

Area  of  a  Triangle — ^Area  of  Pyramid — ^Area  of  a  Cylindrical  Surface 
— Area  of  the  Surface  of  a  Cone — Volume — Volume  of  a  Cylinder 
— Volume  of  a  Prism — Volume  of  a  Pyramid — Volume  of  a  Cone — 
Volume  of  the  Frustum  of  a  Cone  or  Pyramid — Measuring  Surfaces 
and  Volumes 174 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  IX 

CHAPTER  XV 

USE  OF  THE  carpenter's  SQUARE.  BRACE  MEASURE.  OCTAGONAt 
SCALE.  ESSEX  BOARD  MEASURE.  DIAGONAL  SCALE.  POLYGON 
SCALE.      GEOMETRIC    APPLICATIONS. 

Carpenter's  Square — The  Brace  Measure — The  Octagonal  Scale — 
The  Essex  Board  Measure — The  Diagonal  Scale — The  Polygon 
Scale — Geometric  Applications — Hypotenuse  of  a  Right-angled 
Triangle — To  Divide  a  Line — To  Bisect  an  Angle 195 

CHAPTER  XVI 

USE  OF  THE  carpenter's  SQUARE  IN  FRAMING.  FLOOR  BRIDGING. 
STAIR  BEAMS.  RAFTER  FRAMING.  ROOF  PITCHES.  RAFTER  TABLE. 
ROOF  FRAMING.      HIP  OR  VALLEY   RAFTERS.      JACK  RAFTERS. 

To  Find  the  Cuts  for  Floor  Bridging — To  Find  the  Cuts  on  a  Stair 
Beam — Rafter  Framing — Pitch — To  Find  the  Cuts  for  a  Common 
Rafter — The  Rafter  Table — Roof  Framing — Length  of  Hip  or 
Valley  Rafters — Cuts  for  Hip  or  Valley  Rafters — Hip  Rafter  Tables 
— Jack  Rafters — Side  Cut  for  Hip  Rafters — Length  of  Hip  or 
Valley  Rafters — Cuts  for  Cripple  Rafters — Actual  Lengths  ....   206 


ARITHMETIC 


FOR 


CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


CHAPTER  I 

UNITS  OF  LENGTH.    ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION,  MUL- 
TIPLICATION AND  DIVISION  OF  UNITS  OF  LENGTH 

1.  Units  of  Length.  We  are  all  familiar  with  the  com- 
mon foot  rule,  by  which  we  measure  the  length,  width  or 
thickness  of  a  board.  The /oof  is  the  unit  of  length  measure- 
ment used  by  English-speaking  people,  just  the  same  as  the 
dollar  is  the  unit  of  money  in  the  United  States.  The  foot 
unit  is,  however,  too  long  to  make  small  measurements 
conveniently,  therefore  it  is  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts 
called  inches.  With  these  units  of  length,  the  foot  and  the 
inch,  we  can  make  a  great  many  rough  measurements  with 
all  the  accuracy  necessary. 

The  foot  is  the  unit  of  length  measurement. 

The  inch  is  one- twelfth  of  a  foot. 

There  are  three  other  units  of  length  based  on  the  foot 
which  are  in  common  use.  They  are  the  yard,  the  rod  and 
the  mile. 

The  yard  equals  three  feet  or  thirty-six  inches. 


2     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

The  rod  equals  sixteen  and  one-half  feet  or  five  and 
one-half  yards. 

The  mile  equals  five  thousand  two  hundred  eighty  feet. 

2.  Abbreviations.  The  word  foot  is  often  abbreviated 
to  Jt.,  and  the  word  inch  to  in.     The  mark  (')  also  means 


Fig.  1. — Section  of  Timber  Framing  for  Garage. 


feet  and  (")  means  inches, 
expressed  thus: 


These  abbreviations  may  be 


20  feet  4  inches  =  20  ft.  4  in.  =  20'  4". 

The  abbreviation  for  yard  is  yd.,  and  for  mile  is  mi. 

3.  Adding  Feet  and  Inches.  You  will  recollect  that 
you  cannot  add  two  unlike  quantities  and  get  a  result  which 
has  any  meaning.  If  you  try  to  add  two  nails  to  five  screws 
you  have  seven  things,  but  they  are  still  two  nails  and  five 


UNITS  OF  LENGTH 


3 


screws.  If  you  have  two  nails  and  five  screws  in  one  box 
and  three  nails  and  four  screws  in  another  box  and  you  put 
them  all  in  the  first  box,  you  will  have  five  nails  and  nine 
screws  in  that  box.     On  paper  it  would  look  like  this: 

2  nails    5  screws  in  first  box. 

3  nails    4  screws  in  second  box. 


5  nails    9  screws  in  one  box. 

It-  4'8'-^4<28^3'6M^285iU-3'6^4^^4'  8^ 

FT  I        i'f 

O 


Fig.  2. — Ground  Floor  Plan  of  Garage. 


When  we  add  feet  and  inches  we  must  do  it  in  a  similar 
manner. 

Example.  7  feet    6  inches 

10  feet    3  inches 

17  feet    9  inches.  Ans. 

The  inch  is  a  part  of  the  foot.  If  we  have  more  than 
twelve  inches,  we  can  change  some  of  the  inches  to  feet  and 
the  part  left  over  will  be  the  odd  inches.     We  could  not 


4     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

do  this  with  the  nails  and  screws  because  a  screw  is  not  a 
part  of  a  nail.    The  following  example  will  make  this  clear. 
Example.    Add  9'  6"  and  10'  10". 


9' 

6" 

10' 

10" 

19' 

+ 
1 

16" 
~12 

20'      4"  Ans. 

Explanation.  Sixteen  inches  are  more  than  one  foot, 
therefore  if  we  subtract  12"  from  16"  we  must  also  add 
1'  to  the  19'.     The  result  will  be  20'  4"  as  shown. 

4.  Subtracting  Feet  and  Inches.  In  subtracting  feet 
and  inches,  we  use  the  same  method  of  combining  the  units 
as  we  did  in  adding. 

Example.    From  12'  10"  take  4'  6". 

12'     10"    minuend 
4'      6"    subtrahend 


8'      4"    difference.  Ans. 

Notice  that  in  the  above  example  in  subtraction  the 
larger  of  the  two  numbers  is  called  the  minuend;  the  num- 
ber to  be  subtracted  is  called  the  subtrahend  and  the  result 
is  called  the  difference. 

Example.     From  9'  2"  take  6'  9". 

9'    2"  =  8'     14" 
6'      9" 


2'      5"  Ans. 

Explanation.    Before  we  can  subtract,  we  must  borrow 
r  from  9'  and  change  it  into  inches. 


UNITS   OF  LENGTH  5 

5.  Multiplying  Feet  and  Inches.  Multiplication  is  a 
short  method  of  addition.  The  multiplicand  is  the  number 
to  be  multiplied  and  the  multiplier  indicates  how  many 
times  the  multiplicand  is  to  be  taken.  The  result  is  called 
the  product. 

To  multiply  feet  and  inches,  we  first  multiply  the  inches 
and  then  the  feet  by  the  multiplier.  If  there  are  12"  or 
more  in  the  resulting  product,  we  change  the  inches  to  feet 
so  that  the  result  will  be  expressed  in  the  simplest  form. 

Example.  What  is  the  total  length  of  board  required 
to  give  5  pieces  each  2'  6"  long? 

2'     6"     multiplicand 
5       multiplier 

product 


10' 

30" 

+ 

— 

2' 

24" 

12'      6"     simplified  product.  Ans. 

Explanation.  5X6"  =  30"  and  5X2' =  10'.  In  order  to 
express  this  result  in  its  simplest  form,  we  must  subtract 
24"  from  30"  and  add  2'  to  10'.     This  gives  the  result  12'  6". 

6.  Division  of  Feet  and  Inches.  Division  is  the  opposite 
of  multiplication.  The  number  to  be  divided  is  called  the 
dividend.  The  number  by  which  the  dividend  is  divided 
is  called  the  divisor.  The  result  is  called  the  quotient. 
To  divide  feet  and  inches  we  first  divide  the  feet  and  then 
the  inches,  expressing  the  result  in  its  simplest  form. 

Example.  A  board  15'  8"  long  is  to  be  cut  into  four 
equal  lengths.     How  long  will  each  piece  be? 

4  divisor)  15'      8"     dividend 
3|'     2"     quotient 
^'  =  9" 
Therefore,  31'    2"  =  3'  11"  Ans. 


6     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Explanation.  Four  goes  into  15'  three  times  and  3  over, 
or  3|'.  One-quarter  of  a  foot  is  3"  and  three-quarters  of 
a  foot  is  3  X  3"  or  9".  Four  goes  into  8"  two  times  with- 
out a  remainder.  Now  add  the  9"  which  represents  the  f 
to  2"  and  the  simpUfied  quotient  is  3'  11". 

Another  very  good  way  to  divide  feet  and  inches  is 
first  to  reduce  the  feet  to  inches  and  then  divide. 

Example.  A  board  5'  10"  long  is  to  be  cut  in  the  middle; 
what  is  the  length  of  each  piece? 

5' 10"  =  70" 

X 

12 

60 

+ 
10 

70" 

2  )70" 

35"  =  2'  11"    Ans. 
~24 
U" 

Explanation.  To  reduce  5'  to  inches  multiply  by  12. 
Then  add  the  10"  to  get  70".  Divide  70"  by  2,  the  number 
of  equal  pieces  into  which  the  board  is  to  be  cut,  to  get  35". 
This  is  more  than  2',  so  we  can  subtract  24"  from  35"  and 
we  get  11"  as  the  difference.  The  simplified  form  is,  there- 
fore, 2'  11". 


UNITS  OF  LENGTH 


Summary  of  Chapter  I 

1.  To  change  feet  to  inches,  multiply  by  12. 

2.  To  change  inches  to  feet,  divide  by  12. 

3.  To  add  measurements,  separate  the  feet  and  inches 
and  add  them  separately,  changing  the  result  to  its  simplest 
form.     (Sec.  3.) 

4.  To  subtract  feet  and  inches,  subtract  each  separately 
and  reduce  the  result  to  its  simplest  form.     (Sec.  4.) 

'Y 


i 


-^ 


^ 


^ 


^BuEz  saw  table 

-A 


I 


Fig.  3. 

5.  To  multiply  feet  and  inches,  multiply  first  the  inches 
and  then  the  feet  by  the  multipher,  reducing  the  result  to 
its  simplest  form;  or  reduce  the  feet  to  inches  and  mul- 
tiply, changing  the  product  again  to  feet  and  inches  for 
the  answer,     (Sec.  5.) 

6.  To  divide  feet  and  inches,  divide  first  the  feet  and 
then  the  inches,  reducing  the  result  to  its  simplest  form;  or 
reduce  the  feet  to  inches  and  divide,  changing  the  quotient 
again  to  feet  and  inches  for  the  answer.     (Sec.  6.) 

PROBLEMS 

1.  A  board  is  cut  up  in  the  factory  into  three  pieces.  One 
piece  is  3'  4"  long;  another  is  5'  2"  long,  and  another  is  7'  5"  long. 
What  was  the  original  length  of  the  board  if  2'  1"  were  wasted? 


8     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


K*;*, 


S^ 


2.  A  farmer  has  a  field  3G  rods  long,  and  15  rods  wide;  how  long 
and  how  wide  is  this  in  feet  and  inches?  What  is  the  total  dis- 
tance around  the  field  in  feet  and  inches? 

3.  Fig.  1  shows  the  section  of  the  timber  framing  for  a  two 
story  garage.  What  length  of  studding  must  be  ordered  for  the 
job?  To  what  length  must  the  studding  be  cut?  What  is  the 
total  distance  from  the  grade  Une  to  the  ridge  of  the  roof;  in 
other  words,  what  is  the  distance  marked  A  in  the  figure? 

4.  A  carpenter  wishes  to  cut  four  shelves  each  2'  9"  long.  He 
has  three  boards  which  he  may  use.  One  of  these  is  10'  long, 
another  12'  and  another  14'.  Which  board  will  cut  with  the  least 
waste?    How  much  waste  will  there  be? 

5.  Fig.  2  shows  the  ground  floor  plan  of  the 
garage  mentioned  in  Prob.  3.    What  is  the  total 

>*■><'     length  and  width  of  the  building? 

6.  In  Fig.  2  how  far  apart  must  the  windows 
in  the  end  of  the  building  be  placed  so  that  the 
distances  from  the  edge  of  each  window  to  the 
end  of  the  wall  and  the  distance  between  the 
windows  will  be  equal? 

7.  A  flag  pole  is  96'  3"  long.  If  it  is  set 
9'  8"  in  the  ground,  how  much  of  it  projects 
above  the  ground? 

8.  A  workman  in  going  from  his  home  to  the 
mill  walks  ten  blocks  and  a  half  and  crosses 
.eleven  streets.    The  blocks  are   each  300'  long 

and  the  streets  are  60'  Avide.  If  he  makes  the  trip  morning  and 
evening  for  300  days  in  the  year,  how  many  miles  will  he  have 
walked  at  the  end  of  that  time? 

9.  If  it  takes  the  man  mentioned  in  Prob.  8  an  average  of  17 
minutes  to  make  one  trip  to  the  mill,  how  much  time  will  he  spend 
in  walking  in  the  course  of  a  year  if  he  makes  two  trips  each  day? 

10.  If  telegraph  poles  are  spaced  176'  apart,  how  many  of 
them  are  there  to  the  mile? 

11.  What  must  be  the  width  of  the  shop  to  properly  accommo- 
date the  buzz  saw  shown  in  Fig.  3  if  the  clearance  for  the  board 
at  the  right  is  the  same  as  that  at  the  left? 

12.  A  shipping  box  is  77"  long,  43"  wide  and  58"  high.  Give 
the  dimensions  of  this  box  in  feet  and  inches. 


Fig.  4. 
Door  Frame. 


UNITS  OF  LENGTH  9 

13.  The  steps  in  a  cellar  stairs  are  2'  9"  wide  and  there  are 
15  of  them.  What  is  the  total  number  of  Uneal  feet  of  stepping 
required?  How  many  boards  14'  long  will  be  necessary  to  cut 
the  steps? 

14.  If  16  sticks  each  16'  long  and  6  sticks  each  10'  long  are 
ordered  to  cut  16  door  frames  like  the  one  shown  in  Fig.  4,  how 
many  lineal  feet  of  lumber  will  be  wasted? 


Fig.  5. — Cement  Walks  for  Residence  and  Lawn. 


15.  The  windows  in  the  side  of  a  house  21'  10"  long  are  28" 
wide.  There  are  four  of  them  and  they  are  spaced  so  that  the 
distance  between  each  of  them  and  the  distance  between  the  end 
windows  and  the  ends  of  the  wall  are  all  equal.  What  is  the 
distance  between  them? 

16.  How  many  lineal  feet  of  two  by  four  edge  guides  will  be 
required  for  the  cement  walks  shown  in  Fig.  5,  if  all  of  the  work 
is  done  in  one  day  so  that  all  the  guides  are  in  use  at  the  same 
time?    Allow  50'  for  waste  and  cutting. 


CHAPTER  II 

FRACTIONS.  MIXED  NUMBERS.  LEAST  COMMON  DE- 
NOMINATOR. ADDITION  AND  SUBTRACTION  OF 
FRACTIONS 

7.  Fractions.  If  anything  is  divided  into  equal  parts 
we  call  the  parts  fractions.  The  fraction  may  be  either  one, 
or  several  of  these  parts.  Fig.  6  shows  a  circle  made  up 
of  segments  by  the  method  often  used  by  woodworkers. 
If  you  count  the  segments  you  will  see  that  there  are  eight 
of  them.  The  circle  has  been  divided  into  eight  equal  parts 
and  each  one  of  these  parts  is  one-eighth  of  the  whole 
circle.  If  we  select  three  of  these  segments  they  will 
yepresent  three-eighths  of  the  whole. 

The  expression  8-f-4  =  2  means  that  8  divided  by  4  equals 
2.  The  sign  -j-  means  divided  by.  Now  if  we  replace  the 
dots  above  and  below  the  line  in  this  sign  by  the  figures, 
we  have  f  =  2,  which  is  a  simpler  way  of  expressing  the  same 
thing.  But  this  f  is  a  fraction.  Thus  we  see  that  a  fraction 
is  another  way  of  expressing  division,  and  it  means  that  the 
number  above  the  line  is  to  be  divided  by  the  number  below 
the  line. 

8.  Definitions.  A  fraction  is  one  or  more  of  the  equal 
parts  into  which  anything  may  be  divided.  For  example 
three-eighths  means  that  the  whole  is  divided  into  eight 
parts  and  three  of  these  are  taken.  A  fraction  also  indicates 
division. 

A  fraction  has  two  parts  called  terms.      One  is  the 

10 


FRACTIONS 


11 


denominator  which  is  written  below  the  line  and  this  tells 
into  how  many  parts  the  whole  has  been  divided.  The 
numerator  or  the  number  above  the  line  tells  how  many 
of  these  parts  are  taken. 

9.  Reading  and  Writing  Fractions.  To  pronounce  a 
fraction,  name  the  numerator  first  and  then  the  denominator 
followed  by  the  ending  th  or  ths.     When  the  numbers  2,  3 


Fig.  6. — Circle  made  up  of  Segments. 


and  4  are  used  for  the  denominator  we  say  one-half,  one-third 
or  one-quarter.  Also  when  the  number  of  the  denominator 
ends  in  1,  2  or  3,  we  say  one  twenty-first,  one  thirty-second 
or  five  fifty-thirds,  as  the  case  may  be. 

To  write  a  fraction,  place  the  numerator  over  the  denomi- 
nator with  a  line  between.  For  example,  three-eighths  is 
written  |;    seven-sixteenths  is  written  ye- 

10.  Proper  and  Improper  Fractions.  A  proper  fraction 
is  one  the  numerator  of  which  is  less  than  the  denominator. 
The  value  of  a  proper  fraction  is  less  than  unity  or  one. 


12    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

^,  §,  f  and  ^  are  all  proper  fractions  because  the  numer- 
ators are  less  than  the  denominators. 

An  improper  fraction  is  one  the  numerator  of  which 
is  equal  to  or  greater  than  the  denominator.  If  the  numer- 
ator is  equal  to  the  denominator,  the  value  of  the  fraction 
is  unity  or  one,  for  the  reason  that  all  of  the  parts  into  which 
the  whole  has  been  divided  are  taken.  For  example,  |,  f ,  | 
and  jl  are  improper  fractions  the  value  of  each  of  which  is 
1.  If  the  numerator  of  the  fraction  is  greater  than  the 
denominator,  the  value  of  the  fraction  is  greater  than  one. 


Fig.  7. — Portion  of  an  Ordinary  Rule. 

For  example,  |,  |  and  -y-  are  all  improper  fractions,  the  value 
of  each  of  which  is  greater  than  1. 

11.  Mixed  Numbers.  A  mixed  number  is  a  number 
composed  of  a  whole  number  and  a  fraction  written  together. 
For  example,  5^  is  a  mixed  number  and  denotes  five  and  a 
half  units.  If  the  units  are  feet,  this  would  mean  five  and 
one-half  feet. 

12.  Fractions  of  an  Inch.  If  you  will  examine  the  ordi- 
nary rule  carefully,  a  representation  of  which  is  shown  in 
Fig.  7,  you  will  notice  that  the  inch  is  divided  first  into  two 
parts  or  fractions,  each  being  one-half  of  an  inch.  The 
halves  are  again  equally  divided  into  quarters  of  an  inch 
and  these  again  into  eighths  and  sixteenths  of  an  inch.  For 
very  accurate  measurements  some  rules  are  divided  into 
thirty-seconds  and  sixty-fourths  of  an  inch. 


FRACTIONS  13 

13.  Reduction  of  Fractions  to  Lower  Terms.  Everyone 
knows  that  ^"+5"  =  !"=  1".     We  can  also  say, 

4   +4    — i   —2    ana  8   -f-j    —  |    — j  . 

This  shows  that  the  same  value  can  be  expressed  by  frac- 
tions in  different  ways.  In  spite  of  this  fact  we  do  not 
usually  say  two-eighths  of  an  inch  when  we  mean  one- 
quarter  of  an  inch,  although  they  both  have  the  same  value. 
,  We  are  obUged  to  say  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch,  but  we 
usually  say  one-eighth  rather  than  two-sixteenths.  Unless 
it  is  necessary  to  do  otherwise  we  like  to  reduce  the  frac- 
tion to  its  lowest  terms. 

Example,     Reduce  ^"  to  its  lowest  terms. 

i4-"-^4  — ^"  Ant 

Explanation.  Divide  both  the  numerator  and  the  denom- 
inator of  the  fraction  by  the  same  number  and  use  the  largest 
number  that  will  go  into  both  an  even  number  of  times.  In 
this  case  4  is  the  largest  number  which  will  go  into  both  12 
and  32. 

Thus  we  see  that  if  we  divide  both  the  numerator  and 
the  denominator  of  the  fraction  by  the  same  number,  we 
change  the  form  of  the  fraction  but  we  do  not  change  its 
value. 

14.  Reductions  of  Fractions  to  Higher  Terms.  If  we 
multiply  both  the  numerator  and  denominator  of  a  fraction 
by  the  same  number,  we  will  change  its  form  but  we  will  not 
change  its  value.  We  can,  therefore,  reduce  a  fraction  to 
higher  terms.  In  this  way  we  can  increase  the  denominator 
of  any  fraction. 

Example.     Change  f "  to  sixteenths  of  an  inch. 

8    X"j=  iV)  Ans. 


14    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Explanation.  To  change  eighths  to  sixteenths  we  must 
multiply  the  denominator  by  2,  but  we  cannot  do  this  with- 
out changing  the  value  of  the  fraction  unless  we  also  multi- 
ply the  numerator  by  2.  Multiplying  both  the  numerator 
and  denominator  by  2  gives  the  required  result,  -^". 

Example.    Change  |"  to  thirty-seconds. 

f"Xl  =  f|"  Ans. 

Explanation.  We  must  multiply  the  denominator  8  by  4 
to  get  32.  If  we  multiply  the  denominator  by  4  we  must 
also  multiply  the  numerator  by  4.     The  result  is  |^". 

15.  Changing  Whole  Numbers  to  Improper  Fractions. 
A  whole  number  can  be  changed  into  the  form  of  a  fraction 
by  using  the  number  1  for  a  denominator.  This  does  not 
change  the  value  of  the  number.  For  example,  the  whole 
number  6  is  equal  to  -f .  We  can  multiply  both  the  numera- 
tor and  denominator  of  this  fraction  by  the  same  number 
without  changing  its  value. 

Example.     Change  the  whole  number  6  to  eighths. 


XI  =  ^  Ans. 


Explanation.  We  first  changed  the  whole  number  into 
the  form  of  a  fraction  by  using  the  denominator  1.  To 
reduce  |  to  8ths  we  must  multiply  both  numerator  and  de- 
nominator by  8.     The  result  is  an  improper  fraction,  ^. 

16.  Changing  Mixed  Nmnbers.  A  mixed  number  can 
be  changed  to  an  improper  fraction  by  multiplying  the 
whole  number  by  the  denominator  of  the  fraction,  adding 
to  this  the  numerator  of  the  fraction  and  placing  the  sum 
over  the  denominator.  The  result  will  be  an  improper 
fraction  which  is  equivalent  to  the  mixed  number, 


FKACTIONS  15 

Example.  Change  5§  to  an  improper  fraction  having 
2  for  a  denominator. 

Explanation.  In  one  unit  there  are  2  halves;  therefore, 
in  5  units  there  are  5  times  2  halves  or  10  halves.  Adding 
the  5  to  the  ^-  we  get  y-  for  the  result.  If  you  will  examine 
the  rule  given  above  you  will  see  that  it  has  been  followed 
in  the  solution  of  this  example. 

17.  Changing  Improper  Fractions.  Changing  an  im- 
proper fraction  to  a  mixed  number  is  just  the  reverse  of 
changing  a  mixed  number  to  an  improper  fraction.  The 
process  is  as  follows:  Divide  the  numerator  by  the  denomi- 
nator to  find  the  whole  number  and  annex  to  this  the  frac- 
tion obtained  by  using  the  remainder  for  a  numerator  and 
the  denominator  of  the  improper  fraction  for  a  denominator. 
The  result  is  a  mixed  number. 

Example.     Change  -^J  to  a  mixed  number. 

8  )39(  4|  Ans. 

32 


Explanation.  Dividing  the  numerator  by  the  denomi- 
nator, 8  goes  into  39  four  times  with  a  remainder  of  7. 
Placing  this  remainder  over  the  denominator  and  annexing 
this  fraction  to  the  whole  number  in  the  quotient,  we  have 
4|  for  the  result. 

18.  Least  Common  Denominator.  Suppose  you  are 
required  to  find  the  combined  thickness  of  two  boards  one 
of  which  is  I  of  an  inch  thick  and  the  other  is  f  of  an  inch 
thick.  If  you  measured  these  two  boards  together  with 
your  rule  you  would  see  at  once  that  the  combined  width 
is  I  of  an  inch.     How  would  you  add  these  two  fractions 


16    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


on  paper?  You  will  see  that  since  the  answer  is  |,  you  must 
change  both  of  the  fractions  to  eighths  before  you  can  add 
them,  because  you  cannot  add  two  things  that  are  not  of 
the  same  kind.  You  must,  therefore,  reduce  the  fractions 
to  a  common  denominator. 

Example.     What  is  the  sum  of  j"  and  |"? 


r'x^^r 


r 


Ans. 


Explanation.    Change  j"  to  eighths  by  multiplying  both 
numerator  and  denominator  by  2.    This  gives  f".    The 


Fig.  8. — Panel  for  a  Door 


other  fraction  is  already  expressed  in  eighths  so  that  we 
can  now  add  the  numerators  and  place  their  sum  over  the 
common  denominator. 

The  Least  Common  Denominator  is  the  smallest  denomi- 
nator to  which  all  of  several  fractions  may  be  changed. 
The  abbreviation  for  the  least  common  denominator  is 
L.C.D. 

If  you  are  working  with  ordinary  fractions  of  an  inch, 
it  is  not  difficult  to  find  the  L.C.D.  provided  all  of  the  frac- 
tions are  first  reduced  to  their  lowest  terms.  The  ordinary 
fractions  of  an  inch  commonly  used  are  halves,  quarters, 
eighths,  sixteenths,  thirty-seconds  and  sixty-fourths.  The 
L.C.D.  of  a  number  of  fractions  having  these  denomina- 


FRACTIONS  17 

tors  will  be  the  largest  denominator  which  occurs  in  the 
group. 

Example.     Find  the  L.C.D.  of  the  following  fractions: 

5      _7.      3      _9_     1      1       „  J    _5_ 
8)    16)    4>    32>    4>    2   '*^l'-l    16' 

5  y  4 -_  2_fl..  -I-V2  —  14-  IvS  —  24.  _g_. 

4Af  — ^^,       2A1B— F?)       i6/^T~TT-  /ins. 

Explanation.     Since  all  of  the  fractions  are  expressed 
in  their  lowest  terms,  we  can  determine  the  L.C.D.  by  in- 


-^^~ 


1          1 

1_ 

■  T" 

Fig.  9. — Board  Grooved  for  Splines. 

spection.  It  will  be  the  largest  number  among  the  denomi- 
nators which,  in  this  case,  is  32.  Now  taking  each  fraction 
in  turn  we  divide  its  denominator  mentally  into  32  to  get 
the  number  'by  which  it  must  be  multiplied.  We  then 
multiply  both  the  numerator  and  denominator  by  this  num- 
ber. 

19.  To  Find  the  Least  Common  Denominator.  Now 
and  then  it  is  necessary  to  find  the  L.C.D.  of  several  frac- 
tions when  it  cannot  be  determined  by  inspection.  In  that 
case,  we  first  place  the  denominators  in  a  row,  separating 
them  by  dashes.  Then  select  the  smallest  number,  other 
than  1,  which  will  be  exactly  contained  into  two  or  more 


18    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

of  the  denominators.  Draw  a  line  under  this  row  and  per- 
form the  division,  writing  the  quotients  below  the  line.  Also 
write  below  this  line  any  numbers  which  are  not  divisible 
by  the  divisor.  Then  repeat  the  operation,  selecting  a  new 
divisor  that  will  be  exactly  contained  into  two  or  more  of 
these  new  numbers.  Continue  this  process  until  "no  number 
will  exactly  divide  more  than  one  of  the  numbers  below  the 
line.  The  product  of  all  of  the  divisors  and  all  of  the  num- 
bers left  in  the  last  line  of  quotients  is  the  L.C.D. 
Example.     Find  the  L.C.D.  of  j,  f ,  |,  and  ■^. 

2  )4— 3— 9— 16 
2)2—3—9—8 
3)1—3—9—  4 

1—1—3—  4 
L.C.D.  =  2X2X3X3X4  =  144  Ans. 

Explanation.  First  place  the  denominators  of  the  frac- 
tions in  a  row,  separating  them  by  dashes.  Then  select 
the  number  2  for  a  divisor  which  will  be  contained  into  both 
4  and  16.  Perform  the  division  and  write  down  the  quotients, 
bringing  down  the  3  and  9  also.  Select  2  again  and  divide 
it  into  2  and  8,  writing  down  the  quotients  and  the  3  and 
the  9  as  before.  The  number  2  will  no  longer  be  contained 
into  more  than  one  of  the  numbers  remaining;  hence,  we 
will  try  3.  This  will  go  into  3  and  9,  and  after  writing  the 
quotients  of  this  division  we  find  that  no  number  will  be 
contained  into  more  than  one  of  the  numbers  remaining. 
To  find  the  L.C.D.  then  we  multiply  all  of  the  divisors  and 
all  of  the  remaining  numbers  together.  This  gives  the 
result  144,  which  is  the  smallest  number  into  which  all 
of  the  denominators  will  be  exactly  contained  without  a 
remainder. 


FRACTIONS 


19 


20.  To   Reduce    to  the  Least   Common   Denominator. 

After  we  have  found  the  L.C.D.  we  next  reduce  each  fraction 
in  turn  to  that  denominator.  To  do  this  we  multiply  both 
the  numerator  and  the  denominator  by  such  a  number  as 
will  raise  the  fraction  to  the  required  L.C.D.  To  find  the 
number  by  which  to  multiply,  divide  the  denominator  of 
the  fraction  into  the  L.C,D.  The  quotient  will  be  the 
required  number. 


|*^->i     B^D  i1k"H 

Fig.  10. — Section  of  Partition  Material. 


Example.    Reduce  the  fractions  in  the  previous  example 
to  their  L.C.D. 


144- 

-  4  =  36 

iX||  =  T¥r 

144- 

-  3  =  48 

2  s/  4  8  _    9  6 

3  A^g  — ITT 

144- 

-  9  =  16 

ixu=m 

144- 

-16=  9 

TeX    |=TTT 

Ans. 

Explanation.  In  the  previous  example  we  found  that 
the  L.C.D.  of  l,i,  I,  and  ys  was  144.  We  must  then  divide 
each  denominator  into  this  number  in  turn  and  multiply 
both  numerator  and  denominator  of  the  fraction  by  this 
quotient.  Taking  the  first  fraction,  4  will  go  into  144 
thirty-six  times.  Multiplying  both  the  numerator  and  the 
denominator  of  the  fraction  j  by  36  we  get  -fj^  for  the 
result.  We  proceed  in  exactly  the  same  way  for  each  of  the 
other  fractions.  v. 


20    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

21.  Adding  Fractions.  To  add  fractions  change  them 
to  their  L.C.D.,  then  add  the  numerators  and  place  their 
sum  over  the  L.C.D.  Reduce  the  resulting  fraction  to  its 
lowest  terms  if  necessary. 

Example.  Add  the  following  fractions  of  an  inch:  f", 
A",  ¥',  f "  and  ^". 


3"    8      24 

4   ^8  ~ 

32" 

5"    2      10 
16^2 

32" 

1"     16     16 
2  ^16 

32" 

3"    4      12 
8  ^4  ~ 

32" 

9-1   _  9 
32^1 

32" 

71 

"^)71(2^ 

64 

~7 

Ans. 


Explanation.  By  inspection  we  see  that  32  is  the  L.C.D. 
Changing  each  fraction  to  this  L.C.D.  and  adding  the 
numerators,  we  have  |^".  Reducing  this  improper  fraction 
to  a  mixed  number  gives  2^"  as  the  result. 

22.  Subtracting  Fractions.  To  subtract  fractions  we 
must  first  change  them  to  their  L.C.D.  the  same  as  we  did 
in  adding  fractions.    Then  subtract  the  numerator  of  the 


FRACTIONS  21 

subtrahend  from  the  numerator  of  the  minuend  and  write 
the  result  over  the  common  denominator.     If  necessary, 
reduce  the  result  to  its  lowest  terms. 
Example.     Subtract  a^"  from  |", 

7     28  ■ 


8  32 

J 

32 


25"  Ans. 

32 

Explanation.  Changing  |"  to  thirty-seconds,  we  multiply 
both  numerator  and  denominator  by  4.  This  gives  ff". 
We  can  now  subtract  •^"  and  obtain  ff "  for  the  result. 


22    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Summary  of  Chapter  II 

7.  The  numerator  and  the  denominator  of  a  fraction 
may  both  be  divided  by  the  same  number  without  changing  the 
value  of  the  fraction.     (Sec.  13.) 

8.  The  numerator  and  the  denominator  of  a  fraction 
may  both  be  multiplied  by  the  same  number  without  changing 
the  value  of  the  fraction.     (Sec.  14.) 


Fia.  11. — Mortise  and  Tenon  Joint  for  Table  Leg. 


9.  To  reduce  a  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms,  divide 
both  the  numerator  and  the  denominator  by  the  largest 
number  which  will  exactly  go  into  each  of  them.     (Sec.  13.) 

10.  To  reduce  a  fraction  to  higher  terms,  multiply  both 
the  numerator  and  denominator  by  the  number  which  will 
give  the  required  denominator.     (Sec.  14.) 

11.  To  change  a  whole  nimiber  to  an  improper  fraction, 
having  a  given  denominator,  supply  the  denominator  1  to 


FRACTIONS 


23 


the  whole  number  and  multiply  both  numerator  and  denomi- 
nator of  this  resulting  fraction  by  the  number  which  will 
give  the  required  denominator.     (Sec.  15.) 

12.  To  change  a  mixed  number  to  an  improper  fraction, 
multiply  the  whole  number  by  the  denominator  of  the  frac- 
tion, add  to  this  the  numerator  of  the  fraction  and  place 
the  sum  over  the  denominator.     (Sec.  16.) 

13.  To  change  an  improper  fraction  to  a  mixed  number, 
divide  the  numerator  by  the  denominator  to  find  the  whole 


Fig.  12. — Dovetail  Drawer  Joint. 


number  and  annex  to  this  the  fraction  obtained  by  using 
the  remainder  for  a  numerator  and  the  denominator  of  the 
improper  fraction  for  a  denominator.     (Sec.  17.) 

14.  To  find  the  least  common  denominator  of  several 
fractions,  find  the  least  number  into  which  each  of  the  de- 
nominators will,  be  exactly  contained  without  a  remainder. 
(Sec.  18  and  19.) 

15.  To  reduce  several  fractions  to  their  least  common 
denominator,  multiply  both  the  numerator  and  the  denomi- 
nator of  each  fraction  by  such  a  number  as  will  give  the 
required  L.C.D.     (Sec.  20.) 

16.  To  add  fractions,  first  reduce  them  to  their  L.C.D., 


24    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND   BUILDERS 

then  add  the  numerators  and  place  their  sum  over  the  com- 
mon denominator.  SimpHfy  this  result,  if  possible.  (Sec. 
21.) 

17.  To  subtract  fractions,  first  reduce  them  to  their 
L.C.D.,  then  subtract  their  numerators  and  place  the  result 
over  the  common  denominator.  Simplify,  if  possible.  (Sec. 
22.) 


Fig.  13. — Dovetail  Mortise  Joint. 


PROBLEMS 

17.  (a)  Change  f|"  to  a  mixed  number. 

(6)  Change  9|"  to  an  improper  fraction. 

18.  Which  is  greater,  H"  or  |"? 

19.  Reduce  the  following  fractions  to  their  lowest  terms:    ^, 

«         18        8 

ie»  32)  T2' 

20.  Change  the  following  fractions  to  their  L.C.D. :  A",  fj", 

i",  A". 

21.  Add  the  following  fractions:  A",  {",  I"  and  ^". 

22.  From  f  take  A". 


FRACTIONS  25 

23.  Fig.  8  shows  a  panel  for  a  door.  What  is  the  thickness  of 
the  panel? 

24.  The  door  stile  shown  in  Fig.  8  is  to  be  1 1"  thick.  If  the 
veneers  are  each  ^"  thick,  how  thick  must  the  core  be? 

25.  A  drawing  board  is  built  of  three  plies;  one  is  f"  thick, 
one  is  H"  thick  and  one  is  ^"  thick.  What  is  the  total  thick- 
ness of  the  board? 

26.  A  dressed  board  is  required  f|"  thick.  How  much  must 
be  planed  off  from  a  rough  board  1"  thick  to  give  the  required 
thickness? 

27.  A  floor  is  laid  by  first  putting  down  the  rough  sheathing 
which  is  I"  thick.  On  this  are  placed  furring  strips  |"  thick  and 
then  the  top  or  finish  floor  is  laid  which  consists  of  boards  \i" 
thick.     What  is  the  total  thickness  of  this  floor? 

28.  Fig.  9  shows  a  board  grooved  for  splines.  If  a  A"X|" 
sphne  is  to  be  used,  what  will  be  the  width  of  the  projection  A  on 
each  side  of  the  groove? 

29.  Fig.  10  shows  1X4  partition  material  in  section.  Give 
the  missing  dimensions  indicated  by  the  letters  A,  B,  C  and  D. 

30.  Flooring  I5"  nominal  size  is  worked  to  Hi"  in  the  mill. 
How  much  is  it  scant? 

31.  Fig.  11  shows  a  mortise  and  tenon  joint  for  a  table  leg. 
How  far  back  from  the  face  of  the  leg  must  the  outside  edge  of 
the  mortise  be?     In  other  words,  what  is  the  distance  A7 

32.  What  is  the  missing  dimension  on  the  dovetail  drawer  joint 
indicated  by  the  letter  A  in  Fig.  12? 

33.  What  must  be  the  size  of  the  square  key  used  for  the  dove- 
tail mortise  joint  shown  in  Fig.  13? 

34.  A  lumber  dealer  has  in  stock  2000  bundles  of  shingles. 
Of  these  400  bundles  are  graded  Extra  Clear  and  1600  are  Extra 
*A*.  Each  grade  is  what  fractional  part  of  the  whole  stock? 
Give  the  fractions  in  their  lowest  terms. 


CHAPTER  III 

MIXED  NUMBERS.  ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION  AND 
MULTIPLICATION  OF  MIXED  NUMBERS.  CAN- 
CELLATION 

23.  Working  with  Mixed  Numbers.  In  performing  opera- 
tions with  mixed  numbers,  there  are  two  possible  methods 
of  procedure;  either  the  whole  numbers  and  the  fractions 
may  each  be  handled  separately  or  the  mixed  numbers  may 
be  reduced  to  improper  fractions  and  the  operations  per- 
formed as  though  working  directly  with  fractions.  In 
general,  the  first  method  is  used  when  adding  or  subtracting 
mixed  numbers  and  the  second  method  is  used  when  multi- 
plying or  dividing  them. 

24.  Adding  Mixed  Numbers.  It  is  often  necessary  to 
add  mixed  numbers.  Although  this  operation  is  somewhat 
long  it  is  not  at  all  difficult.  To  add  mixed  numbers  we  first 
add  the  whole  numbers  and  then  the  fractions,  reducing  the 
final  result  to  its  lowest  terms. 

Example.    What  is  the  sum  of  the  following  dimensions: 

61",  3A",  9ii",  Qh"  and  4^"? 

28 
6|"  (Reduce  fractions  to  L.C.D.)  = — ^ 

^^"  "       32 

^i«  32 

26 


MIXED  NUMBERS  27 

16 


VJ 

32 

4^" 

3 
32 

28 

75 

+ 
23T 

32 

30H"  Ans. 

Reducing  =  32)75(2i|" 

64 

11 

Explanation.  The  first  step  is  to  write  the  numbers  in 
a  vertical  column  for  adding.  It  is  then  necessary  to  reduce 
the  fractions  to  a  common  denominator  before  we  can  add 
them.  The  common  denominator  in  this  case  is  easily  seen 
to  be  32.  We  must,  then,  multiply  both  the  numerator  and 
denominator  of  each  fraction  by  such  a  number  as  will  make 
the  denominator  of  the  new  fraction  32.  After  this  has  been 
done  we  add  the  numerators  and  place  their  sum  over  the 
common  denominator,  finally  reducing  the  resulting  improper 
fraction  to  a  mixed  number,  which  is  2f^".  We  next  add  the 
whole  numbers  together  to  get  28  and  to  this  we  add  the 
number  obtained  by  adding  the  fractions.  This  gives  30|^" 
as  the  final  result. 

25.  Subtracting  Mixed  Numbers.  To  subtract  mixed 
numbers  we  treat  the  whole  numbers  and  the  fractions 
separately,  just  as  we  did  in  adding  them.  We  subtract 
the  fractions  and  the  whole  numbers  separately  and  reduce 
the  resulting  expression  to  its  lowest  terms. 

Example.     How  much  more  is  Qfl"  than  7f "? 

911"  (Reduce  fractions  to  L.C.D.)    =9if" 

75'/  _710" 

2^'     Ans. 


28    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


i___ 


Fig.  14.— Turned 
Porch  Post. 


Explanation.  The  first  step,  just  as  in 
adding  fractions,  is  to  write  the  figures  in 
a  vertical  column.  We  must  then  reduce 
the  fractions  to  a  common  denominator 
before  we  can  subtract  them.  The  L.C.D. 
in  this  case  is  16.  We  do  not  have  to  do 
anything  with  the  xt"  but  we  do  have  to 
change  |"  to  sixteenths.  Multiplying  both 
the  numerator  and  the  denominator  of  this 
fraction  by  2  gives  ]  g .  We  can  now  sub- 
tract both  the  fractions  and  the  whole 
numbers  to  get  the  result,  2^",  which  tells 
how  many  inches  longer  is  a  stick  which 
measures  9x1"  than  a  stick  which  measures 

•8     • 

Sometimes  in  subtracting  mixed  num- 
bers we  find  that  the  fraction  in  the  sub- 
trahend (the  number  to  be  taken  away) 
is  larger  than  the  fraction  in  the  minuend 
(the  number  from  which  we  subtract).  In 
this  case  we  may  borrow  one  whole  unit 
or  1  from  the  whole  number  of  the  minu- 
end and  add  it  to  the  fraction  of  the 
minuend  after  it  has  been  reduced  to  the 
same  denominator.  This  makes  an  im- 
proper fraction  out  of  it  and  we  can  then 
subtract  the  other  fraction  from  it. 

Example.  How  much  wider  is  a  board 
which  measures  8j"  than  a  board  which 
measures  5|"  ? 


21' 


Ans. 


MIXED  NUMBERS  29 

Explanation.  Here  we  cannot  take  |"  from  I"  until  we 
change  |"  to  eighths  and  add  the  1  or  |^  to  it  which  we 
have  borrowed  from  the  whole  number  8.  This  makes  the 
minuend  read  7-^-"  and  we  can  now  proceed  to  subtract. 
The  result  is  2f ",  which  tells  how  much  wider  the  one  board 
is  than  the  other. 

If  the  minuend  happens  to  be  a  whole  number  without 
a  fraction  we  can  borrow  1  and  change  it  into  a  fraction 
as  we  did  in  the  previous  example. 

Example.     What  is  the  difference  between  5|"  and  8"? 

8"  =  7f" 

2r  Ans. 

26.  Multiplication  of  Fractions  and  Mixed  Numbers. 

We  have  already  learned  that  multiplication  is  a  short 
method  of  addition.  In  multiplying  fractions  and  whole 
numbers,  fractions  and  fractions,  fractions  and  mixed  num- 
bers, and  mixed  numbers  together,  certain  precautions  must 
be  taken  which  lead  to  speed  and  accuracy. 

27.  The  Product  of  a  Whole  Number  and  a  Fraction. 
To  multiply  a  whole  number  by  a  fraction  we  multiply  the 
number  by  the  numerator  and  divide  this  product  by  the 
denominator,  or  if  it  is  possible  without  a  remainder,  simply 
divide  the  denominator  by  the  number. 

Multiplying  a  whole  number  by  a  fraction  is  the  same 
thing  as  multiplying  the  fraction  by  the  wholo  number; 
thus,  5 X|  is  the  same  thing  as  I X 5. 

Example:     What  is  5  times  f? 

5Xf  =  -V=3f  Ans. 

Explanation.  Multiplying  the  whole  number  5  by  the 
numerator  of  the  fraction  5   gives  the  product  25,   and 


30     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

dividing  this  by  the  denominator  7  to  reduce  the  improper 
fraction  to  a  mixed  number  gives  3f.  Let  us  test  this 
problem  by  addition:  -fH-f+f+4+4  =  -¥-  =  34,  which  is 
the  same  result  as  found  before. 

Example.     What  will  be  the  combined  thickness  of  4 
boards  each  |"  thick? 

^x|  =  ^  =  3i  Arts. 


Explanation.  This  is  a  case  in  which  the  whole  number 
will  be  contained  exactly  into  the  denominator,  without 
a  remainder.  Performing  this  division,  4  goes  into  8  two 
times.  Cross  out  the  4  and  the  8  and  write  the  quotient 
of  this  division  near  the  8.  Since  7  is  left  above  the  line 
and  2  is  left  below  the  line,  the  result  of  the  multiplication 
is  I,  which,  when  simplified,  equals  3^.  It  is  suggested  that 
the  student  test  this  result  by  multiplying  the  whole  number 
by  the  numerator  and  dividing  this  product  by  the  denomi- 
nator.    Which  method  is  easier? 

28.  The  Product  of  Two  Fractions.  To  multiply  one 
fraction  by  another,  we  multiply  the  numerators  together 
for  the  new  numerator  and  multiply  the  denominators 
together  for  the  new  denominator. 

Example.     What  is  the  product  of  f  and  f  ? 

jXg^^Ta  A.ns. 

Explanation.  Multiplying  the  numerators,  3X3  equals 
9,  which  is  the  numerator  of  the  product.  Multiplying  the 
denominators,  4X8  equals  32,  which  is  the  denominator  of 
the  product.     The  result  is,  therefore,  ^. 

29.  "  Of  "  means  "  Times."  The  word  of  is  often  seen 
in  problems  in  fractions.     For  example,  the  statement  some- 


MIXED  NUMBERS 


31 


times  appears  like  this:  What  is  |  of  5"?  In  such  a  case 
we  work  the  problem  by  multiplying,  so  we  say  that  of 
means  times.  You  can  see  that  this  is  so  by  taking  a  piece 
of  wood  5"  long  and  cutting  it  into  four  equal  parts  and  then 
taking  three  of  these  parts.  These  three  parts  will  be  f  of  5", 
and  by  actual  measurement,  they  will  be  3|"  long.  Thus 
we  know  that  f  of  5"  =  3f ".  Let  us  now  see  what  f  times  5" 
3t",  which  is  the  same  value  that  we  found 


IS 


X5"  =  J^ 


Fig.  15. — Four-light  Window  Sash. 

before.  Therefore,  we  see  that  the  word  of  when  used  thu3 
signifies  multiplication. 

30.  Mtiltipljring  a  Group  of  Whole  Numbers  and  Frac- 
tions. If  we  wish  to  multiply  any  number  of  whole  numbers 
and  fractions  together,  we  multiply  the  whole  numbers  and 
the  numerators  together  for  the  numerator  of  the  product 
and  multiply  the  denominators  together  for  the  denominator 
of  the  product.     Reduce  the  result  to  its  simplest  form. 

Example.      What    is    the    product    of    the    following: 

2X|X5Xt? 

„     1      ,     3     2X1X5X3     30     15 


Ans. 


32    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Explanation:  The  product  of  the  whole  numbers  an'i 
the  numerators  is  30  and  the  product  of  the  denominators 
is  32.  This  gives  fl,  which,  when  reduced  to  its  lowest 
terms,  equals  yf. 

31.  Multiplying  Mixed  Numbers.  To  multiply  a  mixed 
number  by  a  fraction  or  to  multiply  two  mixed  numbers 
together,  reduce  the  mixed  numbers  to  improper  fractions 
and  proceed  as  in  multiplying  fractions,  reducing  the  prod- 
uct to  its  lowest  terms.  Never  try  to  multiply  mixed 
numbers  without  first  reducing  them  to  improper  fractions. 

Example.     Multiply  5|  by  7^. 


51=^ 


43 

8 


71=  — 

*  2         ^ 


15 
2 


43     15^645 
S'^  2       16 


645 
Reducing,  -r^  =  16  ) 645(40 1^  Ans. 

^^  64 


Explanation.  First  reducing  the  mixed  numbers  to  im- 
proper fractions,  5f  =  \^-  and  7^  =  J/.  We  then  multiply 
these  just  as  we  did  when  working  with  fractions.  This 
gives  W^-,  which  may  be  reduced  to  the  mixed  number,  40]^. 

32.  Factors.  The  factors  of  a  quantity  are  the  numbers 
which  multiplied  together  will  make  that  quantity.  The 
factors  of  4  are  2  and  2  because  2X2  =  4.  If  we  multiply 
2X2X3  we  get  12  and,  therefore,  the  factors  of  12  are  2 
and  2  and  3.     Notice  that  every  factor  of  a  quantity  will 


MIXED  NUMBERS 


33 


-3'0^ 


^Ji- 


exactly  divide  the  quantity;    that  is,  will  divide  it  without 
a  remainder. 

33.  Cancellation.  Now  that  we  know  what  a  factor  is 
we  can  work  many  prob- 
lems in  the  multiplication 
of  fractions  and  whole  num- 
bers by  the  short  method  of 
cancellation.  You  remem- 
ber from  a  previous  lesson 
that  we  can  divide  both 
the  numerator  and  de- 
nominator of  a  fraction  by 
the  same  number  without 
changing  its  value.  Can- 
cellation consists  in  separat- 
ing the  numerator  and  the 
denominator  of  the  fraction 
into  their  factors  and  di- 
viding by  (canceling  out) 
their  common  factors.  If 
a  number  of  fractions  and 
whole  numbers  or  mixed 
numbers  are  to  be  multi- 
plied together,  the  method 
of  canceling  can  be  used 
to  great  advantage.  To 
show  the  advantage  of  the 
method  of  cancellation  we 
will  work  the  same  example  out  both  ways. 

Example.     Multiply  the  following    fractions    together: 

35     34     12 
48^21^17* 


Fig.  16.— Door. 


34    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


35X34X12     14,280 


48X21X17     17,136 


7  = 


2040 


2448 


6  = 


340 
408 


4  = 


85 
102 


17  =  ^ 
6 


Ans. 


Explanation.  Multiplying  all  of  the  numerators  together 

to  get  the  new  numerator  and  all  of  the  denominators  to  get 

the  new  denominator,  as  we  have  been  previously  directed, 

14  280 
gives  us     _'       .     This  fraction  must  be  reduced  to  its 

lowest  terms  and  we  do  this  by  dividing  both  the  numerator 
and  the  denominator  by  the  same  number.  The  fraction 
is  so  large  that  we  cannot  see  at  first  the  greatest  number 
that  will  be  contained  exactly  in  both  the  numerator  and 
the  denominator;  we  will  try  7.  We  write  7  at  the  right 
of  the  vertical  line  so  that  we  can  remember  what  the 
divisor  is  and  proceed.  The  result  of  the  first  division  is 
2040 
2448' 


We  next  try  6  as  a  divisor.     The  result  of  this  divi- 

340 
sion  is  jT^.     Then  we  divide  by  4  and  finally  by  17  to  get 
40o 


the  result,  |. 
by  trial. 


We  must  determine  each  of  these  divisors 


Example.    Try  the  same  example  given  above  by  can- 
cellation. 

1 
5^1 


^^^Z^;j  6 


Ans. 


1 


Explanation.    Divide  7  into  35  in  the  numerator  and  21 
in  the  denominator.     7  is  a  factor  which  is  common  to  both 


MIXED  NUMBERS 


35 


35  and  21.  Cancel  the  35  and  write  5  above  it.  Cancel  the 
21  and  write  3  below  it.  12  will  divide  into  12  in  the  numer- 
ator and  48  in  the  denominator.  It  goes  into  12  once  and 
into  48  four  times.  17  will  go  into  34  in  the  numerator  and 
17  in  the  denominator.  It  goes  into  34  twice  and  into  17 
once.  Each  time  a  number  is  divided  we  cross  it  out  and 
write  the  quotient  obtained  near  it.     This  is  called  canceling. 


Fig.  17. — Forms  for  a  Concrete  Wall. 


The  numbers  now  left  in  the  numerator  are  5,  2  and  1  and 
in  the  denominator  4,  3  and  1.  2  will  divide  into  2  and  4, 
leaving  5,  1  and  1  in  the  numerator  and  2,  3  and  1  in  the 
denominator.  Now  multiply  these  remaining  factors  to- 
gether for  the  final  result,  which  is  |.  It  has  taken  quite 
a  while  to  tell  about  this,  but  in  actual  work  it  is  much 
easier  and  quicker  than  the  method  used  in  the  previous 
example. 


36    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Summary  of  Chapter  III 

18.  To  add  mixed  numbers,  first  add  the  whole  numbers 
and  then  the  fractions,  reducing  the  result  to  its  simplest 
form.     (Sec.  24.) 

19.  To  subtract  mixed  numbers,  subtract  the  fractions 
and  the  whole  numbers  separately  and  reduce  the  result 
to  its  simplest  form.     (Sec.  25.) 

20.  To  multiply  a  whole  number  by  a  fraction  mul- 
tiply the  number  by  the  numerator  and  divide  the  product 
by  the  denominator,  or  if  it  is  possible  without  a  remainder, 
divide  the  denominator  by  the  number  and  reduce  the  result 
to  its  simplest  form.     (Sec.  27.) 

21.  To  multiply  one  fraction  by  another,  multiply  the 
numerators  together  for  the  numerator  of  the  product  and 
the  denominators  together  for  the  denominator  of  the  prod- 
uct.    Reduce  the  result  to  its  simplest  form.     (Sec.  28.) 

22.  To  multiply  a  group  of  whole  numbers  and  fractions 
together,  multiply  the  numbers  and  the  numerators  together 
for  the  numerator  of  the  product  and  multiply  the  denomi- 
nators together  for  the  denominator  of  the  product.  Sim- 
plify the  result.     (Sec.  30.) 

23.  To  multiply  mixed  numbers  together,  first  reduce 
them  to  improper  fractions  and  then  proceed  as  in  multi- 
plying fractions.     (Sec.  31.) 

24.  To  multiply  by  cancellation,  write  the  numerators 
as  a  series  of  factors  and  also  the  denominators.  Then 
cancel  out  the  factors  which  are  common  to  both  the  numera- 
tors and  denominators.  Multiply  the  remaining  factors 
in  the  denominator  for  the  denominator  of  the  product. 
Simplify  the  result,  if  possible.     (Sec.  33.) 


MIXED  NUMBERS  37 


PROBLEMS 

35.  Add  the  following  mixed  numbers: 

6r,  2A",  111",  5H". 

36.  Multiply: 

(a)     2iX8XA. 

(fc)  fxfxuxi 

37.  If  a  carpenter  receives  65  cents  per  hour  how  much 
does  he  receive  per  day  of  8  hours?  How  much  does  he  get  per 
week  of  5^  days? 

38.  If  a  bricklayer  receives  72|  cents  per  hour,  how  much 
will  he  earn  per  year  of  230  days  of  8  hours  each? 

39.  What  is  the  cost  of  27f  sq.ft.  of  plate  glass  at  66f  cents 
per  square  foot? 

40.  If  20d  spikes  are  worth  4^  cents  per  pound,  how  much 
will  23  pounds  cost? 

41.  A  turned  porch  post  is  shown  in  Fig.  14.  What  is  the  total 
length  of  the  post?  If  a  10'  post  is  desired,  how  long  must  the 
distance  marked  A  be  if  we  do  not  change  any  other  dimensions? 

42.  A  special  4-light  window  sash  is  shown  in  Fig.  15.  What 
is  the  total  height  and  width  of  the  sash? 

43.  A  3'X7'  door  is  shown  in  Fig.  16.  What  are  the  widths  of 
the  rails  and  stiles  indicated  by  letters? 

44.  Each  rise  in  a  certain  stair  is  7^"  high  and  there  are  15 
risers.    What  is  the  total  rise  of  the  stair? 

45.  The  sum  of  the  rise  and  the  tread  should  about  equal  17 
in.  What  should  be  the  width  of  the  tread  in  Prob.  44  and  what 
is  the  total  run  of  the  stair? 

46.  Fig.  17  shows  an  arrangement  for  -the  forms  for  a  concrete 
wall.  A  contractor  finds  that  he  has  32  pieces  of  form  material, 
each  board  being  9|"  wide  actual  measurement  and  12'  long. 
How  high  can  he  build  the  forms  for  a  12'  section  of  the  wall? 

47.  A  gang  of  men  can  mix  and  place  8^  cu.  yds.  of  concrete 
per  hour.     How  much  can  they  place  per  daj'  of  8  hours? 

48.  The  size  of  the  Western  brick  is  8|"X4|"X2|".    If  the 


125658 


38    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND   BUILDERS 

mortar  joint  is  A"  thick  and  the  brick  are  laid  flat,  how  high  will 
a  wall  be  which  has  45  courses? 

49.  A  case  of  shelves  is  shown  in  Fig.  18.    What  is  the  total 
height  and  width  of  the  case? 


Fig.  18.— A  Case  of  Shelves. 


50.  The  actual  face  of  a  l"X3"  flooring  board  is  2^'.  A 
builder  has  on  hand  80  pieces  l"X3"  flooring  8  ft.  long.  Will 
these  cover  a  porch  floor  8  ft.  wide  by  14  ft.  long  ?  How  many 
pieces  will  be  left  over  ? 


CHAPTER  IV 

DIVISION  OF  FRACTIONS  AND  OF  MIXED  NUMBERS. 
COMPOUND  FRACTIONS 

34.  Division  of  Fractions.  If  we  were  required  to  di- 
vide anything  by  two  we  would  separate  it  into  two  equal 
parts.  One  of  these  parts  would  be  one-half  of  the  whole. 
Suppose  that  we  wish  to  divide  |  by  2,  we  would  write  it 
thus:  (a)  |-j-2  =  f  or,  in  other  words,  one-half  of  three- 
quarters  is  three-eighths.  But  of  means  the  same  thing  as 
times  as  explained  before.  We  could  write  this  same  opera- 
tion thus:  (6)  f  X|  =  |.  Thus  we  see  that  the  first  expres- 
sion and  the  second  are  equivalent.  You  will  notice  that 
the  whole  number  2  may  be  written  |,  as  previously  ex- 
plained, since  2  divided  by  1  equals  2,  Now  let  us  write 
these  two  expressions  directly  under  one  another  and  see 
what  conclusion  we  may  draw. 

(a)     f-l  =  f 
(&)     fXHI 

Do  you  see  that  the  first  looks  like  the  second  except 
that  the  division  sign  in  (a)  is  changed  to  the  multiplication 
sign  in  (6)  and  the  second  fraction  in  (6)  is  the  second  fraction 
in  (a)  only  it  is  turned  upside  down  ? 

We  can,  therefore,  write  the  following  rule  for  the  division 
of  fractions:  To  divide  one  fraction  by  another,  invert 
(turn  upside  down)  the  divisor  (the  second  fraction)  and 
proceed  as  in  multiplication. 

39 


40     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Example.  A  man  left  f  of  his  land  to  his  children, 
and  ^  of  this  to  his  eldest  son.  What  fraction  of  the  land 
did  his  eldest  son  get? 


5  = 


_  3 


X  i  —  tV 


Ans. 


Explanation.    The  estate  is  first  divided  into  three  equal 
parts.     Each  of  these  is  then  divided  into  five  equal  parts 


Fig.  19. 


to  determine  the  son's  share.  This  division  of  the  land  is 
shown  in  Fig.  19.  If  we  divide  f  by  5  this  would  be  equiva- 
lent to  multiplying!  by  ^and  the  result  of  this  multiplication 
is  ^,  which  is  the  fraction  of  the  original  property  which 
the  son  got. 

Example.     Divide  H  by  ^. 


64  •  32    04^  3      6' 


Ans. 


DIVISION  OF  FRACTIONS  41 

Explanation.  In  this  example  we  follow  the  rule  exactly. 
Notice  also  that  we  can  apply  the  method  of  cancellation. 
Do  not  fail  to  take  advantage  of  any  method  by  which  you 
can  shorten  your  work,     ei^  sfe  is  the  same  as  HX  V- 

35.  Compound  Fractions.     Division  is  indicated  by  a 

fraction.     If  we  divide  one  fraction  by  another,  we  may 

express  the  operation  as  a  compound  fraction.     A  compound 

fraction  has  a  fraction  for  a  numerator  and  a  fraction  for 

a  denominator. 

11 

Example.    Simplify  ^. 

32 

il_llx?-2-ll-l-^  Ans 

2 

Explan£ition.     This  is  the  same  example  as  the  one  just 

preceding  but  the  division  is  first  expressed  as  a  compound 

11 
^Taction.     The  expression  ~  means  that  ^  is  to  be  divided 

J2 

by  ^. 

36.  Dividing  a  Whole  Number  by  a  Fraction.  To  divide 
a  whole  number  by  a  fraction  we  write  the  whole  number 
over  the  denominator  1,  which  does  not  change  its  value, 
and  proceed  as  in  dividing  fractions. 

Example.     Divide  3  by  4. 

3  =  f. 

r"^7"~l^^~2~   =*  ^' 

2 

37.  Dividing  Mixed  Nmnbers.  To  divide  mixed  num- 
bers, we  first  reduce  them  to  improper  fractions  and  then 
proceed  as  in  dividing  fractions. 


42     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 
Example.     Divide  2^  by  61. 


5^25_^     4_2  . 

2  •  4~^^52^~5  '^^' 


38.  Solution  of  Problems.  Problems  involving  addition, 
subtraction,  multiplication  and  division  or  combinations  of 
these  operations  may  be  easily  solved  provided  the  con- 
ditions are  properly  analyzed.  A  problem  consists  of  three 
parts:  the  statement,  the  operation  and  the  conclusion  or 
answer.  The  statement  of  the  problem  contains  the  con- 
ditions and  these  must  be  carefully  thought  out  before  an 
attempt  is  made  to  perform  the  operations.  Be  sure  that 
you  understand  fully  what  is  required  by  the  problems; 
then  you  can  proceed  intelligently  with  the  necessary 
mathematical  operations.  The  conclusion  or  answer  should 
be  expressed  in  its  simplest  form. 

Example.  If  6  men  can  do  the  framing  for  a  certain 
house  in  4  days,  how  long  will  it  take  4  men  to  do  it? 

6X4  =  24  days  for  1  man  to  do  the  work. 
lof24=  6  days  for  4  men  Ans. 

Explanation.  If  6  men  do  the  work  in  4  days,  it  would 
take  1  man  6X4  =  24  days  at  the  same  rate  of  speed.  If 
4  men  are  working  together,  they  can  do  the  work  in  I  of 
this  time,  or  j  of  24  equals  6  days. 

39.  Classes  of  Problems.  Most  problems  involving 
fractions  fall  into  one  of  three  classes. 


DIVISION  OF  FRACTIONS  43 

Case  1.  Given  the  whole  to  find  a  part:  the  whole 
multiplied  by  the  fraction  equals  the  part. 

Case  2.  Given  a  part  to  find  the  whole :  the  part  divided 
by  the  fraction  equals  the  whole. 

Case  3.  To  find  what  part  one  number  is  of  another: 
the  part  divided  by  the  whole  equals  the  fraction. 

Example  of  Case  1.  A  contractor  purchases  15,000 
lineal  feet  of  2X4  scantling.  Three-fifths  of  this  order  are 
pieces  18  ft.  long  and  the  remainder  are  12  ft.  long.  How 
many  pieces  of  each  length  did  he  receive? 

|(the  fraction)  X  15,000  (the  whole)  =9000  ft.  (the  part). 
9000 ^  18  =  500  pieces  18  ft.  long  Ans. 

15,000-9000  =  6000  ft. 

6000-1-12  =  500  pieces  12  ft.  long  Ans. 

Explanation.  If  the  whole  amount  is  15,000  lineal  feet 
and  the  part  is  |  of  the  whole,  we  must  find  |  of  15,000  or 
multiply  15,000  by  |  to  get  9000  ft.,  the  required  part.  If 
this  9000  ft.  is  divided  into  pieces  each  18  ft.  long,  we  must 
divide  by  18  to  find  the  number  of  pieces.  To  find  the  part 
which  is  in  12  ft.  lengths,  we  may  subtract  the  part  already 
found  from  the  whole.  9000  from  15,000  gives  6000  ft. 
in  12  ft.  lengths.     Divide  6000  by  12  to  get  500  pieces. 

Example  of  Case  2.  A  contractor  orders  a  certain  num- 
ber of  brick,  two-sevenths  of  which  are  to  be  face  brick. 
He  receives  16,000  face  brick.  How  many  brick  does  he 
receive  in  the  entire  order?  How  many  common  brick 
does  he  receive? 

16,000  (the  part)^f  (the  fraction)  =  16,000X1  =  56,000 

(the  whole). 
56,000  brick- 16,000  face  brick  =  40,000  common  brick. 
56,000  total;  40,000  common  brick;  16,000  face  brick.    Ans. 


44    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Explanation.  If  16,000  is  ^  of  the  whole,  \  will  be  5  of 
16,000  or  8000,  and  ^  will  be  7  times  8000  or  56,000,  which 
is  the  total  number  of  bricks  ordered.  This  is  equivalent 
to  dividing  16,000  by  f .  The  difference  between  the  whole 
number  of  bricks  and  the  number  of  face  bricks  will  give  the 
number  of  common  bricks. 

Example  of  Case  3.  A  lumber  inspector  finds  that  a 
board  18  ft.  long  shows  sap  for  18  in.  of  its  length  and  wane 
for  24  in.  What  fractional  part  shows  sap  and  what  part 
wane? 

18  ft.Xl2  ins.  =  216  ins.,  the  length  of  the  board  in  inches. 

[        Ans. 

^,„  ,., — —. — r^  =-7r  (the  fraction)  shows  wane. J 
216  (the  whole)      9 

Explanation.  In  order  that  we  may  not  have  to  deal 
with  mixed  numbers  it  is  convenient  to  reduce  the  length 
of  the  board  in  feet  to  inches.  Then  the  part  divided  by 
the  whole  will  equal  the  fraction.  18  divided  by  216 
(expressed  in  the  form  of  a  fraction  and  reduced  to  its  lowest 
terms)  gives  ^\,  the  fractional  part  which  shows  sap.  24 
divided  by  216  gives  ^,  the  fractional  part  which  shows  wane. 


DIVISION  OF  FRACTIONS  45 


Summary  of  Chapter  IV 

25.  To  divide  one  fraction  by  another,  invert  the  divisor 
and  proceed  as  in  multiplication.     (Sec.  34  and  35.) 

26.  To  divide  a  whole  number  by  a  fraction,  supply  the 
denominator  1  to  the  whole  number  and  divide  as  with 
fractions.     (Sec.  36.) 

27.  To  divide  mixed  nimibers,  first  reduce  them  to 
improper  fractions  and  proceed  as  in  dividing  fractions. 
(Sec.'  37.) 

28.  To  find  the  part  when  the  whole  is  given,  multiply 
the  whole  by  the  fraction.     (Sec.  39.) 

29.  To  find  the  whole  when  a  part  is  given,  divide  the 
part  by  the  fraction.     (Sec.  39.) 

30.  To  find  what  part  one  number  is  of  another,  divide 
the  part  by  the  whole  to  find  the  fraction.     (Sec.  39.) 

PROBLEMS 

51.  Divide  U  by  3f. 

2K10. 

52.  A  mortise  |"  wide  is  to  go  in  the  exact  center  of  a  piece 
of  If"  lumber.     How  much  wood  will  be  left  on  each  side  of  it? 

53.  The  distance  from  the  first  floor  of  a  dwelling  house  to 
the  second  floor  is  9'  10".  If  16  risers  are  required  in  the  stair, 
what  will  be  the  rise  of  each  step? 

54.  A  carpenter  has  a  roof  surface  22  ft.  long  and  15  ft.  wide 
to  cover  with  sheathing  which  measures  5^"  wide.  The  boards 
are  spaced  2"  apart.  How  many  lineal  (running)  feet  of  sheath- 
ing will  he  need? 

55.  How  many  times  may  a  board  12"  wide  be  ripped  if  the 
strips  are  to  be  1"  wide  and  the  saw  cut  |"  wide?  How  wide  a 
strip  will  be  left? 

56.  If  shingles  are  laid  4|"  to  the  weather,  how  many  courses 
will  be  required  to  cover  a  roof  slope  15'  9"  long? 


46    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

57.  A  certain  job  requires  36  hours  to  finish  it.  If  a  man  works 
at  it  1  ^  hours  a  day,  how  many  days  will  it  take  to  complete  it? 

58.  If  I  of  a  thousand  feet  of  lumber  costs  $3.00,  how  much 
will  1000  feet  cost? 

59.  A  pile  of  lumber  contains  12,000  feet.  A  contractor  pur- 
chased §  of  it.     How  many  feet  did  he  buy? 

60.  A  man  builds  three  houses  which  cost  him  a  total  of  $12,000. 
The  first  cost  5  of  the  whole,  the  second  cost  §  of  the  whole  and 
the  third  cost  the  remainder.     What  is  the  cost  of  each  house? 

61.  A  builder  buys  240  boards,  J  of  which  are  graded  as  No.  1 
Clear  and  the  remainder  are  No.  2.  How  many  No.  1  boards 
and  how  many  No.  2  boards  did  he  receive? 

62.  A  man  bought  a  pile  of  lumber  estimating  it  to  contain 
2000  ft.  On  measuring  he  found  that  it  contained  1960  ft.  What 
fractional  part  did  he  lose? 

63.  Three-eighths  of  a  thousand  feet  of  lumber  costs  $ii4. 
What  is  the  price  of  the  lumber  per  thousand? 

64.  A  board  weighs  42  pounds  green:  in  drying  the  weight 
decreases  \.    What  does  it  weigh  when  dried? 

65.  In  cutting  material  to  lay  a  certain  floor  the  waste  amounts 
to  50  ft.  in  every  thousand.     What  fractional  part  is  wasted? 

66.  A  man  puts  in  an  eight-hour  day.  One-third  of  the  day 
he  is  employed  in  laying  floor,  one-eighth  in  setting  bridge  braces 
and  the  remainder  in  finishing.  How  many  hours  and  minutes 
does  he  spend  at  each  kind  of  work? 

67.  A  fence  post  is  9  ft.  long  and  ys  of  its  length  is  below 
ground.     How  many  feet  are  in  sight? 

68.  A  man  does  one-third  of  a  piece  of  work  in  51  hours.  How 
long  will  it  take  him  to  complete  the  entire  job? 


CHAPTER  V 

MONEY.  ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION,  MULTIPLICATION 
AND  DIVISION  OF  MONEY  QUANTITIES.  CHECKS. 
STATEMENTS.    RECEIPTS.    ESTIMATES 

40.  Money.  The  money  unit  in  the  United  States  is 
the  dollar.  The  dollar  is  divided  into  cents  each  of  which 
has  a  value  of  one  hundredth  of  the  dollar.  Fifty  cents  are 
-jW  or  one-half  of  one  dollar.  Twenty-five  cents  are  ^W 
or  a  quarter  of  a  dollar.  The  dime  is  one-tenth  of  a  dollar 
and  the  five-cent  piece  or  nickel  is  one-twentieth  of  a  dollar. 
To  facilitate  business  transactions,  currency  is  issued  in 
gold,  silver,  nickel,  bronze  and  paper  money  of  various 
denominations. 

The  builder  should  learn  to  be  very  accurate  in  his  com- 
putations with  money  and  he  should  be  able  to  keep  his 
accounts  in  a  neat  and  orderly  manner.  If  he  does  this, 
he  will  save  himself  much  trouble  and  worry.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  know  how  to  keep  a  set  of  business  books  in 
order  to  manage  your  accounts.  Much  of  the  business  of 
to-day  is  done  without  the  use  of  complicated  systems  of 
bookkeeping.  A  satisfactory  record  may  be  made  by  filing 
visible  evidences  of  money  transactions  such  as  checks, 
receipts,  statements,  inventories,  etc. 

41.  Writing  and  Reading  Money  Sums.  When  express- 
ing money  in  numerals,  the  dollar  sign  ($)  is  placed  before 
the  number  of  dollars,  a  period  is  placed  after  this  and  the 
number  of  cents  follows:    thus,  eight  dollars  and  seventy- 

47 


48    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

five  cents  is  written  $8.75.  If  cents  only  are  to  be  written, 
no  figures  are  written  to  the  left  of  the  period:  thus,  the 
sum  of  eight  cents  is  written  $.08.  It  is  also  sometimes 
written  8^. 

42.  The  Decimal  Point.  This  system  gives  us  our  first 
introduction  to  decimal  fractions.  The  period  mentioned 
above  is  the  decimal  point.  The  first  figure  to  the  right  of 
the  decimal  point  indicates  the  number  of  dimes  or  tenths 
of  a  dollar  in  the  sum.  The  second  figure  to  the  right  of  the 
decimal  point  indicates  the  number  of  cents  or  hundredths 
of  a  dollar  in  the  sum.  This  method  of  writing  money 
quantities  greatly  simplifies  the  mathematical  operations 
because  we  may  handle  parts  or  fractions  of  a  dollar  in  the 
same  manner  that  we  handle  whole  numbers. 

43.  Addition.  Money  quantities  are  added  in  the  same 
manner  that  we  add  whole  numbers.  In  writing  down  money 
quantities  for  adding,  it  is  necessary  to  see  that  all  of  the 
periods  are  directly  under  one  another  in  a  vertical  colunm. 
If  this  is  done,  the  cents,  dimes  and  the  dollars  will  be  directly 
under  one  another.  The  number  of  tens  of  cents  may  be 
carried  forward  and  added  to  the  dime  colunm.  The  number 
of  hundreds  of  cents  will  represent  dollars  and  may  be  added 
to  the  dollar  column. 

Example.    Add  $3.25,  $5.56,  $1.00  and  $.85. 

$3.25 

5.56 

1.00 

.85 


$10.66  Ans. 

Explanation.    Add  the  column  to  the  right  or  the  cents 
column  first,  5+0+6+5  =  16  cents.     This  is  6  cents  and  1 


MONEY  49 

dime.  Put  down  the  6  and  carry  the  dime  to  the  next 
column.  1+8+0+5+2  =  16  dimes.  Put  down  the  6  and 
carry  the  1  to  the  dollar  column.  1  +  1+5+3  =  10  dollars, 
which  we  put  down  to  complete  the  sum. 

44.  Subtraction.  Subtraction  of  money  is  performed 
as  in  the  subtraction  of  whole  numbers,  the  only  difference 
being  the  use  of  the  decimal  point  separating  dollars  and 
cents. 

Example.    Subtract  $6.28  from  $9.10. 

$9.10 
6.28 


$2.82  Ans. 

Explanation.  We  set  the  numbers  down  with  the  decimal 
points  under  each  other  just  as  in  addition.  We  then  sub- 
tract just  as  if  we  were  working  with  whole  numbers.  In 
the  remainder  we  place  the  point  directly  under  the  other 
points  to  separate  dollars  and  cents. 

45.  Multiplication.  Multiplication  of  quantities  repre- 
senting money  is  performed  in  the  same  manner  as  for  whole 
numbers  except  for  the  location  of  the  decimal  point  separat- 
ing dollars  and  cents. 

Example.  If  one  shipping  crate  is  worth  $2.50,  how 
much  are  12  crates  worth? 

$2.50 
12 


500 
2500 


$30.00  Ans. 


Explanation.     The  multiplication  is  performed  exactly 
as  though  we  were  multiplying  whole  numbers   and  the 


60    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

decimal  point  is  placed  in  the  product  by  counting  two  places 
from  the  right  to  mark  off  the  cents. 

46.  Division.  The  operation  of  division  of  money  quan- 
tities is  the  same  as  for  whole  numbers.  The  decimal  point 
is  placed  in  the  quotient  in  the  proper  position  to  separate 
dollars  and  cents. 

Example.  A  contracting  firm  bought  5  wheelbarrows 
for  $19.25.    What  was  the  price  of  one? 

5)  $19.25  ($3.85        Ans. 
15 

~42 
40 

25 
25 

Explanation.  We  divide  exactly  as  if  we  were  working 
with  whole  numbers  and  place  the  decimal  point  before  the 
last  two  figures  to  the  right  because  they  represent  cents. 
Another  way  to  locate  the  point  is  to  place  it  in  the  quotient 
as  soon  as  the  number  of  dollars  in  the  dividend  has  been 
divided.  For  example,  in  dividing  the  $19.25  above,  we 
divide  5  into  $19  first  and  get  $3.  We  have  then  divided 
all  the  figures  up  to  the  decimal  point  and  we  therefore  put 
a  point  in  the  quotient  after  the  3  before  we  divide  again. 

47.  Bank  Accounts.  When  a  man  opens  a  checking 
account  at  a  bank,  he  makes  a  deposit  sufficient  to  fully  cover 
all  of  his  expected  disbursements  for  a  reasonable  period. 
He  is  also  expected  to  satisfy  the  bank  that  he  is  conducting 
a  legitimate  business.  When  his  application  is  accepted 
and  his  first  deposit  made,  he  is  given  a  pass  book  in  which 
his  account  with  the  bank  is  kept.    This  pass  book  should 


MONEY 


51 


be  presented  at  frequent  intervals  for  a  balance.  A  page 
from  a  contractor's  pass  book  is  shown  in  Fig.  20.  On  the 
left-hand  side  of  the  page  the  abbreviation  Dr.  indicates 
that  the  bank  is  debtor  to  the  depositor  on  account  of  cash 
deposits.      On  the   right-hand   side  the  abbreviation  Cr. 


/Dr.    MECHANICS  BANK 

with      d.lS.ef<yttlaii) 

CrN 

\<\\4- 

\qi4-    (1 

OjWVUL 

\z 

feoWa^ 

144 

5>9 

) 

M 

^Uk 

2Gl 

48^ 

c 

16 

(Wb 

150 

00 

^ 

II 

M 

w 

\% 

00 

BoJi/utC^ 

^07 

qi 

M 

39 

4^1 

3^ 

(\uw 

%A 

feoftiuwue. 

Zoy 

qi 

h 

J 

iQWfea- 

iqi 

6<] 

U 

1 

0 1 

'Bofiojuai^ 

(& 

1^2- 

^07 

qi 

^07 

ql 

Uh 

\ 

l^oJ^ouae^ 

\(o 

^2. 

]A 

lo 

S^juJu— 

l4o 

n 

hi 

\ 

^oAj 

/4o 

00 

^  () 

II 

% 

»» 

1^0 

00 

\ 

] 

V 

^y 

Fig.  20. — ^Page  from  a  Contractor's  Pass  Book. 


means  that  the  bank  credits  its  account  with  the  depositor 
because  of  checks  drawn  against  his  account.  The  balance 
indicates  the  difference  between  the  amount  of  cash  de- 
posited and  the  sum  of  the  checks  drawn  against  the  account. 
48.  The  Bank  Check.  Fig.  21  shows  a  bank  check 
with  the  stub  attached,  properly  drawn  and  signed.  This 
check  is  an  order  on  the  bank  to  pay  the  owner  of  the  check 


52    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

the  sum  specified  and  to  charge  the  transaction  to  the 
signer  of  the  check.  The  payee  must  endorse  or  sign  the 
check  on  the  back  when  he  presents  it  to  the  bank  for  pay- 
ment. The  check  may  also  be  transferred  to  another  party 
by  endorsement.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  payee  to  present 
the  check  at  the  bank  for  payment  as  promptly  as  possible. 
The  stub  indicates  the  number  of  the  check  for  purposes 
of  identification.  It  also  indicates  to  whom  the  check  was 
drawn,  the  amount  and  for  what  purpose  it  was  paid.     The 


No.  ZqG 

To  . 

For     ly^iUa^ 


i^: 


BAL. 

3Z6j 

^1 

DEP. 

TOTAL 

CHECK 

G 

?i 

BAL. 

j3a,o 

.1.0 

PAY  TO  THE 
ORDER  OF 


DES  MOINES,  IOWA^_^Jtt._5_191^ 

MECHANICS  BANK 


^h^(xnd>^^ 


No.  /goG 


foo- 


DOLLARS 


^.  \£2.  ^9Tdffni) 


Fig.  21.— Bank  Check  with  Attached  Stub. 


person  who  draws  the  check  should  also  determine  the 
remaining  balance  to  his  credit  after  signing  each  check 
so  that  there  will  be  no  danger  that  he  will  unknowingly 
overdraw  his  account  at  the  bank. 

49.  The  Statement.  When  a  service  is  performed  under 
verbal  or  written  contract  it  is  customary  for  the  contractor 
to  render  an  itemized  statement  on  the  first  of  the  month 
immediately  following  the  date  on  which  the  work  was  com- 
pleted. Such  an  itemized  statement  is  shown  in  Fig.  22. 
This  statement  serves  as  a  reminder  to  the  person  for  whom 
the  work  was  done  that  he  owes  the  contractor  the  sum 
mentioned.     Unless  there  is  specific  agreement  to  the  con- 


MONEY 


53 


DES  MOINES,  IOWA, 


Mr. 


To 


Terms 


AiU^.    k30      1Q1  ^ 


^cMj  maJ  <^o     d/SMO 


15 


2o&u&al4id/y^3 


15- 


Z-2^S-/W 


S'S 


3-Zx/o-Zo 


5(? 


l-lh,  /hoAj^ 


0£_ 


f)^.  -^aJlhrr    Q^ 


^O 


A 


d'o 


Fig.  22. — Itemized  Statement. 


54    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

trary,  the  contractor  has  a  right  to  expect  that  the  account 
will  be  settled  promptly. 

50.  The  Receipt.  When  payment  has  been  made  for  a 
service  performed  it  is  proper  to  offer  a  receipt.  This  should 
be  done  even  though  a  receipt  is  not  requested.  Fig.  23 
shows  a  common  form  of  receipt  for  money  paid.  If  the 
payment  is  made  by  check,  the  endorsement  on  the  back 
of  the  check  is  considered  to  be  sufficient  evidence  that  the 
money  has  been  paid.     It  is  also  often  convenient  to  write 


No  sy 

From     S^  G. 


'h(yzU4-. 


For 


cSc/rf^!ige^ 


No.     tSy  DES  MOINES,  IOWA, 

RECEIVED  OF      <S^  A    ^oJdi^ 


.DOLLARS 


FOR  'PouJtiiia  M£/ri^>r^  QjjAy 


hCUUHtuf       ^J^jJajj/t-   iuj     )M^^ 


%4oM.  \1MA 


Fig.  23. — Form  for  a  Receipt  with  Attached  Stub. 

the  receipt  in  the  form  of  a  notation  on  the  statement  or 
bill.     Fig.  22  shows  an  example  of  such  a  notation. 

51.  Assets  and  Liabilities.  There  is  nothing  more  im- 
portant in  the  successful  management  of  the  business  of 
the  contractor  and  builder  than  a  frequent  and  careful 
estimate  of  his  assets  and  liabilities.  A  man's  assets  are  his 
credits  and  his  liabilities  are  his  debts.  By  this  means  the 
contractor  is  able  to  tell  whether  he  is  making  money  or 
not.  In  making  a  statement  of  the  condition  of  his  business, 
the  contractor  should  be  careful  not  to  include  in  his  assets 
any  items  which  are  really  not  credits.     Unless  this  point 


MONEY 


55 


is  carefully  watched,  a  misleading  statement  may  easily 
be  made. 

52.  Wage  Accounts.  Every  mechanic  should  know  how 
to  keep  time  and  make  out  a  pay  roll.  Wage  accounts 
should   be   made   out    with    care  and  should  be  properly 


TIME         Week  Ending 

5^.      /3             19/3 

DATE 

NAMES 

,„„L-L 

Wed 

rhu 

Fri. 

Sat. 

Total 
Time 

Hate 
per 

nat 

Amount   | 

null 

i 

cts. 

^/uUi  .   ^.  -Tu, 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

6 

,Y° 

rio'^vjA-o^c  .     i&Znt~LJL^ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

G 

flso 

&/,J>J-'^^./0 

S'.eo-i^i!^.  ^-^ju-y 

/ 

/ 

"/^ 

Zt 

,550 

"^fM^d^.   ^JlM>uJ<-y 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

"^k 

Bf 

fyS^ 

QjuO-^^f 

'7fi^^v-a'<y>-y  duuAjhdy 

/ 

^^ 

1^ 

SZi 

T^JuUuAC.  y<^ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

(> 

QZi 

£4Er^.H7-^' 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

/ 

6 

,325 

/5&J-0-T-E/J  Ko<aX4— 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

1 

6 

5i5 

'M^-ncL..    4ifnJU 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

1 

6 

^X^ 

•57t/Cia//cA<o'.  <^-  S", 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

1 

6 

Z'^ 

''/tiAjiy^t^^vu ,  J^CUuJL^>-^ 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

1 

6 

Z^ 

^d;L^,   /^. 

/ 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

^k 

s-k. 

Zso 

S^L^nA^kX^^ .  V^<v»^ 

/ 

/ 

J 

3 

/so 

jfd^Mii^  %.^. 

/ 

/ 

/ 

e> 

z^ 

hUoFro- 

/ 

/ 

^ 

^ 

V 

J 

Fig.  24. — Page  of  a  Time  Book. 


arranged  and  preserved.  The  best  way  to  do  this  is  to  use 
a  time  book.  Such  a  book  may  be  purchased  in  a  form 
similar  to  that  shown  in  Fig.  24.  In  making  up  pay  rolls 
it  is  first  necessary  to  find  the  total  amount  of  time  that  a 
workman  puts  in  during  a  given  period.  This  should  be 
multiplied  by  his  rate  to  find  the  amount  due  him.     The 


56    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS   AND  BUILDERS 


WvK'.'wSllU    VsbuAMjJtSL^ 11 


Z/ 


00 


52 


^G       ^-K;^<JjZ^  cWe^^      C 


JUuj:^i?AAxl>uuu;^ 


-^g/nJomyr^  c^^lS^^ 


OoJy^  qwAj 


~^feii-^4^ 


1     (Luyg.1^  c£ediL/t-  ^1.^4qQQ 


Fig.  25. — Contractor's  Estimate  Sheet. 


MONEY  67 

rate  is  usually  given  either  by  the  hour  or  by  the  day. 
Adding  the  amounts  due  each  workman  will  give  the  total 
amount  of  the  pay  roll. 

53.  Building  Estimates.  The  contractor  is  often  called 
upon  to  prepare  estimates  and  submit  proposals  for  work 
about  to  be  done.  The  utmost  care  should  be  taken  to  make 
these  estimates  in  a  systematic  manner  and  to  preserve  them. 
This  material  is  not  only  valuable  for  the  present  purpose, 
but  it  has  a 'value  for  future  reference.  P'ig.  25  shows  a 
contractor's  typical  estimate  sheet. 


58    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Summary  of  Chapter  V 

31.  To  add  or  subtract  money  quantities,  treat  them  as 
whole  numbers,  placing  a  period  in  the  result  to  separate 
dollars  and  cents.     (Sec.  43  and  44.) 

32.  To  multiply  or  divide  money  quantities,  proceed  as 
with  whole  numbers,  separating  the  dollars  and  cents  in 
the  result  with  a  period.     (Sec.  45  and  46.) 

PROBLEMS 

Note.  When  working  with  dollars  and  cents  always  find  the  answer 
to  the  nearest  cent;  that  is,  if  it  is  more  than  half  a  cent  over  call  it 
a  whole  cent  and  if  it  is  less  than  half  a  cent,  do  not  count  it. 

69.  Add  the  following  sums  of  money:  $1.75,  $2.38,  $9.75,  $22, 
$2.08,  $25.00,  $11.66. 

70.  A  carpenter  agrees  to  build  a  wardrobe  for  $8.50.  The 
lumber  costs  $4.00  and  the  hardware  $1.30.  If  he  spends  16  houra 
making  it,  how  much  does  he  earn  per  hour? 

71.  A  contractor  agrees  to  build  a  barn  for  $250.  He  uses 
6000  ft.  of  lumber  at  $20  per  thousand,  12  squares  of  roofing  at 
$1.75  per  square,  and  hardware  at  a  cost  of  $15.  Four  men  put 
in  60  hours  each  at  30^  per  hour.  What  is  the  profit  of  the  con- 
tractor? 

72.  A  man  sets  and  cases  4  door  frames  in  a  day.  If  his  rate 
is  $3.25  per  day,  how  much  will  it  cost  for  him  to  do  this  work  in 
a  house  wliich  has  31  doors? 

73.  At  3|fi  per  pound,  how  many  nails  can  be  bought  for  $6? 

74.  If  lOd  common  wire  nails  are  $2.50  per  hundred  pounds, 
how  much  will  35  pounds  cost? 

75.  W^hat  will  be  the  price  of  28  lineal  feet  of  14  in.  valley  tin 
at  $2.75  per  50  feet? 

76.  The  price  of  one  26X24  check-rail  window,  glazed  double- 
strength  glass,  is  quoted  at  $1.84.  How^much  will  19  such  windows 
cost? 

77.  A  set  of  front  porch  steps  6  ft.  long  with  4  risers  and  treads 
will  cost  $7.50.  How  much  will  steps  7  ft.  long  cost  figuring  at 
the  same  rate? 


MONEY  59 

78.  A  porch  7  ft.  wide  by  16  ft.  long  is  estimated  to  cost  $95. 
What  is  the  cost  per  foot  of  length?  What  would  be  the  cost  of 
a  porch  18  ft.  long  at  the  same  rate? 

79.  Determine  the  amount  of  money  due  each  man  and  the 
total  amount  of  the  pay  roll  shown  in  Fig.  24. 

80.  The  pass  book  shown  in  Fig.  20  gives  an  open  account. 
Indicate  a  balance  and  close  the  account. 

81.  The  following  material  and  labor  was  used  in  making  a 
medicine  case  16"X23"  inside  measurement:  6  ft.  1X4  jambs, 
10^;  2'  4"  of  stool  1|X6,  10^;  1  sheet  of  tin  for  back,  2o/;  4  ft. 
casing,  12^;  2  ft.  apron,  5^;  2'  2"  head  casing,  7^;  3  ft.  head 
mold,  6^;  1  door,  80^;  1  beveled  plate  glass  mirror,  $1.10;  hinges 
and  catch,  25^;  labor,  4  hours  at  40j^  per  hour.  What  was  the  cost 
of  the  case? 

82.  Frank  Allan  bought  the  following  hardware  from  the  J.  C. 
Kelly  Hardware  Co.,  on  April  15, 1914: 1  Sliding  door  set  for  double 
doors,  $2.25;  5  Mortise  latch  sets  at  55^  each;  2  Push  plates  at 
30)^  each;  1  Cyhnder  front  door  set,  $7.25;  8  Inside  lock  sets  at 
$1.65  each;  28  Flush  sash  lifts  at  3^;  16  Ball-tipped  loose-pin 
butts  4X4  at  22^  each;  1  set  Parlor  door  hangers  for  double  doors, 
$4.00;  1  Double-acting  floor  hinge,  $1.10.  Make  out  a  statement 
for  the  above  material  and  find  the  total  amount  of  the  bill. 

83.  What  is  the  total  of  the  estimate  shown  in  Fig.  25? 

84.  If  one  concrete  finisher  at  $5.00  per  day  and  five  laborers 
at  $2.50  per  day  are  required  to  lay  700  sq.ft.  of  cement  sidewalk, 
what  will  be  the  labor  cost  for  100  sq.ft.  of  walk? 

85.  To  lay  100  sq.ft.  of  cement  sidewalk,  the  following  material 
is  required:  2|  barrels  cement  at  $1.50  per  barrel;  Ij  cu.yds.  of 
stone  at  $1.50  per  cu.yd.;  f  cu.yd.  of  sand  at  $1.25  per  cubic  yard; 
2|  cu.yds.  of  cinders  at  50^  per  cubic  yard.  What  is  the  total  cost 
of  the  material?  What  is  the  cost  of  100  sq.ft.  of  sidewalk  including 
the  labor  cost  as  found  in  the  previous  problem?  What  is  the  cost 
per  running  yard  for  a  walk  4  ft.  wide? 


CHAPTER  VI 

DECIMALS.  ADDITION,  SUBTRACTION,  MULTIPLICA- 
TION AND  DIVISION  OF  DECIMALS.  CHANGING 
FROM  COMMON  FRACTIONS  TO  DECIMAL  FRAC- 
TIONS 

64.  Decimal  Fractions.  Decimal  fractions  are  different 
from  common  fractions  in  that  they  have  one  of  the  numbers 
10,  100,  1000,  etc.,  for  a  denominator.  Thus  j\,  j\\,  ^^|^, 
etc.,  are  really  decimal  fractions  expressed  as  common  frac- 
tions. The  advantage  of  using  decimal  fractions  is  that 
computations  are  often  much  simplified. 

55.  Writing  Decimals.  Decimals  are  written  in  the 
same  way  that  we  wrote  money  quantities.  In  fact,  money 
quantities  are  only  a  special  kind  of  decimals  in  which  we 
have  only  to  deal  with  tenths  and  hundredths  of  the  dollar: 
thus,  $1.75  means  one  and  seventy-five  hundredths  dollars. 
In  the  same  manner  we  may  write  1.75  lbs.,  which  means 
one  and  seventy-five  hundredths  pounds. 

In  writing  decimals  we  omit  the  denominator,  but  we 
indicate  what  the  denominator  is  by  means  of  the  decimal 
point.  The  figure  which  is  written  after  the  decimal  point 
is  put  down  is  the  numerator  of  the  fraction.  For  each 
figure  written  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point  we  under- 
stand that  the  denominator  has  1  and  a  0  (cipher):  thus, 
.5  means  that  the  numerator  is  5  and  the  denominator  is  1 
and  one  0  (cipher)  or  10.  This  decimal  expressed  as  a  com- 
mon fraction  is,  therefore,  ■^%.  Taking  another  example, 
.19  means  that  the  numerator  is  19  and  the  denominator 

60 


DECIMALS  61 

is  1  and  two  ciphers  or  100.  This  fraction,  therefore  equals 
^y^.  It  is  worth  while  to  state  this  as  a  rule:  The  denomi- 
nator of  a  decimal  fraction  has  the  unit  1  and  as  many- 
ciphers  following  as  there  are  figures  to  the  right  of  the 
decimal  point. 

56.  Reading  Decimals.  The  whole  number  5280  is  read 
"  five  thousand  two  hundred  eighty."  The  word  "  and  " 
is  not  used  in  reading  a  whole  number.  A  decimal  is  read 
like  a  whole  number  except  that  the  name  of  the  right- 
hand  number  is  added:  for  example,  .528  is  read  "  five 
hundred  twenty-eight  thousandths."  You  will  notice  that 
the  denominator  of  this  decimal  is  1000,  In  reading  a 
whole  number  and  a  decimal  the  word  "  and  "  is  placed 
between  the  two:  thus,  45.6235  is  read  "forty-five  and 
six  thousand  two  hundred  thirty-five  ten  thousandths." 
When  one  person  reads  numbers  containing  decimals  for 
another  to  write,  it  is  customary  to  say  "  point  "  to  indicate 
where  the  decimal  begins;  for  example,  468.59  would  be  read 
"  four  sixty-eight,  point,  fifty-nine." 

57.  Significance  of  Position.  If  we  multiply  the  unit 
1  by  10,  we  increase  its  value.  If  we  multiply  it  by  100, 
we  increase  its  value  still  more.  If  we  divide  1  by  10,  we 
decrease  its  value  and  if  we  divide  by  100  we  decrease  its 
value  still  more.  We  express  these  changes  in  value  by  the 
position  which  the  figure  occupies  in  the  expression:  thus, 
10  has  two  places  of  figures;  100  has  three  places  of  figures; 
.1  has  one  place  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point.  The 
values  and  places  of  numbers  ordinarily  met  with  are  shown 
in  the  column  below. 

1,000,000  Millions 

100,000  Hundred  thousands 

10,000  Ten  thousands 


62    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


,000 

One  thousands 

100 

Hundreds 

10 

Tens 

1 

Units 

.1 

Tenths 

.01 

Hundredths 

.001 

Thousandths 

.0001 

Ten  thousandths 

.00001 

Hundred  thousandths 

.000001 

MilUonths 

For  every  place  that  the  unit  is  moved  to  the  left  its 
value  is  increased  ten  times.  For  every  place  the  unit  is 
moved  to  the  right  its  value  is  decreased  ten  times.  It  is 
to  be  noticed  that  the  location  of  the  decimal  point  deter- 
mines the  value  of  the  expression.  For  example,  345  has 
a  value  ten  times  as  great  as  34.5  because  the  number  of 
places  to  the  left  of  the  decimal  point  has  been  decreased 
by  one.  Thus  we  see  that  the  location  of  the  decimal 
point  is  a  very  important  matter. 

58.  Addition  of  Decimals.  To  add  numbers  containing 
decimal  fractions,  it  is  first  necessary  to  write  them  so  that 
the  decimal  points  all  come  directly  under  one  another  in 
a  straight  vertical  line.  We  then  proceed  to  add  as  with 
whole  numbers  and  we  place  the  decimal  point  in  the  answer 
directly  under  the  other  decimal  points. 

Example.     Add  692.25,  427.201,  .026,  1.5,  .3415. 

692.25 
427.201 

.026 
1.5 

.3415 

1121.3185  Ans. 


DECIMALS  63 

Explanation.  We  must  first  write  the  numbers  in  a 
vertical  column  in  such  a  manner  that  all  the  decimal 
points  are  in  the  same  vertical  line.  Where  the  column 
is  not  filled  out  to  the  right,  we  are  to  add  as  though  ciphers 
were  in  these  places.  We  place  the  decimal  point  in  the 
answer  directly  under  the  other  decimal  points. 

59.  Subtraction  of  Decimals.  To  subtract  decimals  we 
first  write  them  so  that  the  decimal  points  will  be  directly 
under  each  other  and  then  proceed  as  in  subtracting  whole 
numbers.  We  can  "  borrow,"  if  necessary,  exactly  as 
though  working  with  whole  numbers. 

Example,     Subtract  4.3975  from  10.2. 

10.2000     minuend 
4 .  3975     subtrahend 


5 .  8025     difference  Ans. 

Explanation.  There  are  four  decimal  places  in  the 
subtrahend.  We  must,  therefore,  also  have  four  places 
in  the  minuend  and  we  write  three  ciphers  after  the  2. 
We  can  then  borrow  and  subtract  as  when  dealing  with 
whole  numbers.  We  must  not  forget  to  place  the  deci- 
mal point  in  the  result  directly  under  the  other  decimal 
points.  To  check  the  result  we  have  only  to  add  the 
subtrahend  and  difference  together  and  if  this  sum  exactly 
equals  the  minuend,  we  know  the  result  to  be  correct. 

60.  Multiplication  of  Decimals.  To  multiply  decimals, 
write  the  numbers  so  that  the  figures  at  the  extreme  right 
in  both  the  multiplicand  and  multiplier  are  directly  under 
each  other.  We  then  proceed  as  in  multiplying  whole  num- 
bers, forgetting  about  the  decimal  point  for  the  moment. 
When  the  product  has  been  obtained  we  point  off  as  many 


64    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

places  from  the  right  as  there  are  decimal  places  in  both  the 
multiplicand  and  multiplier. 

Example.     Multiply  62.53  by  .124. 

62 .  53    multiplicand 
.  124    multiplier 


25012 
1  2506 
6  253 

7.75372  Ans. 

Explanation.  We  write  the  two  numbers  so  that  the  two 
figures  at  the  extreme  right  of  both  the  multiplicand  and 
multiplier  are  in  the  vertical  Une.  Multiplying  as  with  whole 
numbers  we  get  the  result  as  shown.  To  point  off  the 
decimal  places  in  the  product,  we  add  the  number  of  places 
in  the  multiplicand,  2,  to  the  number  of  places  in  the  multi- 
plier, 3,  to  get  5.  In  the  answer,  therefore,  we  will  point 
off  5  places  beginning  at  the  right  and  place  the  decimal 
point  in  front  of  the  fifth  figure. 

61.  Division  of  Decimals.  To  divide  decimal  numbers 
we  proceed  as  with  whole  numbers,  forgetting  about  the 
decimal  point  for  the  moment.  If  there  are  not  sufficient 
figures  in  the  dividend  so  that  the  division  may  be  made, 
we  simply  add  ciphers  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point. 
This  does  not  change  the  value  of  the  number.  We  may 
carry  the  operation  as  far  as  we  please,  adding  ciphers  if 
necessary.  To  locate  the  decimal  point  in  the  quotient  we 
point  off  as  many  places  from  the  right  as  there  are  more 
decimal  places  in  the  dividend  than  in  the  divisor. 

Example.     Divide  528.01  by  9.5. 


DECIMALS  65 

Divisor   Dividend    Quotient 
9.5)      528.01      (55.5  Ans. 

475 

530 
475 

551 
475 

Explanation.  This  example  will  give  no  difficulty  until 
we  come  to  locate  the  decimal  point.  There  are  2  places  in 
the  dividend  and  1  place  in  the  divisor.  Subtracting  the 
number  of  places  in  the  divisor  from  the  number  in  the 
dividend,  2  minus  1,  gives  1  place  to  point  off  from  the  right 
in  the  quotient.  In  the  last  division  there  is  a  remainder, 
but  since  this  is  less  than  half  of  the  divisor,  we  neglect  it. 

Example.     Divide  2  by  1.43. 

1.43)  2.0000  (1.39  Ans. 

1  43 

570 
429 

1410 

1287 


Explanation.  We  must  add  ciphers  to  the  dividend  before 
we  can  divide.  We  place  a  decimal  point  after  the  2  and 
add  the  ciphers  to  the  right.  We  add  as  many  ciphers  as 
are  necessary  to  get  the  required  number  of  places  in  the 
quotient.  If  we  desired  to  carry  the  division  farther,  we 
would  add  more  ciphers.  To  locate  the  decimal  point  in 
the  quotient,  we  subtract  the  number  of  places  in  the  divisor 
from  the  number  in  the  dividend,  4  —  2  =  2,  and  point  off 
two  places  in  the  answer. 


66    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

62.  Accuracy  of  Results.  When  we  were  working  with 
common  fractions,  we  could  always  express  a  remainder  in 
division  by  means  of  a  fraction.  You  will  notice  that  in 
the  above  examples  in  division  we  might  continue  to  add 
ciphers  to  the  dividend  and  carry  the  division  out  as  far  as 
we  please.  There  will  always  be  a  remainder,  but  the 
further  we  carry  the  operation  the  more  accurate  will 
be  the  result.  For  all  practical  problems  we  must  put  a 
limit  to  this  or  the  labor  involved  will  be  out  of  all  pro- 
portion to  the  accuracy  obtained.  For  all  practical  prob- 
lems four  places  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point  are  all 
that  are  necessary,  and  for  most  cases  two  or  three  places 
are  enough.  When  more  than  four,  or  three,  or  two,  as  the 
case  may  be,  occur,  we  may  neglect  all  of  the  figures  to  the 
right  of  the  fourth,  or  third,  or  second,  providing  the  next 
figure  is  less  than  five.  If  the  next  figure  is  more  than  five, 
we  add  one  to  the  last  figure  that  we  count  and  neglect  all 
the  others.  If  the  first  figure  that  we  neglect  happens  to  be 
five,  we  either  do  or  do  not  add  one  as  our  judgment  dic- 
tates. For  example,  the  number  52.345278  may  be  written  to 
the  fourth  decimal  place  as  52.3453— .  The  —  sign  following 
the  number  means  that  the  real  value  is  something  less  than 
the  value  given.  Taking  another  example,  the  decimal 
0.02534  may  be  written  to  the  fourth  decimal  place  as 
0.0253 +.  The  +  sign  means  that  the  real  value  is  some- 
thing more  than  that  given.  It  is  not  always  necessary  to 
write  the  +  and  —  signs  as  has  been  done  here,  but  it  is 
frequently  done  if  it  makes  the  work  clearer. 

63.  Changing  a  Decimal  Fraction  to  a  Common  Fraction. 
To  change  a  decimal  fraction  to  a  common  fraction  it  is  only 
necessary  to  supply  the  denominator  and  to  reduce  the 
resulting  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms. 

Example.     Reduce  .625"  to  a  common  fraction. 


•^^^       1000 


DECIMALS  67 

25 


K^125 
200 


^~40 


5  =  1"  Ans. 


Explanation.  We  first  supply  the  denominator,  which 
will  be  1,  with  as  many  ciphers  following  as  there  are  decimal 
places  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point,  or  1000.  Reducing 
this  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms  by  dividing  by  5  three  times, 
gives  the  result  f . 

64.  Changing  a  Common  Fraction  to  a  Decimal  Fraction. 
To  change  a  common  fraction  to  a  decimal  fraction,  place 
a  decimal  point  after  the  numerator  and  add  as  many  ciphers 
after  it  as  are  needed,  usually  four  or  less,  depending  upon 
the  number  of  decimal  places  desired  in  the  quotient.  Then 
divide  the  numerator  by  the  denominator  and  point  off  as 
many  places  in  the  quotient  as  there  are  ciphers  added  in 
the  dividend. 

It  is  not  possible  to  reduce  every  common  fraction  to 
an  exactly  equivalent  decimal  fraction.  Fractions  having 
only  the  prime  numbers  2  and  5  in  the  denominator  may  be 
reduced  to  an  exactly  equivalent  decimal.  However,  we 
may  reduce  any  common  fraction  with  sufficient  exactness 
for  all  practical  purposes. 

Example.     Change  y&"  to  a  decimal  fraction. 

10)  7.0000  (  .4375  Ans. 

64 

60 
48 

120 
112 

80 
80 


68    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 
Table  of  Decimals  of  an  Inch  fob  Each  i/^th 


Ads. 

Atha. 

Decimal. 

Fraction. 

Ad8. 

Aths. 

Decimal. 

Fraction. 

1 

.015625 

33 

.515625 

1 

2 

.03125 

17 

34 

.53125 

3 

.046875 

35 

.546875 

2 

4 

.0625 

A 

18 

36 

.5625 

A 

5 

.078125 

37 

.578125 

3 

6 

.09375 

19 

38 

. 59375 

7 

. 109375 

39 

.609375 

4 

8 

.125 

i 

20 

40 

.625 

f 

9 

. 140625 

41 

.640625 

5 

10 

.15625 

21 

42 

.65625 

11 

. 171875 

43 

.671875 

6 

12 

.1875 

A 

22 

44 

.6875 

H 

13 

.203125 

45 

.703125 

7 

14 

.21875 

23 

46 

.71875 

15 

.234375 

47 

.734375 

8 

16 

.25 

i 

24 

48 

.75 

1 

17 

.265625 

49 

.765625 

9 

18 

.28125 

25 

50 

.78125 

19 

.296875 

51 

.796875 

10 

20 

.3125 

A 

26 

52 

H 

21 

.328125 

53 

.828125 

11 

22 

.34375 

27 

54 

.84375 

23 

.359375 

55 

.859375 

12 

24 

1 

28 

56 

i 

25 

.390625 

57 

.890625 

13 

26 

.40625 

29 

58 

.90625 

27 

.421875 

59 

.921875 

14 

28 

.4375 

A 

30 

60 

H 

29 

.453125 

61 

.953125 

15 

30 

.46875 

31 

62 

.96875 

31 

.484375 

63 

..984375 

16 

32 

.5 

i 

32 

64 

1. 

1 

DECIMALS  69 

Explanation.  Since  the  denominator  contains  only  the 
prime  factor  2  it  may  be  reduced  to  an  exactly  equivalent 
decimal.  It  is  found  necessary  to  add  four  ciphers  to  the 
dividend  and,  therefore,  there  will  be  four  decimal  places 
in  the  answer. 

65.  Decimal  Equivalents  of  the  Fractions  of  an  Inch. 
It  is  often  necessary  to  find  the  decimal  equivalent  of  a  given 
fraction  of  an  inch.  It  is  convenient  to  have  a  table  giving 
these  values.  Such  a  table  is  shown  on  page  68,  but  all  of 
the  values  are  not  filled  in,  for  the  reason  that  the  student 
is  expected  to  fill  in  the  missing  ones  as  part  of  the  problem 
assignment  of  this  lesson. 


70    ARITHMETIC  FOR   CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Summary  of  Chapter  VI 

33.  To  add  decimals,  write  the  numbers  so  that  the 
decimal  points  are  in  a  vertical  line,  add  as  with  whole 
numbers  and  place  the  decimal  point  in  the  result  directly 
under  the  other  decimal  points.     (Sec.  58.) 

34.  To  subtract  decimals,  write  the  minuend  and  sub- 
trahend so  that  the  decimal  points  are  in  a  vertical  line, 
subtract  as  with  whole  numbers  and  place  the  decimal  point 
in  the  result  directly  under  the  other  decimal  points.  (Sec. 
59.) 

35.  To  multiply  decimals,  proceed  as  though  multiply- 
ing whole  numbers  and  point  off  as  many  places  in  the 
product  as  there  are  places  in  both  the  multiplicand  and 
multiplier.     (Sec.  60.) 

36.  To  divide  decimals,  proceed  as  though  dividing 
whole  numbers,  adding  ciphers  to  the  right  of  the  decimal 
point  in  the  dividend  if  necessary.  Point  off  as  many  places 
in  the  quotient  as  the  difference  of  the  number  of  places  in 
the  dividend  less  the  number  of  places  in  the  divisor.  (Sec. 
61.) 

37.  To  change  a  decimal  fraction  to  a  common  fraction, 
supply  the  denominator  1,  followed  by  as  many  ciphers  as 
there  are  figures  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point,  and  reduce 
the  resulting  common  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms.     (Sec.  63.) 

38.  To  change  a  common  fraction  to  a  decimal  fraction, 
place  a  decimal  point  after  the  numerator  and  add  as  many 
ciphers  after  it  as  are  needed.  Then  divide  the  numerator 
by  the  denominator  and  point  off  as  many  places  in  the 
quotient  as  there  are  ciphers  added  in  the  dividend.  (Sec. 
64.) 


DECIMALS  1\ 

PROBLEMS 

86.  Write  the  following  decimals  in  figures:  Sixty-five  thou- 
sandths, two  hundred  twenty-five  thousandths,  fifty-two  and  two 
hundredths,  five  hundred  ninety-six  and  two-tenths,  one  half  of 
one-thousandth,  seven  hundred  sixty-five  and  five  one-thou- 
sandths. 

87.  Read  the  following  decimals  and  write  them  out  in  words: 
622.215,  .075,  .2865,  1.024,  100.005. 

88.  Add  up  the  following  decimals  an^  check  the  result  by 
adding  down: 


(a)       532.1 

(b) 

5.22 

52.75 

.496 

.025 

42.1325 

9. 

987. 

27.25 

.43 

39.5 

.025 

.2 

llowing : 

5.02 

89. 

Subtract  the  fo 

(a) 

.021  from  1 

(6) 

2.2 

from  10.75 

(c) 

92.25  from  201.2 

90. 

Multiply : 

(a) 

2.2 

by  31.75 

(&) 

5.25 

by  38.2 

91.  Divide  4.2  by  3.25  and  express  the  result  to  three  decimal 
places. 

92.  Divide  9.035  by  13  and  express  the  result  to  three  decimal 
places. 

93.  Reduce  the  following  common  fractions  of  an  inch  to 
decimal  equivalents:  |",  W',  i"  and  M".  These  are  the  values 
which  are  missing  in  the  table  on  page  68  and  the  student  should 
supply  these  results  in  that  table. 

94.  Change  the  following  decimals  to  common  fractions  and 


72    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

reduce  the  result  to  lowest  terms:  (a)  .0221,  (6)  .0638,  (c)  .6862, 
id)  .8255. 

95.  How  many  times  is  the  length  .0725'  contained  into  16.862'? 

96.  A  carpenter  agrees  to  build  a  fence  120  ft.  long  for  $45.50. 
The  cost  of  the  lumber  is  21.8ji  per  lineal  foot;  the  labor  cost  7.2ji 
per  lineal  foot  and  the  hardware  cost  f^  per  lineal  foot.  What  was 
the  actual  cost  of  the  fence  and  what  was  the  profit? 

97.  California  redwood  weighs  26.23  pounds  per  cubic  foot. 
How  much  will  15  cu.ft.  weigh? 

98.  A  circle  is  3.1416  times  as  far  around  as  across  it.  Find 
the  number  of  feet  around  a  circle  which  is  3.1667'  across. 


Fig.  26.— Section  of  a  Steel  Pipe. 

99.  One  cubic  foot  of  water  weighs  62.5  pounds.  Find  the 
part  of  a  cubic  foot  occupied  by  one  pound  of  water  and  express 
the  result  in  a  decimal. 

100.  If  it  costs  Sfl25  per  day  to  run  a  gang  and  a  concrete  mixer 
laying  23  cu.yds.  of  concrete  paving  material,  what  is  the  cost  per 
cubic  yard? 

101.  A  screen  used  for  sifting  sand  is  made  out  of  wire  which 
is  .0925"  in  diameter.  What  is  the  size  of  the  opening  between 
the  wires  if  there  are  4  wires  to  the  inch? 

102.  The  external  diameter  of  a  steel  pipe  used  for  a  column 
is  5.563".  The  thickness  of  the  metal  is  .259".  What  is  the  inside 
diameter  of  this  pipe?    (See  Fig.  26.) 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE  USE  OF  RULES.  PULLEY  SIZES.  WIDTH  OF  BELTS. 
FORMULAS.  SHORT  METHODS  OF  MULTIPLICA- 
TION AND  DIVISION 

66.  Rules.  The  practical  carpenter  is  often  obliged  to 
use  a  rule  in  working  out  some  of  his  problems.  Such  rules 
are  of  two  kinds;  those  which  have  a  rational  mathematical 
basis  and  those  which  are  the  result  of  experience.  Both 
of  these  kinds  are  valuable  so  long  as  they  are  true.  Some 
of  the  rules  are  exact  and  others  merely  give  an  approximate 
result.  You  must  be  sure  that  you  know  whether  a  rule 
is  reliable  or  not  before  you  use  it.  It  pays  to  be  on  the 
lookout  for  good,  reliable  rules  which  will  give  the  desired 
result  with  but  little  work. 

67.  Rule  for  Pulley  Sizes.  The  mill-man  frequently 
has  to  find  the  speed  of  a  saw,  grindstone  or  belt-pulley. 
The  following  rule  is  a  good  one  to  use  in  a  case  of  that  kind. 

To  find  the  number  of  revolutions  of  a  driven  pulley  in  a 
given  time,  multiply  the  diameter  of  the  driving  pulley  by  its 
number  of  revolutions  in  the  given  time  and  divide  by  the 
diameter  of  the  driven  pulley. 

Example.  A  pulley  on  the  main  shaft  48"  in  diameter 
drives  a  pulley  26"  in  diameter  on  the  counter  shaft.  The 
main  shaft  makes  65  revolutions  per  minute  (r.p.m.).  How 
many  r.p.m.  does  the  counter  shaft  make? 

73 


H    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

48" 
66 

240 

288 

26)3120(  120r.p.m.      Ans. 
26 

52 
52 

00 

Explanation.  Multiplying  the  diameter  of  the  driving 
pulley,  48",  by  the  r.p.m.  of  the  driving  pulley,  65,  gives 
3120.  Dividing  this  by  26,  the  diameter  of  the  driven 
pulley,  gives  120  r.p.m.  for  the  speed  of  this  pulley.  Notice 
that  we  multiply  the  two  things  that  belonged  to  the  same 
pulley  together.  If  you  keep  this  fact  in  mind,  it  will  help 
you  to  remember  the  rules. 

68.  Rule  for  the  Width  of  Belts.  The  question  some- 
times comes  up  in  the  mill :  What  width  of  belt  must  be  used 
to  drive  a  certain  machine?  If  you  know  how  many  horse- 
power are  required  you  can  use  the  following  rule: 

To  find  the  width  of  belt  necessary  to  transmit  a  given  horse- 
power, multiply  the  horse-power  by  33,000  and  divide  this 
product  by  the  product  of  the  speed  of  the  belt  in  feet  per  rriinute 
times  40,  for  a  single  leather  belt. 

Example.  A  steam  engine  used  to  furnish  power  for 
a  mill  is  rated  at  75  horse-power.  The  driving  pulley  is 
54"  in  diameter  and  the  engine  runs  at  180  r.p.m.  How 
wide  a  belt  of  single  thickness  of  leather  will  be  required? 


THE   USE  OF  RULES  75 


54' 
3.1416 
4.5 

'=4.5  ft. 

ft.  around  the 

ft.  around  the 
r.p.m. 

ft.  per  min.  sp 

61875.0  (  24" 
50894 

1  57080 
12  5664 

14.13720 

14.1372 
180 

pulley, 
pulley. 

1130  976 
1413  72 

825 

2544.6960 

61875 
)     2544.7) 

leed  of  belt, 

25U.7XM 

width  of  b( 

109810 
101788 

Ans. 


Explanation.  With  the  information  given,  it  is  first 
necessary  to  find  the  speed  of  the  belt  in  feet  per  minute. 
Every  time  the  pulley  travels  once  around,  t-he  belt  will 
travel  the  same  distance.  To  find  the  distance  around  the 
pulley  we  multiply  the  distance  across  it  in  feet  by  3.1416. 
This  gives  14.1372  ft,  around  the  pulley.  The  pulley  re- 
volves 180  times  in  a  minute  and,  therefore,  the  belt  will 
travel  14.1372  times  180  or  2544.7  ft.  per  minute.  From 
now  on  we  can  follow  the  rule  directly.  Multiply  the  horse- 
power 75  by  33,000  and  divide  this  by  the  product  of  2544.7 


76    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

times  40.     The  result  when  reduced  to  its  lowest  terms 
gives  a  24"  belt. 

69.  Using  Letters  in  Rules.  It  is  possible  to  shorten 
the  statement  of  a  rule  by  using  letters  instead  of  words. 
Usually  the'  first  letter  of  the  word  is  used  and  the  mathe- 
matical operations  are  indicated  by  using  the  mathematical 
signs.  It  is  sometimes  hard  for  a  mechanic  to  understand 
this  arrangement  and  he  immediately  gets  confused  and 
troubled  when  he  sees  these  formulas,  as  they  are  called. 
To  show  just  how  this  is  done  and  what  it  means,  let  us  take 
the  following  example: 

To  find  the  number  of  board  feet  in  a  piece  of  lumber  multi- 
ply the  width  in  feet  by  the  length  in  feet  and  this  again  by  its 
thickness  in  inches,  counting  a  thickness  less  than  one  inch 
as  a  full  inch. 

Ft.B.M.  =  WXLXt 

The  above  rule  is  stated  in  two  ways:  first,  in  words 
and  second  with  letters.  The  abbreviation,  "  Ft.  B.M." 
means  "  feet  board  measure."  The  sign  =  is  used  to  indi- 
cate that  the  quantity  of  Ft.  B.M.  is  equal  to  the  value  of 
the  expression  to  the  right  of  the  sign.  W  stands  for  the 
width  of  the  board  in  feet  and  L  stands  for  its  length  in  feet. 
WXLXt  indicates  that  the  value  of  W  is  to  be  multiplied- 
by  the  value  of  L  and  this  again  by  the  value  of  t.  i  stands 
for  the  thickness  of  the  board  in  inches.  Notice  that  W 
and  L  are  capital  letters  and  that  t  is  a  small  letter.  This 
is  a  short  way,  used  in  this  case,  to  show  the  difference 
between  values  given  in  feet  and  those  given  in  inches. 

70.  How  to  Use  Formulas.  To  show  how  formulas  may 
be  used  we  will  make  use  of  this  one  which  we  have  just 
found:  Ft.  BM.  =  WXLxt.  Usually  we  will  know  the 
width,  length  and  thickness  of  the  board  and  we  will  want 


THE  USE  OF  RULES 


77 


to  find  how  many  feet  B.M.  the  board  contains.  In  this 
event,  we  will  write  the  left  side  of  the  formula  just  as  it 
stands,  but  in  writing  the  right  side  we  will  substitute  the 
values  for  the  width,  length  and  thickness  of  the  board 
which  we  know.  We  will  then  perform  the  operations 
indicated  on  the  right  side  of  the  formula  and  reduce  the 
expression  to  its  lowest  terms.    The  result  will  be  a  value 


Fig.  27. 


for  the  feet  B.M.  contained  in  the  board.     To  illustrate  this 
more  fully,  let  us  take  a  specific  example. 

Example.     How  many  feet  board  measure  are  contained 
in  the  board  shown  in  Fig.  27,  if  W  =  9",L  =  U',  and  t  =  i"? 

Then  ¥t.BM.  =  WXLXt 

or,  substituting  the  values  of  W,  L  and  t  as  given  above: 
Ft.B.M.  =  1X14X1 


78    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

21 
Then  Ft.B.M.  =  ^Xl=4-Xl=y=10^ 

2 
Therefore    Ft.B.M.  =  10|  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  rule  states  that  W  and  L  must  be  in 
feet,  so  we  must  change  the  9"  to  feet.  L  is  already  in  feet. 
The  rule  also  says  to  count  the  thickness  less  than  one  inch 
as  a  full  inch;  therefore  |"  must  be  counted  the  same  as  1". 
Now  let  us  substitute  these  values  in  the  formula.  For  W 
we  will  write  f ',  for  L  we  will  write  14  and  for  t  we  will  write 
1.  Then  we  solve  the  right-hand  side  by  multiplying  f  X14 
and  this  again  by  1.  This  gives  us  the  result  IO5.  The 
board,  therefore,  contains  10^  ft.  B.M. 

71.  Short  Methods.  When  making  computations  in  con- 
nection with  this  work,  the  mechanic  wishes,  first,  to  get 
an  accurate  result  and,  second,  to  get  the  result  quickly. 
All  of  this  requires  practice.  If  you  do  a  little  figuring  once 
a  month  or  so,  it  will  take  quite  a  while  to  make  a  small 
calculation  and  get  it  accurate.  If,  on  the  other  hand, 
you  figure  a  little  every  day,  you  will  soon  be  able  to  do  it 
more  accurately  and  rapidly. 

72.  Addition.  There  is  no  short  cut  in  addition.  You 
can,  however,  by  following  a  few  hints  add  very  rapidly  and 
accurately.  When  adding,  try  to  pick  out  combinations 
that  make  10,  such  as  4  and  6,  7  and  3,  etc.  Divide  a  long 
column  of  figures  into  several  parts  and  add  each  separately. 
When  adding  long  columns,  put  down  the  total  of  each 
column  separately  and  add  these  together  for  the  final  result. 
To  check  addition,  add  again  beginning  at  the  other  end  of 
the  column. 

73.  Subtraction.  To  check  subtraction  add  the  differ- 
ence and  the  subtrahend  together  to  get  the  minuend. 


THE  USE   OF  RULES  79 

74.  Multiplication.  To  multiply  a  number  by  10,  add 
one  cipher  to  the  right  or  move  the  decimal  point  one  place 
to  the  right.  To  multiply  by  100  add  two  ciphers  or  move 
the  decimal  point  two  places.  To  multiply  by  5  (Y-)divide 
by  2  and  multiply  by  10.  To  multiply  by  25  (i^)  divide 
by  4  and  multiply  by  100.  To  multiply  by  6^,  8^  12^, 
16f ,  33i  divide  by  16,  12,  8,  6  or  3  and  multiply  by  100. 
To  multiply  by  9  (10—1)  first  multiply  by  10  and  then  sub- 
tract the  multipUcand  from  this  product.  To  multiply  by 
11  (10+1)  multiply  by  10  and  add  the  multipUcand  to 
the  product. 

To  check  multiplication,  interchange  the  multiplicand 
and  multiplier  and  multiply  again. 

75.  Division.  Since  division  is  the  reverse  of  multipli- 
cation all  hints  given  for  multiplication  will  work  for  division 
if  reversed. 

To  check  division,  multiply  the  divisor  by  the  quotient 
to  get  the  dividend. 


80    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Summary  of  Chapter  VII 

39.  To  find  the  speed  of  the  driven  pulley,  multiply  the 
diameter  of  the  driving  pulley  by  its  number  of  revolutions 
and  divide  by  the  diameter  of  the  driven  pulley.     (Sec.  67.) 

40.  To  find  the  width  of  single  leather  belt  necessary 
to  transmit  a  given  horse-power,  multiply  the  horse-power 
by  33,000  and  divide  this  by  the  product  of  the  speed  of  the 
belt  in  feet  per  minute  times  40.     (Sec.  68.) 

41.  To  find  the  number  of  board  feet  in  a  given  piece 
of  lumber,  multiply  the  width  in  feet  by  the  length  in  feet 
and  multiply  this  product  by  the  thickness  in  inches.  (Sec. 
69.) 

PROBLEMS 

103.  The  Roman  designation  M  is  used  for  1000  when  speaking 
of  board  feet:  For  example,  5M.  B.M.  means  5000  ft.  board 
measure.    Write  a  rule  similar  to  Rule  41  to  find  M.B.M. 

104.  Write  a  rule  to  find  the  diameter  of  pulley  to  use  when 
the  diameter  and  speed  of  the  driving  pulley  and  the  speed  of  the 
driven  pulley  are  known. 

105.  A  main  shaft  pulley  18"  in  diameter  makes  100  r.p.m. 
If  the  counter  shaft  must  make  220  r.p.m.,  what  must  be  the 
diameter  of  the  pullej'  on  the  counter  shaft? 

106.  When  using  a  double  leather  belt  we  use  the  same  rule 
as  for  the  single  belt,  but  we  use  60  instead  of  40  in  the  rule.  What 
must  be  the  width  of  belt  for  a  75  horse-power  engine,  having  a 
belt  wheel  52"  in  diameter  making  320  r.p.m.? 

107.  Add  the  following  table  of  figures  both  across  the  page 
and  down  the  page.  What  is  the  grand  total?  How  long  did 
it  take  you  to  get  it  correctly? 


4562 

4379 

8256 

4972 

3459 

7824 

4652 

3784 

9286 

4785 

5672 

8439 

5648 

7231 

2657 

4962 

1435 

4798 

6245 

3941 

1126 

2297 

4456 

6522 

4733 

THE  USE  OF  RULES  81 

108.  Multiply  the  following  without  using  a  pencil: 

(a)      76X50  (6)    79.2X5000 

(c)    256X25  (d)   4.74X33^ 

109.  Write  out  a  set  of  hints  for  division  similar  to  those  foi 
multiplication  given  in  the  lesson. 

110.  Divide  the  following  without  using  a  pencil: 

(a)    9^16§  (6)    450 -5- 6i 

(c)    37.6-V-250  (d)   720-^8i 

111.  Multiply  624728  by  645  and  check. 

112.  Divide  68,492  by  356  and  check. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
PERCENTAGE.    DISCOUNTS.    PROFIT.    INTEREST 

76.  Percentage.  To  one  who  has  thoroughly  mastered 
fractions  and  decimals,  the  subject  of  percentage  should  not 
present  any  serious  difficulties.  The  words  "  per  centum" 
are  Latin  and  mean  "  by  the  hundred,"  The  words  "per 
cent"  are  an  abbreviation  of  "  per  centum  "  but  they  are 
so  common  that  they  are  now  scarcely  recognized  as  an 
abbreviation.  The  sign  %  is  used  in  place  of  the  words: 
thus,  10%  means  10  per  cent. 

77.  Changing  a  Fraction  to  a  Per  Cent.  A  per  cent  may 
be  expressed  as  a  decimal  or  •as  a  common  fraction.  In 
fact,  a  per  cent  is  a  fraction.  Thus,  10%  is  the  same  thing 
as  .10  or  J/^  or  ^^^  If  this  is  true  we  may  change  any  frac- 
tion into  an  equivalent  form  in  per  cent.  This  may  be  done 
by  reducing  the  fraction  to  a  decimal,  setting  the  decimal 
point  two  places  to  the  right  and  affixing  the  per  cent  sign. 

Example.  One-fifth  of  the  brick  taken  from  the  kiln 
after  a  certain  burning  were  soft  or  salmon  brick.  What 
was  the  per  cent  of  soft  brick? 

I  =  W?j  =  -20  =  20  per  cent  soft  brick.  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  soft  brick  were  ^  of  the  whole  number. 
If  we  change  ^  to  a  per  cent  we  will  get  the  per  cent  of  soft 
brick.  I  reduced  to  a  decimal  equals  .20  and  this  is  the 
same  as  20%. 

82 


PERCENTAGE  83 

Notice  that  the  sign  %  indicates  two  decimal  places. 
The  expression  4.2%  means  four  and  two-tenths  per  cent 
and  this  expressed  as  a  decimal  fraction  would  be  written 
.042. 

Example.    Express  the  fraction  |  as  a  per  cent. 

1  =  8)  7.000  ( .875  =  87.5%  Ans. 

64 

60 
56 

40 
40 


Explanation.  First  change  |  to  a  decimal  fraction  by 
dividing  the  numerator  by  the  denominator.  This  gives 
.875.  To  change  the  decimal  to  a  per  cent,  move  the 
decimal  point  two  places  to  the  right  and  add  the  per  cent 
sign:  thus,  .875  =  87.5%.  The  result  is  read  "  eighty-seven 
and  one-half  per  cent  "  or  "  eighty-seven  and  five-tenths 
per  cent." 

78.  Meaning  of  Tenns.  Before  we  can  work  problems 
in  percentage  we  must  get  a  clear  idea  of  the  meaning  of  the 
terms  used.  The  base  is  the  number  of  which  the  per  cent 
is  taken.  The  rate  is  the  per  cent  taken,  often  called  rate 
per  cent.  The  percentage  is  the  part  of  the  base  deter^ 
mined  by  the  rate.  The  amount  is  the  sum  of  the  base  and 
the  percentage.  The  difference  is  the  base  minus  the  per- 
centage. 

79.  Analysis  of  Problems.  Problems  involving  the  use 
of  percentage  usually  fall  into  one  of  the  three  following 
classes : 


84    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Case  1.  What  is  10%  of  250?  The  base  and  rate  are 
here  given  to  find  the  percentage.  Multiply  the  base  by 
the  rate  to  get  the  percentage. 

Percentage  =  base  X  rate. 

Case  2.  25  is  what  per  cent  of  250?  The  base  and  per- 
centage are  here  given  to  find  the  rate.  Divide  the  percent- 
age by  the  base  to  get  the  rate. 

Rate  =  percentage  -^  base. 

Case  3.  25  is  10%  of  what  number?  The  percentage  and 
rate  are  here  given  to  find  the  base.  Divide  the  percentage 
by  the  rate  to  get  the  base. 

Base  =  percentage  -r-  rate. 

Example  of  Case  1.  In  ordering  6|  M.B.M.  of  siding, 
the  builder  agrees  with  the  dealer  that  not  more  than  8% 
of  the  entire  order  may  be  in  pieces  less  than  8'  long.  How 
many  feet  B.M.  may  be  less  than  8'  long? 

8%  (rate)  X  6500  (base)  =  .08X6500  =  520'  (percentage) 
B.M.  Ans. 

Explanation.  It  is  easier  to  change  the  per  cent  to  a 
decimal  before  we  multiply.  We  could  multiply  first  and 
then  divide  by  100  to  get  the  result.  In  this  case  the  word 
of  in  the  statement  of  the  problem  means  the  same  thing 
as  times  just  as  it  did  in  common  fractions.  .08  times  65 
thousand  or  6500  equals  520  ft.  B.M. 

Example  of  Case  2.  In  taking  off  quantities  an  esti- 
mator finds  that  of  16,000  sq.ft.  of  flooring,  5600  sq.ft.  are 
to  be  quarter-sawed  oak.  What  per  cent  of  the  total  is  the 
oak? 


PERCENTAGE  85 

5600  (percentage) 


16,000  (base) 


=  .35  =  35%  (rate)  quartered  oak.    Ans. 


Explanation.  5600  is  the  percentage  and  16,000  is  the 
base.  Divide  5600  by  16,000  to  get  the  rate.  This  gives 
.35  or  35%  of  the  order  to  be  quartered  oak. 

Example  of  Case  3.  A  furniture  maker  builds  desks  in 
mahogany  and  oak.  The  number  of  mahogany  desks  turned 
out  of  the  factory  in  one  year  was  22,  which  was  4%  of  the 
total  output  of  the  desks.  What  was  the  total  output  of 
the  desks? 

22  (percentage)  h-4%  (rate)  =22-^  .04  =  550  (base)  desks. 

Ans. 

Explanation.  The  22  mahogany  desks  represent  the 
percentage  and  4%  is  the  rate.  It  is  easier  to  reduce  the 
4%  to  a  decimal  before  dividing.  22  divided  by  .04  gives 
550,  which  is  the  total  output  of  desks,  including  both  oak 
and  mahogany. 

80.  Solution  of  Problems.  The  solution  of  these  prob- 
lems does  not  appear  very  difficult  when  the  statement  of 
the  problem  is  simple.  It  is  very  important  and  not  always 
easy  to  determine  which  quantity  is  the  base,  which  the 
percentage  and  so  on.  For  example,  in  the  following  state- 
ment it  makes  a  great  deal  of  difference  which  quantity  is 
used  as  the  base:  One  contractor  bids  S4200  on  a  certain 
set  of  plans.  A  second  contractor  bids  S4800  on  the  same 
plans.  The  first  man's  price  is  14.3%  lower  than  the  second 
man's,  using  the  lower  price  as  a  base,  but  the  second  man  i^ 
only  12.5%  higher  than  the  first,  using  the  higher  price  as 
a  base. 

It  is  also  important  to  determine  exactly  which  quan- 
tity is  the  rate.     For  example,  consider  the  following  state- 


86    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

ment:  When  solid  rock  is  crushed,  it  occupies  more  space 
than  it  did  before.  The  per  cent  of  small  open  spaces  or 
voids  is  from  30%  to  55%.  How  much  space  will  one 
cubic  yard  of  solid  rock  occupy  after  it  is  crushed?  In 
this  case  the  volume  of  the  solid  rock  is  30%  less  than  or 
70%  of  the  total  space  occupied  by  the  crushed  rock. 
70%  is  the  rate  and  1  cu.yd.  is  the  percentage. 

81.  List  Prices  and  Discounts.  In  business  transactions 
many  quotations  are  given  as  list  or  catalog  prices  and  are 
subject  to  discounts.  Discounts  are  usually  given  thus: 
"  60%  and  20%  and  10%  off  for  cash  in  thirty  days."  This 
does  not  mean  that  the  total  discount  is  90%,  but  it  means 
that  a  discount  of  60%  is  taken  from  the  list  price  and  then 
a  second  discount  of  20%  is  taken  from  what  remains. 
Finally  10%  is  taken  off  this  last  price  for  cash  in  thirty  days. 

Example.  The  list  price  on  a  certain  store  door  lock 
is  $18  with  40%  and  10%  discounts  and  5%  for  cash  in 
thirty  days.  What  is  the  cost  of  the  lock  if  it  is  paid  for 
within  thirty  days? 


$18.00      list 
40% 


00    list 
7 .  20    discount 


80     1st  price 
1 .  08    discount 


$7.2000    discount.    $10.80     1st  price.     $9.72 

2d  price 

10% 

$1.0800    discount 

$9.72    2d  price                                            $9.72 

2d  price 

5%  off  for  cash                                          .48 

discount 

.  4860    discount  for  cash. 


24   final  price 
Ans. 


Explanation.    To  find  the  final  cost  of  the  lock  we  must 
find  the    discounts   and  subtract  them    from  the  price  in 


PERCENTAGE  87 

consecutive  order.  The  first  discount  allows  40%  off 
from  the  list  price.  40%  of  $18.00  is  $7.20.  To  get  the 
first  discount  price  we  subtract  $7.20  from  $18.00  to  get 
$10.80.  The  next  discount  is  10%  off  from  this  price.  10% 
of  $10.80  is  $1.08  and  we  subtract  this  from  $10.80  to  get 
the  second  discount  price.  This  is  $9.72.  Now  5%  from 
this  price  is  allowed  for  cash  in  thirty  days.  5%  of  $9.72 
is  48  cents  and  $9.72  less  48  cents  gives  $9.24  as  the  final 
price. 

82.  Profits.  Profit  is  often  expressed  as  a  per  cent  of 
the  actual  cost.  If  a  contractor  estimates  the  actual  cost 
of  construction  to  be  a  certain  sum,  he  adds  a  certain  per 
cent  of  the  cost  for  his  profit. 

Example.  The  estimated  actual  cost  of  a  building  is 
is  $4280.  If  the  contractor  adds  10%  for  profit,  what  price 
does  he  bid  on  the  job? 

$4280X10%  =  $428 

Adding  the  profit:      $4280 
428 


$4708  price.  Ans. 

Explanation.  10%  of  $4280  is  $428.  Adding  this  to  the 
actual  cost  gives  $4708  for  the  price  which  the  contractor 
bid. 

83.  Interest.  When  one  man  borrows  money  from 
another,  he  pays  interest  for  the  use  of  the  money.  This 
interest  is  usually  reckoned  at  a  certain  rate  per  cent  per 
year.  The  base  in  this  case  is  called  the  principal.  The 
only  difference  between  figuring  percentage  and  figuring 
interest  is  that  in  figuring  interest  time  must  be  taken  into 
account.  The  interest  on  a  certain  principal  for  one  year 
is  a  certain  sum  and  for  two  years  it  is  twice  that  sum. 


88    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Interest  is  compounded  by  adding  the  interest  to  the  prin- 
cipal at  the  end  of  the  year  and  figuring  the  interest  on  this 
amount  for  the  next  year. 

Example.  A  man  deposits  $500  in  the  bank  at  3% 
interest.  What  is  the  mount  of  the  principal  and  interest 
at  the  end  of  the  year? 

$500    principal  $500    principal 

.03    rate  15    interest 


$15.00    interest  $515    amount.      Ans. 

Ej'planation.  For  convenience  we  express  the  per  cent 
as  a  decimal  late.  Multiplying  the  principal,  $500,  by  the 
rate,  .03,  gives  $15  for  the  interest  for  one  year.  Adding 
this  to  the  principal  gives  the  amount,  or  $515. 

Example:  A  contractor  borrows  $1200  for  6  months 
at  the  rate  oil\%  per  annum.    What  interest  does  he  pay? 

$1200    principal 
.075 


6  000 
84  00 


2  )  $90.000    interest  for  one  year. 

$45 .  00      interest  for  six  months.  Ans. 

Explanation.  Reducing  the  rate  7\%  gives  .075  as  the 
rate.  Multiplying  the  principal  $1200  by  this  rate  gives 
$90.00  interest  for  one  year.  The  money  was  loaned  only 
for  6  months  and  the  interest  for  that  period  will  be  one-half 
of  the  interest  for  a  whole  year.  One-half  of  $90  is  $45, 
the  interest  on  $1200  for  6  months  at  7|%  per  annum. 


PERCENTAGE  89 

Summary   of  Chapter  VIII 

42.  The  words  "  per  cent  "  are  an  abbreviation  of  "  per 
centum,"  meaning  "  by  the  hundred."  The  sign  %  means 
per  cent.     (Sec.  76.) 

43.  To  change  a  fraction  to  a  per  cent,  find  its  decimal 
equivalent.  Then  move  the  decimal  point  two  places  to  the 
right  and  affix  the  per  cent  sign.     (Sec.  77.) 

44.  To  find  the  percentage  when  the  base  and  rate  are 
given,  multiply  the  base  by  the  rate.     (Sec.  79.) 

45.  To  find  the  rate  when  the  base  and  the  percentage 
are  given,  divide  the  percentage  by  the  base.     (Sec.  79.) 

46.  To  find  the  base  when  the  percentage  and  rate  are 
given,  divide  the  percentage  by  the  rate.     (Sec.  79.) 

47.  To  find  the  cost  price  when  a  series  of  discounts 
are  given,  find  the  amount  of  the  discounts  consecutively, 
subtracting  each  in  its  turn.  The  final  result  will  be  the 
cost  price.     (Sec.  81.) 

48.  To  figure  profit,  multiply  the  estimated  cost  by  the 
desired  rate  and  add  this  allowance  for  profit  to  the  cost. 
(Sec.  82.) 

49.  To  figure  interest,  multiply  the  principal  by  the 
rate  per  annum.  If  the  period  stipulated  is  other  than  for 
one  year  do  not  fail  to  take  this  into  account.     (Sec.  83.) 

PROBLEMS 

113.  What  is  25%  of  16?    of  48?    of  90?    of  240? 

114.  8  is  what  per  cent  of  16?     of  40?     of  80? 

115.  30%  off  of  a  number  leaves  350.     What  is  the  number? 

116.  A  pattern  maker  allows  I"  per  foot  for  shrinkage.  What 
per  cent  does  he  allow? 

117.  A  contractor  figures  that  1890  ft.  B.M.  will  be  required 
for  the  studding  in  a  house.  If  he  add  25%  for  waste,  what 
B.M.  must  he  order? 


90    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

118.  In  receiving  an  order  for  siding,  a  contractor  gets  650  ft. 
B.M.  in  6'  and  8'  lengths  out  of  a  total  of  5000  ft.  B.M.  What 
per  cent  is  this? 

119.  The  actual  face  of  a  4"  floor  board  is  only  3i".  What 
p)er  cent  must  be  added  for  matching? 

120.  Maple  flooring  "  Clear  "  grade  will  allow  7%  of  lengths 
2'  to  35'  according  to  the  grading  rules  of  the  Maple  Flooring  Manu- 
facturers' Association.  How  many  feet  B.M.  may  be  of  this 
length  in  an  order  for  7^  M.B.M.  Clear  maple  flooring? 

121.  In  laying  the  floor  for  a  house  the  contractor  allowed  320 
ft.  B.M.  for  waste,  which  was  12%  of  the  total.  How  many  feet 
B.M.  were  in  the  total  order? 

122.  What  is  the  net  price  of  an  enameled  iron  wash  bowl  if 
the  list  price  is  $18.00  with  30%  and  10%  off? 

123.  A  contractor  figures  the  actual  cost  of  a  job  to  be  $5820. 
He  was  awarded  the  contract  at  $6550.  What  per  cent  of  the 
actual  cost  was  profit? 

124.  In  figuring  on  a  certain  job  a  contractor  estimates  the 
actual  cost  to  be  $10,490.  If  he  adds  8%  for  contingencies  and 
10%  of  this  price  for  profit,  what  price  will  he  bid? 

125.  What  is  the  interest  on  $500  for  3  years  2  months  at  65% 
per  annum? 

126.  What  will  be  the  total  amount  of  $1200  in  5  years  at  5% 
per  year  compounded  annuallj^? 

127.  A  contractor  owns  a  concrete  mixer  which  cost  him  $1400. 
It  costs  him  $15  per  day  to  run  the  mixer.  Figuring  money  worth 
5%  and  depreciation  on  the  machine  at  20%,  what  will  be  the 
total  cost  of  operating  the  machine  per  year  of  200  days?  What 
will  be  the  cost  per  day? 


CHAPTER    IX 

RATIO.     PROPORTION.     CEMENT  AND  CONCRETE 
MIXTURES.     SLOPES.     LEVERS. 

84.  Ratio.  We  are  constantly  comparing  things  with 
each  other.  Among  many  other  things  we  may  compare 
weight,  distance  or  size.  In  fact,  this  is  exactly  what  we 
do  whenever  we  measure  the  length  of  a  board.  We  com- 
pare the  length  of  a  foot  measure  with  the  length  of  the 
board  and  we  say  that  the  board  is  9  times  as  long  as  the  foot 
measure  or  9  ft.  long.  If  one  plank  is  9  ft.  long  and  another 
is  3  ft.  long,  we  say  the  first  is  three  times  as  long  as  the 
second  or  the  second  is  one-third  as  long  as  the  first.  This 
comparison  may  also  be  stated  by  what  we  call  a  ratio. 
That  is,  we  say  the  length  cf  the  first  plank  is  to  the  length  of 
the  second  as  9  is  to  3.  This  is  written  mathematically, 
9  :  3  or  f . 

85.  A  Ratio  is  a  Fraction.  When  the  ratio  is  written 
in  the  form  of  a  fraction,  it  may  be  reduced  to  its  lowest 
terms:  thus,  |=i  =3,  which  means  that  the  first  board  is 
three  times  as  long  as  the  second.  Reversing  our  com- 
parison we  have  1=^,  which  means  that  the  second  board 
is  one-third  as  long  as  the  first.  This  ratio  is  said  to  be 
the  inverse  of  the  one  just  preceding.  Thus  we  see  that  a 
ratio  may  be  written  like  a  fraction  and,  like  a  fraction,  it 
may  be  reduced  to  its  lowest  terms. 

Please  notice  that  the  things  to  be  compared  must  be  of 
91 


92    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

the  same  kind.  For  example,  it  would  be  absurd  to  compare 
feet  with  bushels. 

A  ratio  is  a  mathematical  comparison  of  two  things  of, 
the  same  kind.  The  two  numbers  of  the  ratio  are  called 
its  terms. 

Example.  A  room  is  12'  wide  and  18'  long.  What  is 
the  ratio  of  the  width  to  the  length? 

-i|  =  ?=2:3  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  comparison  of  the  width  to  the  length 
will  be  as  12  is  to  18.  Reduced  and  expressed  as  a  ratio 
this  is  2  :  3. 

86.  Cement  and  Concrete  Mixtures.  We  frequently  see 
the  statement  that  cement  mortar  is  to  be  mixed  in  the 
ratio  1:  3.  This  means  that  1  part  by  volume  of  cement 
is  to  be  mixed  with  3  parts  by  volume  of  sand.  A  sack  of 
cement  weighing  94  pounds  contains  1  cu.ft.  of  cement,  very 
nearly.  Thus  for  every  sack  of  cement  we  must  have  3 
cu.ft  of  sand.  Likewise  in  mixing  concrete  the  directions 
sometimes  state  that  it  shall  be  mixed  1:2^:5  or  1:3:6. 
Taking  the  first  ratio  as  an  example,  this  means  that  the 
mixture  shall  be  composed  of  1  part  by  volume  of  cement 
to  2^  parts  by  volume  of  sand  to  5  parts  by  volume  of 
gravel  or  broken  stone.  In  order  to  insure  that  the  mixture 
shall  be  uniform  and  shall  completely  fulfill  the  require- 
ments, great  care  should  be  taken  in  measuring  and  mixing. 
In  Fig.  28  is  shown  a  bottomless  measuring  box  which  con- 
tains 1  cu.ft.  of  material  for  every  3"  of  height.  A  box 
like  this,  which  is  12"  high,  will  contain  4  cu.ft.  Such  a 
box  is  more  accurate  and  frequently  more  convenient  than 
the  box  of  an  ordinary  wheelbarrow  for  measuring  the 
material. 


RATIO 


93 


Example:  In  making  a  concrete  mixture  in  the  ratio 
1  :  2§  :  5  a  contractor  expects  to  use  25  sacks  of  cement. 
How  many  cubic  feet  of  sand  and  gravel  does  he  require? 


25    sacks  cement 


12i 
50 

Q2h  cu.ft.  sand. 


25     sacks  cement 
5 

125     cu.ft,  gravel'.     Ans. 


Ans. 


Fig.  28. — Measuring  Box. 


Explanation.  For  every  sack  of  cement  he  will  need 
2^  cu.ft.  of  sand.  For  25  sacks  he  will  need  2^  times  25 
or  62|  cu.ft.  of  sand.  Also  for  every  sack  of  cement  he  will 
need  5  cu.ft.  of  gravel.  For  25  sacks  he  will  need  25  times 
5  or  125  cu.ft.  of  gravel. 


94    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

87.  Proportion.  If  two  ratios  are  equal,  the  statement 
of  their  equaUty  is  a  proportion.  The  ratio  2  :  3  is  equal  to 
the  ratio  12  :  18  because  the  last  one  mentioned  can  be 
reduced  to  the  first:  thus,  12  :  18=  l|  =  f  =2  :  3.  We  can, 
therefore,  write  these  two  ratios  equal  to  each  other:  thus, 
2  :  3  =  12  :  18.  Another  way  of  writing  this  same  expres- 
sion would  be  2  :  3::  12  :  18. 

To  illustrate  this  further,  let  us  consider  the  statement: 
For  each  100  sq.ft.  of  roof  surface,  833  shingles  are  required 
to  lay  4|"  to  the  weather.  Then  for  500  sq.ft.  of  roof 
surface,  4165  shingles  will  be  required.  We  can  write  this 
statement  in  the  form  of  a  proportion.  100  sq.ft.  are  to 
500  sq.ft.  as  833  shingles  are  to  4165  shingles,  or,  more 
briefly,  100  sq.ft.  :  500  sq.ft.:: 833  shingles  :  4165  shingles. 
Such  a  statement  as  this  can,  as  we  have  just  seen,  be 
expressed  mathematically  in  the  form  of  a  proportion. 

88.  Inverse  Proportion.  If  the  four  numbers  of  a  pro- 
portion are  so  related  that  an  increase  in  one  of  the  four 
causes  a  corresponding  decrease  in  another,  the  proportion 
is  an  inverse  proportion.  For  example,  the  following  is 
the  statement  of  an  inverse  proportion:  If  it  takes  4  men 
12  days  to  do  a  certain  job,  6  men  working  at  the  same 
rate  can  do  it  in  8  days.  Written  as  a  proportion  this  would 
be,  4  men  :  6  men : :  8  days  :  12  days.  Increasing  the  num- 
ber of  men  from  4  to  6  decreases  the  number  of  days  from 
12  to  8. 

The  first  and  last  terms  of  a  proportion  are  called  the 
extremes.  The  second  and  third  terms  are  called  the 
means. 

89.  Solving  a  Proportion.  If  we  multiply  the  two  means 
of  a  proportion  together  and  also  the  two  extremes,  the 
results  will  be  equal.  To  prove  this  let  us  try  it  with  the 
following  proportion : 


RATIO  05 

(Extreme)  :  (Mean) : :  (Mean)  :  (Extreme) 
2         :        3      ::       12      :         18 

Product  of  the  means,  3X12  =  36. 
Product  of  the  extremes,  2  X 18  =  36. 
The  two  products  are  equal. 

Let  us  now  multiply  the  two  means  together  and  divide 
the  product  by  one  extreme. 

(Mean)  X  (Mean)  =  (Product) 
3      X      12     =       36 

(Product)  -7-  (Extreme)  =  (Extreme) 
36        -T-         2         =18 

This  gives  the  other  extreme. 

We  will  now  multiply  the  two  extremes  together  and 
divide  by  one  of  the  means. 

(Extreme)  X  (Extreme)  =  (Product) 
2         X        18        =       36 

(Product) -7-    (Mean)    =    (Mean) 
36        -^        12        =        3 

This  gives  the  other  mean. 

We  may  write  the  following  statements: 

(1)  The  product  of  the  two  means  of  any  proportion  is 
equal  to  the  product  of  the  two  extremes. 

(2)  The  product  of  the  two  means  divided  by  either  extreme 
gives  the  other  extreme. 

(3)  The  product  of  the  two  extremes  divided  by  either  mean 
gives  the  other  mean. 

Thus  we  see  if  one  term  of  a  proportion  is  unknown  it 
can  readily  be  found  by  means  of  these  relations. 


96    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Example. 

missing  term? 

In  tlic  proportion,  25  :  a:::5  :  11,  find    the 

1 1     extreme 
25    extreme 

55 
22 

Mean    5)275 
55 

product 
mean.     Ans. 

Explanation.  The  missing  term  is  a  mean.  Therefore, 
if  we  multiply  the  two  extremes  together  and  divide  the 
product  by  the  known  mean,  the  result  will  be  the  unknown 
mean,  which  is  indicated  in  this  proportion  by  the  letter  x. 
The  product  of  the  extremes,  11  and  25,  is  275.  Dividing 
this  by  the  known  mean,  5,  gives  55  for  the  unknown  term 
of  the  proportion. 

90.  The  Statement  of  a  Proportion.  Care  must  be  used 
in  making  up  a  proportion  from  the  statement.  A  good 
rule  to  follow  is:  Put  the  two  things  of  the  same  kind  in 
their  proper  order  as  the  first  and  second  term ;  then  write  the 
known  thing  of  the  other  kind  as  the  third  term  and  indi- 
cate the  unknown  thing  as  the  last  term  of  the  proportion. 

By  the  use  of  the  principle  of  proportion  many  practical 
problems  may  easily  be  solved. 

Example.  Joists  2"X12",  16"  on  center,  are  to  be  set 
for  a  floor  surface  having  960  sq.ft.  of  area.  How  many  feet 
B.M.  will  be  required  for  the  joists? 

16"  =  li' 

1^  :  2::  960:  a: 

240 

960X2    r60X2     900X2X3     .  ..n  f+  ti  a/t  •  •  *         a 
— :rT —  =  — T —  =  -^--^ =  1440  ft.  B.M.  joists.     Ans. 


RATIO 


97 


Explanation.  For  every  foot  of  floor  length  there  will  be 
a  corresponding  foot  of  joist  length.  For  every  16"  or  I5' 
of  floor  width  there  will  be  2X1  =  2  or  2  board  feet  of  joist, 
A  board  foot  is  one  square  foot  of  board  1"  thick.  We  can, 
therefore,  write  this  in  the  form  of  a  proportion.  We  solve 
the  proportion  by  multiplying  the  two  means  together  and 


Fig.  29.— Slope  of  a  Rafter. 


dividing  by  the  extreme.     Expressing  this  in  the  form  of 

960  X  2  X  3 
a  fraction  and  simplifying  gives which  equals  1440 

ft.  B.M.  of  2X12  joists.  The  use  of  the  proportion  in  this 
problem  shortens  the  work  considerably. 

91.  Slopes.  Proportion  can  frequently  be  used  to  ad- 
advantage  in  connection  with  embankments,  roof  slopes  and 
other  similar  slopes  and  grades.  The  total  horizontal  run 
is  to  the  unit  horizontal  distance  as  the  total  rise  is  to  the  rise 
for  the  unit  run. 

Example.  Fig.  29  shows  a  rafter  which  rises  6'  4"  in 
16'  of  horizontal  measurement.  How  many  inches  does  it 
rise  per  foot  of  horizontal  measurement? 


98    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

6' 4"  =  76" 

16  :  l::76:x 

76X1    76     .3,,  . 

^^  =  -=41  Ans. 

Explanation.  First  change  the  6'  4"  to  inches  because 
the  answer  will  be  in  inches.  Then  writing  the  proportion, 
we  have:  16  ft.  are  to  1  ft,  as  76  ins,  are  to  the  answer. 
Solving  this  proportion  gives  4f"  rise  for  every  horizontal 
foot. 

Example.  An  earth  embankment  rises  1|  ft,  on  every 
foot  of  level  ground.  How  much  will  the  embankment  rise 
for  18  ft.  of  level  ground? 

1  :  18::U  '•  ^ 


18XU 


=  27  ft.  rise  in  18'  run,  Ans. 


Explanation.  In  this  case  the  proportion  can  be  stated 
thus:  The  unit  run  is  to  the  total  run  as  the  rise  for  the  unit 
run  is  to  the  total  rise.  Writing  this  in  the  form  of  a  pro- 
portion and  solving  we  get  27  ft,  rise  in  18  ft,  run. 

92.  Levers.  Every  mechanic  is  familiar  with  the  ordi- 
nary crow-bar  when  used  as  a  lever.  There  are  many  other 
familiar  examples  of  the  lever.  The  wheelbarrow  is  a  good 
example  of  a  lever.  The  scale  beam  on  which  a  small 
weight  balances  a  large  weight  on  the  scale  platform  is 
another  example. 

The  lever  is  a  stiff  bar  or  rod  supported  or  pivoted  at 
a  point  on  which  it  can  move  freely.  The  pivot  is  called 
the  fulcrum.  The  distance  from  the  center  of  the  weight 
to  the  fulcrum  is  called  the  weight  ann.  The  distance  from 
the  point  where  the  force  is  applied  to  the  fulcrum  is  called 
the  force  arm. 


RATIO 


99 


93.  Arrangement  of  Levers.  There  are  three  arrange- 
ments of  levers.  The  first  type  is  shown  in  Fig.  30(a).  The 
fulcrum  is  between  the  weight  and  the  acting  force.  Fig. 
30(6)  shows  a  lever  of  a  second  type  in  which  the  weight  is 


Weight 


^ 


Weight    ^j^ 
Arm        [^ 


Force 


Arm 


Fia.30(a) 
Weight 


ZS" 


■ 


Weight 


Arm 


Force 


Arm 
FiG.30(6) 


Forco 

f 
H 


Force 


Force 


Weight 


FoTce 


Arm 


Weight 


Arm 
Fig.  30(0) 


"1 


between  the  fulcrum  and  the  force.  A  lever  of  a  third  type 
is  shown  in  Fig.  30(c).  Here  the  force  is  applied  between  the 
weight  and  the  fulcrum. 

In  each  of  these  levers  the  following  proportion  holds 
good : 

Force  :  Weight : :  Weight  Arm  :  Force  Arm 


100    ARITHMETIC  FOR   CARPENTERS  AND   BUILDERS 

Example.  A  man  pushes  down  on  the  end  of  a  crow-bar 
with  a  force  of  140  pounds.  The  distance  from  his  hand  to 
the  fulcrum  is  5  ft.  How  large  a  weight  can  he  lift  at  a 
distance  of  1  ft.  from  the  fulcrum? 

l:5::140:a; 

^^^  =  700  lbs.  Ans. 

Explanation.     In  writing  this  proportion  we  put  down 

the  value  of  the  weight  arm  first.     This  arrangement  brings 

the  answer  last.     It  is  not  always  necessary  to  do  this,  but 

it   is   convenient.     Multiplying   the   means   together   and 

140X5 
dividing  by  the  extreme  gives  — ij which,  when  solved, 

gives  700  lbs.  that  the  man  can  lift  at  the  end  of  the  bar. 


RATIO 


101 


Summary  of  Chapter  IX 

50.  To  change  a  ratio  to  a  fraction,  write  the  first  term 
over  the  second  and  reduce  this  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms. 
(Sec.  85.) 

51.  To  find  the  number  of  cubic  feet  of  sand  and  gravel 
required  for  any  given  mixture  of  concrete,  multiply  the 
number  of  sacks  of  cement  to  be  used  by  the  second  term 
of  the  ratio  to  get  the  cubic  feet  of  sand  required  and  by 


Fig.  31.— Roof  Rafter  and  Strut. 


the  third  term  to  get  the  cubic  feet  of  gravel  required. 
(Sec.  86.) 

52.  To  solve  a  proportion,  multiply  the  two  means 
together  and  divide  the  product  by  the  known  extreme  or 
multiply  the  two  extremes  and  divide  the  product  by  the 
known  mean.  The  result  will  be  the  unknown  term  or 
answer  of  the  proportion.     (Sec.  89.) 

53.  To  write  the  statement  of  a  proportion,  write  the 
two  things  of  the  same  kind  that  are  known  in  their  proper 
order  as  the  first  and  second  terms,  write  the  known  thing 
as  the  third  term  and  indicate  the  answer  as  the  fourth 
term.    This  rule  is  not  rigid  but  it  is  convenient.    (Sec.  90.) 


102    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

54.  To  solve  slopes,  write  the  proportion:  The  total 
horizontal  run  is  to  the  unit  horizontal  run  as  the  total  rise 
is  to  the  rise  for  the  unit  run.  Then  substitute  the  given 
values  and  solve  the  proportion.     (Sec.  91.) 

55.  To  solve  a  problem  in  levers,  write  the  proportion: 
Force  in  pounds  is  to  the  weight  in  pounds  as  the  weight 
arm  in  feet  or  inches  is  to  the  force  arm  in  feet  or  inches. 
Then  substitute  the  given  values  and  solve  the  proportion. 
(Sec.  93.) 


Fig.  32. — Wheelbarrow  as  a  Jjever. 


PROBLEMS 


128.  A  building  is  three  times  as  long  as  it  is  high.  What  is 
the  ratio  of  the  height  to  the  length? 

129.  Reduce  the  ratio  1^  :  12  to  its  lowest  terms. 

130.  Concrete  for  a  certain  job  is  to  be  mixed  1:3:5.  If 
250  sacks  of  cement  are  used,  how  many  cubic  feet  of  sand  and 
gravel  are  required? 

131.  A  drawing  is  shown  to  a  scale  of  1"  =  1'.  What  is  the 
ratio  of  the  actual  size  of  the  piece  to  the  size  of  the  drawing? 

132.  If  5  men  complete  a  barn  in  18  days,  how  long  will  it  take 
7  men  to  complete  it? 

133.  If  3  men  can  make  85  ft.  of  cement  sidewalk  5  ft.  wide 
in  a  day,  how  much  sidewalk  of  the  same  width  can  5  men  make 
in  one  day?    In  two  days? 

134.  A  contractor  knows  from  past  experience  that  he  uses  30 
ft.  B.M.  of  4X4's  and  45  ft.  B.M.  of  2X4's  for  every  150  ft.  B.M. 
of  1"  stuff  for  concrete  forms.    On  a  job  requiring  22,000  ft.  B.M. 


RATIO 


103 


of  I"  stuff,  how  many  feet  B.M.  4X4's  and  2X4's  will  be  re- 
quired? 

135.  In  estimating  a  certain  job  a  builder  finds  that  there  are 
2500  sq.ft.  of  partitions  requiring  2X4  studding  set  16"  on  centers. 
How  many  board  feet  of  studding  will  be  required? 

136.  For  a  hanging  ceiling  of  4200  sq.ft.  1  X6's  set  20"  on  center 
are  used  for  joists.    How  many  feet  B.M.  of  1 X 6's  will  be  required? 


Fig.  33. — The  Hammer  as  a  Lever. 


137.  In  making  a  rough  estimate  a  builder  remembers  that  a 
certain  residence  containing  32,500  cu.ft  cost  $5600.  How  much 
will  a  residence  which  contains  47,000  cu.ft.  cost  at  the  same  rate? 

138.  The  rise  of  a  truck  approach  at  the  end  of  a  platform  is 
3"  for  every  horizontal  foot.  What  is  the  height  of  the  platform 
if  the  total  horizontal  run  is  12  ft.? 

139.  If  a  roof  rafter  rises  9'  6"  in  18'  horizontal  run,  what 
must  be  the  length  of  a  vertical  strut  11'  from  the  lower  end  as 
shown  in  diagram  in  Fig.  31? 

140.  A  wheelbarrow  may  be  considered  as  a  lever  of  the  second 


104    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

class.  This  is  shown  diagramatically  in  Fig.  32.  With  what 
force  must  a  man  Uft  in  order  to  move  the  wheelbarrow  when  it 
is  loaded  with  350-pounds  of  material? 

141.  A  claw-hammer  is  a  bent  lever  as  shown  in  Fig.  33.  In 
drawing  a  nail  a  carpenter  pulls  with  a  force  of  20  lbs.  What  is 
the  resistance  of  the  nail  in  pounds? 

142.  Two  men  on  the  end  of  a  bar  can  push  down  with  a  force 
of  120  lbs.  each.  If  the  distance  from  their  hands  to  the  fulcrum 
is  6  ft.  and  the  distance  from  the  fulcrum  to  the  weight  is  18", 
how  large  a  weight  can  they  lift? 


CHAPTER  X 

LINEAR  MEASURE.  AREA.  VOLUME.  LIQUID  MEAS- 
URE. DRY  MEASURE.  WEIGHT.  THE  CIRCLE. 
WEIGHT  OF  BUILDING  MATERIALS.  BEARING 
POWER  OF  SOILS.  FOOTINGS.  CONCRETE  MIX- 
TURES 

94.  Weights  and  Measures.  There  are  two  systems  of 
weights  and  measures  in  common  use.  The  one  most  gener- 
ally used  among  English-speaking  nations  is  the  British  sys- 
tem. The  other  system  in  use  is  the  metric  or  decimal  system. 
The  metric  system  is  much  more  convenient.  Although  it 
is  used  to  a  considerable  extent  in  some  of  the  metal-working 
trades,  it  is  doubtful  if  it  will  ever  be  used  extensively  in  the 
building  trades.  We  will,  therefore,  confine  ourselves  to 
the  British  system.  Tables  of  values  and  equivalents  of 
the  British  system  most  commonly  met  with  in  the  building 
trades  are  given  herewith. 

95.  Measures  of  Length.  Linear  measure  is  used  for 
comparing  lines  and  distances. 

TABLE  I 

COMMON  LINEAR  MEASURE 

12  inches  (in.  ")  =  1  foot  (ft.  ')• 
3  feet  =1  yard  (yd.)  =36  ins. 

51  yards  =1  rod  (rd.)  =  16nt.  =198  ins. 

320  rods  =  1  mile  (mi.)  =  1760  yds.  =5280  ft. 

105 


106    ARITHMETIC  fOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

96.  Measures  of  Surface.    Surface  has  two  dimensions, 
length  and  breadth. 

TABLE  II 


97.  Measures   of   Volume.     Volume  has  three  dimen- 
sions, length,  breadth  and  thickness. 

TABLE  III 

COMMON    CUBIC    MEASURE 

1728  cubic  inches  (cu.ins.)  =1  cubic  foot  (cu.ft.) 
27  cubic  feet  =  l  cubic  yard  (cu.yd.)  =46,656  cu.ins. 

TABLE  IV 

STONE    MEASURE 

24f  cubic  feet  =  1  perch. 

A  perch  of  stone  in   masonry  is    I65   ft.    long,    1^   ft. 
wide  and  1  ft.  high. 

98.  Measures  of  Capacity.    Capacity  is   expressed   in 
units  of  liquid  and  dry  measure. 

TABLE  V 
COMMON    LIQUID    MEASURE 

4    gills  (gi.)  =  l  pint  (pt.) 
2    i)ints        =1  quart  (qt.) 

4    quarts     =1  gallon  (gal.)  =8  pints  =  231  cu.ins. 
31i  gallons     =1  barrel  (bbl.)  =  126  qts.  =252  pts. 
2    barrels     =  1  hogshead  (hhd.)  =  63  gals.  =  252  qts.  =  504  pts. 


LINEAR  MEASURE  107 

Dry  measure  is  used  for  measuring  grains,  seeds,  fruits, 
lime,  etc. 

TABLE  VI 

DRY    MEASURE 

2  pints    =  1  quart. 

8  quarts  =  1  peck  (pk.)  =16  pts. 

4  pecks  =  1  bushel  (bu.)  =32  qts.  =64  pts. 

The  following  table  gives  the  value  of  some  of  these 
units  in  cubic  inches. 

TABLE  VII 

COMPARATIVE    VALUES 

U.  S.  liquid  measure,  1  gal.  =231  cu.ins. 
U.  S.  liquid  measure,  1  qt.  =57 J  cu.ins. 
U.  S.  dry  measure,  5  pk=268T  cu.ins. 
U.  S.  dry  measure,  1  qt.  =  67i  cu.ins. 

From  the  above  you  will  see  that  a  quart  liquid  measure 
is  smaller  than  a  quart  dry  measure.  The  values  used  in 
Great  Britain  are  different  from  the  values  given  here. 

99.  Measures  of  Weight.  The  system  used  for  meas- 
uring the  weight  of  all  ordinary  articles  is  called  avoirdupois. 
Druggists  use  the  apothecary  system  and  jewelers  use  troy 
weight.     We  will  use  the  avoirdupois  system. 

TABLE  VIII 

AVOIRDUPOIS    WEIGHT 

16  ounces  foz.)      =1  pound  (lb.) 
100  pounds  =  1  hundredweight  (cwt.) 

20  hundredweight  =  1  ton  (T.)  =  2000  pounds. 
2240  pounds  =1  long  ton. 

With  these  units  we  are  able  to  make  all  the  measure- 
ments commonly  used  by  the  carpenter  and  builder.     We 


108    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

are  already  familiar  with  the  measures  of  length;     let  us 
now  find  out  how  to  use  measures  of  surface. 

100.  Square  or  Surface  Measure.  If  we  cut  out  a  piece 
of  paper  in  the  form  of  a  square  one  inch  on  a  side,  we  say 
that  the  sheet  contains  one  square  inch  of  surface.  If  we 
cut  out  a  square,  one  foot  on  a  side,  we  say  that  this  contains 
one  square  foot  of  surface.  The  square  inch  and  the  square 
foot  are  the  units  of  surface  measurement.  Surface  is  also 
often  called  area. 

101.  Area  of  the  Square  and  the  Rectangle.  A  square 
surface  is  one  the  four  sides  of  which  are  of  equal  length 
and  the  four  angles  of  which  are  right  angles.  To  find  the 
area  of  a  square  we  multiply  the  length  of  one  side  either  in 
feet  or  inches  by  the  length  of  the  other  side  in  feet  or  inches. 
The  product  gives  the  number  of  square  feet  or  of  square 
inches  in  the  square.  A  rectangle  is  a  figure  similar  to  the 
square  except  that  two  of  its  opposite  sides  are  longer  than 
the  other  two.  To  find. the  area  of  a  rectangle  we  multi-ply  its 
length  by  its  width.  It  is  important  to  notice  that  the  length 
and  width  must  be  in  the  same  units  before  you  can  multiply. 
For  example,  feet  times  feet  will  give  square  feet;  inches 
times  inches  will  give  square  inches.  You  can  change  square 
inches  to  square  feet  by  dividing  by  144  and  you  can  change 
square  feet  to  square  inches  by  multiplying  by  144. 

Example.  How  many  square  feet  does  a  floor  16'X19' 
contain? 


16  ft. 

19  ft. 

144 

16 

304  sq.ft.  Ana. 


LINEAR  MEASURE 


109 


Explanation.  Since  the  length  and  width  are  in  feet 
the  answer  will  be  in  square  feet.  Multiply  the  length  by 
the  width  to  get  the  area  of  the  rectangle.  16' X 19' =  304 
sq.ft.  in  the  floor. 

Example.  What  is  the  area  of  a  table  top  64|"  long 
by  28|"  wide? 

641x281-64.5" 
28.75" 


3 

225 

45 

15 

516  0 

1290 

1854. 

375  sq. 

ins, 

Ans. 

Explanation.  For  convenience  first  change  the  common 
fractions  to  decimals.  Then  multiply  the  length  in  inches 
64.5"  by  the  width  28.75"  to  get  the  number  of  square  inches 
in  the  area. 

102.  The  Circle.  A  circle  is  a  plane  figure  bounded  by 
a  curved  line  called  a  circumference.  A  line  drawn  through 
the  center  of  the  circle  and  ending  on 
each  side  at  the  circumference  is  called 
a  diameter.  A  line  drawn  from  the 
center  to  the  circumference  is  called  a 
radius.  The  radius  is  equal  to  one- 
half  the  diameter.  The  meaning  of 
these  terms  is  further  illustrated  in 
Fig.  34. 

The  diameter  of   a   circle   bears   a 
definite  relation  to  the  circumference. 
This  relation  is  such  that  if  we  divide  the  circumference  of 
any  circle  by  its  diameter  we  will  get  Z\  for  an  answer.     If 


^^tcu^ilfere^ 


Fig.  34. 


no    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

we  divide  one  quantity  by  another  we  have  a  ratio.  This 
value  is,  therefore,  the  ratio  of  the  circumference  to  the 
diameter.  The  decimal  equivalent  of  this  number  is  3.1416. 
We  use  this  figure  so  often  that  we  have  assigned  a  special 
character  to  name  it.  This  character  is  the  Greek  letter  pi 
(pronounced  pie)  and  it  is  written 

7r  =  3.1416=V=3f 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  these  values  given  are  not  exact, 
but  they  are  close  approximations.  We  could  carry  the 
decimal  fraction  out  to  as  many  places  as  we  pleased, 
but  we  would  still  get  a  remainder.  Four  decimal  places 
are  all  that  are  necessary  for  practical  purposes.  For  most 
purposes  the  value  of  3^  or  \^-  is  sufficiently  accurate.  Since 
7r  is  the  ratio  of  the  circumference  to  the  diameter,  we  can 
find  the  circumference  when  the  diameter  is  given  if  we 
multiply  the  diameter  by  tt. 

Example.     The  diameter  of  a  circle  is  56  '.     What  is  the 
length  of  the  circumference? 

Solution  No.  1    ^^Xy=176"  Ans. 

Solution  No.  2  56 

3.1416 


336 

56 

2  24 

5  6 

168 

175.9296"  Ans. 


LINEAR  MEASURE  111 

Explanation.  Here  is  an  example  in  which  the  value  y- 
is  very  convenient.  Using  this  value  and  canceling  we  get 
the  result  176"  in  solution  No.  1.  Compare  this  to  solution 
No.  2  in  which  we  have  multiplied  by  3.1416.  The  result  is 
175.9296"  or  very  nearly  176".  This  shows  that  there  is 
no  great  error  in  using  -^^j?-  instead  of  3.1416  for  the  value  of  r. 

Example.  The  circumference  of  a  circle  is  77".  What 
is  its  radius? 

22       ^      7      4Q 
77^y  =  JJX^=^  =  24i"  diam. 

2 
24^^-2  =  121"  rad.  '    Ans. 

Explanation.  Divide  77  by  3^  or  \2  to  get  the  diameter. 
The  radius  is  one-half  of  the  diameter,  so  we  divide  by  2  to 
get  the  radius. 

Example.  A  wooden  stave  silo  is  to  be  built  16'  in 
diameter.  How  many  lineal  feet  of  1^"  rod  will  be  necessary 
for  each  band,  allowing  about  9"  for  the  joint? 

3.1416 
16 


18  8496 
31  416 


50.2656'  =  50i'  about. 

4 


9"=     ^' 


51'  Ans. 

Explanation.  Multiply  the  diameter  16'  by  %  to  get 
the  circumference  of  the  silo.  This  gives  50.26/  which  is 
a  little  more  than  50j',  Adding  9"  or  f '  for  the  joint  gives 
51'  required  in  each  band. 


112    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS   AND  BUILDERS 

103.  Volume  or  Cubic  Measure.  When  we  wish  to  know 
volume  or  contents  of  a  cube  or  rectangular  block  we  find 
out  how  many  cubic  inches  or  cubic  feet  it  contains.  A 
cubic  inch  is  the  volume  of  a  cube  all  of  where  edges  are  one 
inch  in  length.  A  cubic  foot  is  a  cube  all  of  whose  edges 
are  one  foot  in  length.  To  find  the  volume  of  a  cube  we  multi- 
ply its  length  by  its  breadth  and  this  again  by  its  thickness. 
Since  all  the  edges  of  a  cube  are  equal,  this  is  equivalent 
to  multiplying  the  length  of  one  side  of  the  cube  by  itself 
three  times. 

Example.  How  many  cubic  inches  does  a  cube  each  of 
whose  edges  are  5"  long  contain? 

5"X5"  =  25sq.ins. 

25  sq.ins.  X5"  =  125  cu.ins.  Ans. 

Explanation.  If  we  multiply  5"  times  5"  we  get  the 
number  of  square  inches  in  one  face  of  the  cube  or  25  sq.ins. 
Multiplying  this  again  by  5"  gives  125  cu.ins.  in  the  cube. 

A  rectangular  block  is  similar  to  a  cube  except  that  the 
length  of  all  the  sides  is  not  the  same.  To  find  the  volume 
of  a  rectangular  block,  we  multiply  the  length  by  the  width  and 
this  again  by  the  height. 

Example.  What  is  the  cubic  contents  of  a  room  12' X 
16'X9'  high? 

12' 
16' 

72 
12 

192  sq.ft. 
9' 

1728  cu.ft.  Ans, 


LINEAR  MEASURE  113 

Explanation.  To  find  the  contents  of  the  room  in  cubic 
feet,  we  multiply  the  width  12'  by  the  length  16'  by  the 
height  9'.     This  gives  1278  cu.ft.  as  the  contents  of  the  room. 

104.  Weight  of  Lumber.  If  we  know  the  weight  of  a 
cubic  foot  of  lumber  we  may  estimate  the  weight  of  a  quan- 
tity by  multiplying  the  volume  in  cubic  feet  by  the  weight 
per  cubic  foot.  The  weights  of  some  of  the  common  kinds 
of  lumber  are  given  in  the  table  on  page  114.  The  weights 
given  are  for  perfectly  dry  lumber.  Green  timbers  weigh 
from  one-fifth  to  one-half  more  than  the  figures  given  here. 
Ordinary  building  timbers,  fairly  well  seasoned,  weigh  about 
one-sixth  more  than  these  values. 

Example.  What  will  be  the  weight  of  a  pile  of  closely 
stacked  Northern  pine  lumber,  air  seasoned,  which  is  6  ft. 
wide,  18  ft.  long  and  5  ft.  high? 


18' 

6' 

108 

5' 

540 

cu.ft. 

34.3 

lbs.  per  cu.ft. 

162  0 

2160 

1620 

6)18522.0 

lbs.  dry 

3087 

lbs,  to  add  for  moisture. 

18522 

21609 

lbs,  weight, 

Ans. 


114    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 
TABLE  IX 

WEIGHT    OF    LUMBER    PER    CUBIC     FOOT 

Cypress,  American,  dry 34.3  lbs.  per  cu.ft. 

Hemlock,  perfectly  dry 25  " 

Maple,  dry 49  " 

Oak,  white,  dry 48  " 

Oak,  red,  dry 32-45  " 

Pine,  white,  dry 25  " 

Pine,  yellow.  Northern 34. 3  " 

Pine,  yellow.  Southern 45  " 

Poplar,  dry 29 

Spruce,  perfectly  dry 25  " 

(Kidder's  Pocket  Book.) 

Explanation.  First  find  the  cubic  contents  of  a  pile  of 
lumber  by  multiplying  the  length  by  the  width  by  the  height. 
This  gives  540  cu.ft.  for  the  volume  of  the  pile.  Multiply- 
ing this  by  the  weight  per  cubic  foot  of  Northern  pine, 
which  is  34.3  lbs.,  we  get  18,522  lbs.  for  the  weight  of  the 
pile  if  the  lumber  were  perfectly  dry.  It  is  only  air  seasoned 
and  so  we  must  add  one-sixth.  Dividing  by  6  we  get  3087 
lbs.  to  add  on  account  of  the  moisture  in  the  lumber.  This 
gives  21,609  lbs.  as  the  estimated  weight  of  the  pile. 

105.  Weight  of  Building  Material.  It  is  often  con- 
venient to  know  the  weight  of  definite  quantities  of  building 
materials  of  various  kinds.  If  we  know  the  weight  of  a 
cubic  foot  of  these  materials  we  can  find  the  weight  of  any 
quantity  just  as  we  did  in  the  case  of  lumber. 

TABLE   X 

WEIGHT    OF    VARIOUS    BUILDING    MATERIALS 

PER    CUBIC     FOOT  Average  weight. 

pouud.s  per  cu.ft_ 

Brick,  best  pressed 150 

Brick,  common  hard 125 

Brick,  soft  inferior 100 

Brickwork,  pressed  brick 140 

Brickwork,  ordinary , 112 


LINEAR  MEASURE  115 

Average  weight, 
pounds  per  cu.ft. 

Concrete 150 

Granite 170 

Limestones  and  marbles 165 

Masonry  of  granite  or  limestone,  well  dressed 165 

Masonry  of  granite  rubble 154 

Masonry  of  sandstone,  well  dressed 144 

Sandstone,  fit  for  building 151 

(Kidder's  Pocket  Book.) 

Example:     How  much  will  an  ordinary  brick  wall  9" 
thick  by  14'  high  by  32'  long  weigh? 

9"  =  r  14' 

32' 

28 
42 

4)448     sq.ft. 

112 
3 

336     cu.ft.  in  wall. 

112     weight  of  brickwork. 

672 
336 
336 


37632     lbs.  weight  of  wall.  Ans. 

Explanation.  We  first  find  the  cubic  contents  of  the  wall. 
There  are  336  cu.ft.  in  the  wall.  Ordinary  brickwork, 
according  to  the  table,  weighs  112  lbs.  per  cubic  foot.  Hence 
multiplying  the  number  of  cubic  feet  in  the  wall  by  the 
weight  per  cubic  foot  gives,  336X112  =  37,632  lbs.  as  the 
weight  of  the  wall. 

106.  Bearing  Power  of  Soils.  The  bearing  power  of 
various  soils  depends  upon  the  form  of  the  structure  and  the 


116    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

character  of  the  soil.  The  following  table  of  allowable  soil 
pressures  is  given  by  Prof.  Ira  O.  Baker.  To  be  on  the  safe 
side  the  minimum  values  are  recommended.  To  deter- 
mine the  size  of  footings  we  first  find  the  weight  of  one  lineal 
foot  of  the  wall  in  tons.  Divide  this  by  the  allowable  pres- 
sure per  square  foot  and  the  result  will  give  the  number  of 
square  feet  per  lineal  foot  required  for  the  footings. 


TABLE  XI 

BEARING     POWER    OF    SOILS 


Kind  of  Material. 


Bearing  power  in  tons 

per  sq.ft. 

Min. 

Max. 

200 

25 

30 

15 

20 

5 

10 

4 

6 

2 

4 

1 

2 

8 

10 

4 

6 

2 

4 

0.5 

1 

Rock,  the  hardest — in  thick  layers,  native  bed . 

Rock,  equal  to  the  best  ashlar  masonry 

Rock,  equal  to  best  brick  masonry 

Rock,  equal  to  poor  brick  masonry 

Clay  on  thick  beds,  always  dry 

Clay  on  thick  beds,  moderately  dry 

Clay,  soft 

Gravel  and  coarse  sand,  well  cemented 

Sand,  compact  and  well  cemented 

Sand,  clean,  dry 

Quicksand,  alluvial  soils,  etc 


Example.     What  size  footings  will  be  required  for  a  12' 
concrete  wall  46'  high  to  be  placed  on  clean  dry  sand? 

46      cu.ft.  per  lineal  foot  of  wall. 
150    wt.  per  cu.ft.  concrete. 


2300 

46 

00  lbs.)  6900 

lbs. 

2  tons) 3. 45 

tons 

,  725  sq.ft.  of  footings  or, 

say,  2  sq.ft.  of  footings. 


Ans. 


LINEAR  MEASURE 


117 


Explanation.  The  ^vall  will  contain  46  cu.ft.  per  foot  of 
length.  The  weight  of  concrete  is  given  as  150  lbs,  per  cubic 
foot.  46X150  =  6900  lbs.  that  the  wall  weighs  per  foot  of 
length.  Dividing  by  2000  gives  3.45  tons.  Allowing  2 
tons  per  square  foot  of  bearing  surface  gives  1.725  sq.ft. 
of  bearing  surface  required  or,  to  be  on  the  safe  side,  we  will 
say  2  sq.ft.  of  bearing  surface  per  lineal  foot  of  wall.  The 
footing  should,  therefore,  be  2  ft.  wide. 

107.  Quantity  of  Materials  Required  per  Cubic  Yard  of 
Concrete.  Concrete  for  building  purposes  is  usually  meas- 
ured in  cubic  yards.  If  the  number  of  cubic  yards  of  con- 
crete required  is  known,  the  quantities  of  cement,  sand  and 
gravel  necessary  may  be  obtained  by  using  the  following 
table.  The  table  is  based  on  one  sack  being  equal  to  one 
cubic  foot  of  cement  and  four  sacks  to  the  barrel. 


TABLE  XII 

QUANTITIES  OF  MATERIALS    PER    CUBIC  YARD  OF  CONCRETE  * 


Mixture. 

Bbls.  Cement. 

Cu.yds.  Sand. 

Cu.yds.  Gravel. 

1  :  U  :3 

1.91 

.42 

.85 

1:2:3 

1.74 

.52 

.77 

1:2:4 

1.51 

.45 

.89 

1  :  2i  :  4| 

1.31 

.48 

.87 

1  :  2|  :  5 

1.24 

.46 

.92 

1:3:5 

1.16 

.52 

.86 

1  :  1 

4.88 

.72 

l:U 

3.87 

.86 

1  :2 

3.21 

.95 

*  Adapted  from  a  similar  table  in  'Concrete,  Plain  and  Reinforced,'' 
by  Taylor  and  Thompson. 

Example.  A  foundation  wall  is  to  be  made  of  concrete 
1  :  2i  :  5  mixture.  The  wall  is  9"  thick,  8'  high  and  96' 
long.     How  much  material  will  be  required? 


118    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


9"=r 

96' 
8' 

4)768 

192 

3 

27)576 

cu.ft.  (21|  cu.yds.  in  walL 

54 

36 

27 

9 

27 

1 
^3 

21.3 

21.3                        21.3 

1.24 

.46                           .92 

852  1  278  426 

4  26  8  52  1917 

21  3  

9.798  19.596 


26.412 


26^  bbls.  cement.         10  cu.yds.  sand.         20  cu.yds.  gravel. 
Ans.  Ans.  Ans. 

Explanation.  First  find  the  contents  of  the  wall  in 
cubic  feet  and  divide  this  by  27  to  get  the  contents  in  cubic 
yards.  We  see  from  the  table  that  a  1  :  2^  :  5  mixture 
requires  1.24  bbls.  of  cement  for  every  cubic  yard  of  con- 
crete. Multiply  21.3  cu.yds.  by  1.24  to  get  26.4112  or, 
say,  265  bbls.  of  cement.  In  a  similar  manner  it  is  found 
that  10  cu.yds.  of  sand  and  20  cu.yds.  of  gravel  are  neces- 
sary. 


LINEAR  MEASURE  119 

Summary   of   Chapter   X 

56.  To  find  the  area  of  a  square  or  rectangle,  multiply 
the  length  by  the  width.     (Sec.  101.) 

57.  To  find  the  length  of  the  circumference  of  a  circle 
when  the  diameter  is  given,  multiply  the  diameter  by  3.1416. 
(Sec.  102.) 

58.  To  find  the  diameter  of  a  circle  when  the  circum- 
ference is  given,  divide  the  circumference  by  3.1416.  (Sec. 
102.) 

59.  To  find  the  volume  of  a  cube  or  rectangular  block, 
multiply  the  length  by  the  width  and  this  again  by  the 
thickness.     (Sec.  103.) 

60.  To  find  the  weight  of  lumber,  multiply  the  number 
of  cubic  feet  in  the  closely  stacked  pile  by  the  weight  per 
cubic  foot.     (Sec.  104.) 

61.  To  find  the  weight  of  any  quantity  of  building 
material,  multiply  the  quantity  in  cubic  feet  by  the  weight 
par  cubic  foot.     (Sec.  105.) 

62.  To  determine  the  size  of  footings,  divide  the  weight 
of  the  wall  in  tons  per  lineal  foot  by  the  bearing  power  of 
the  soil  in  tons  per  square  foot.  The  result  will  be  the 
required  area  of  the  footing  in  square  feet  per  lineal  foot 
of  wall.     (Sec.  106.) 

63.  To  find  the  quantities  of  materials  for  concrete  work, 
multiply  the  number  of  cubic  yards  of  concrete  by  the  value 
for  the  required  mixture  given  in  the  table.     (Sec.  107.) 

PROBLEMS 

143.  How  many  square  feet  in  a  cement  sidewalk  6  ft.  wide 
and  180  ft.  long? 

144.  A  house  is  approximately  22' X  30' X 18'  high.  Allowing 
30  sq.yds  for  gables  and  dormers,  how  many  square  yards  of  paint- 
ing surface  are  there  on  the  house? 


120    ARITHMETIC   FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

145.  If  a  gallon  of  paint  will  cover  100  sq.yds.  two  coats,  how 
many  gallons  of  paint  will  be  required  for  the  above  house? 

146.  If  a  silo  is  18'  across,  how  many  feet  are  there  around  it? 

147.  A  farmer  can  measure  the  distance  around  his  silo  with 
a  tape,  but  he  cannot  measure  across  it.  He  finds  that  the  distance 
around  is  50J'.    Tell  him  the  distance  across  it. 

148.  How  many  cubic  feet  does  a  bin  6  ft.  square  and  8  ft.  high 
contain?     How  many  bushels? 

149.  How  many  barrels  of  water  will  a  cistern  that  is  4  ft.  square 
and  8  ft.  high  hold? 


Fig.  35.— Testing  Tank. 

150.  A  testing  tank  shown  in  Fig.  .35  is  built  of  concrete.  It  is 
6  ft.  deep,  14  ft.  wide  and  25  ft.  long.  How  many  barrels  of  water 
will  it  hold? 

151.  If  water  weighs  62j  pounds  per  cubic  foot,  how  much  will 
the  water  in  the  above-mentioned  tank  weigh? 

152.  How  much  will  a  stick  of  green  white  oak  12"X12"X10' 
weigh?    Add  one-fourth  to  the  dry  weight  to  allow  for  moisture. 

153.  How  much  will  500  pieces  2"X4"X16'  seasoned  Northern 
pine  scantlings  weigh? 

154.  If  the  freight  in  carload  lots  from  St.  Louis  to  Des  Moines 
is  22jii  per  hundred  pounds,  what  will  the  charges  on  a  load  of 
red  oak  which  measures  8'  4"  wide,  32  ft.  long  and  6  ft.  high  when 
closely  piled?    Figure  38  pounds  per  cubic  foot. 


LINEAR  MEASURE 


121 


155.  A  carload  of  common  hard  brick  measures  8'  4"  wide, 
5  ft.  high  and  30  ft.  long.     What  is  the  weight  of  the  load? 

158.  A  certain  concrete  chimney  contains  about  If  cu.j'ds.  cf 
'■•oncrete  for  every  foot  of  height.  How  much  will  a  stack  150  ft, 
high  weigh  in  tons? 

157.  What  must  be  the  size  of 
the  footing  for  the  above-men- 
tioned chimney  if  it  is  to  be 
placed  on  gravel  and  coarse  sand 
well  cemented? 

158.  A  chimney  for  a  residence 
is  35'  liigh  and  is  made  of  com- 
mon hard  brick  of  the  dimensions 
shown  in  Fig.  36.  What  must 
be  the  size  of  the  footings  allow- 
ing J  ton  to  the  square  foot? 

159.  A  concrete  retaining  wall 
is  18"  wide,  8'  high  and  60'  long. 
A  1  :  3  :  5  mixture  is  used.  How 
many  barrels  of  cement  and 
cubic  yards  of  sand  and  gravel 
;vill  be  required? 

160.  The  walls  of  the  testing 
tank   shown    in    Fig.  35  are  9" 

thick  and  the  floor  is  12"  thick.  What  will  be  the  weight  of  the 
tank  when  it  is  full  of  water?  What  will  be  the  pressure  per  square 
foot  of  bearing  surface? 

161.  A  cement  sidewalk  is  6'  wide,  180'  long  and  4"  in  total 
thickness.  The  base  is  a  1  :  3  :  5  mixture  and  the  top  coat,  which 
is  1"  thick,  is  a  1  :  H  mixture.  How  much  cement,  sand  and 
gravel  will  be  required? 


Fig.  36.— Chimney. 


CHAPTER  XI 

POWERS.      ROOTS.       RIGHT    TRIANGLES.     AREA    OF 
CIRCLES.    CAPACITY  OF  TANKS  AND  CISTERNS 

108.  Powers.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  and  neces- 
sary to  multiply  a  number  by  itself  one  or  more  times.  This 
is  performed  just  like  any  ordinary  multiplication,  but  we 
have  a  special  name  for  the  product.  When  a  number 
is  multiplied  by  itself  one  or  more  times  we  call  the  result- 
ing product  the  power  of  the  number.  The  number  which  is 
used  as  a  factor  is  call  the  base. 

Thus  in  the  expression,  2X2  =  4,  we  have  raised  2  to 
second  power.  The  base  is  2  and  4  is  the  power.  Again 
in  the  expression  2X2X2  =  8,  we  have  raised  2  to  the  third 
power.  Instead  of  writing  2X2X2  =  8,  we  may  shorten 
it  by  writing  2^  =  8.  The  small  figure  above  and  to  the  right 
of  2  indicates  how  many  times  2  is  to  be  used  as  a  factor. 

109.  Exponents.  The  exponent  of  a  power  is  a  small 
figure  placed  above  and  to  the  right  of  the  base  to  indicate 
how  many  times  it  is  to  be  used  as  a  factor  to  get  the  power. 
The  second  power  of  a  number  is  called  the  square  of  the 
number.  The  third  power  of  a  number  is  called  the  cube 
of  that  number.  The  powers  above  the  third  have  no 
special  names.  They  are  simply  called  the  fourth  power, 
the  eighth  power,  etc.  The  process  of  finding  the  powers 
of  numbers  is  called  involution. 

122 


POWERS  123 

Example.     Find  the  square  of  25. 

25 
25 

125 

50 

625 
252  =  625  Ans. 

Explanation.    To  find  the  square  of  a  number  we  must 
use  it  twice  as  a  factor.     25  times  25  is  625. 
Example.    Raise  9  to  the  fifth  power. 

9 
9 

81 
9 

729 
9 

6561 
9 

59049 
95  =  59049  Ans. 

Explanation.  To  raise  9  to  the  fifth  power  means  that 
we  must  use  9  as  a  factor  five  times. 

To  raise  a  number  to  a  given  power  we  must  use  it  as  a 
factor  as  many  times  as  indicated  by  the  exponent. 

110.  Powers  of  Common  Fractions.  To  raise  a  common 
fraction  to  a  given  power  we  raise  the  numerator  to  the 


124    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

required  power  for  the  new   numerator  and    raise  the  de- 
nominator to  the  required  power  for  the  new  denominator. 
Example.    Find  the  value  of  (f)^. 

tX|  =  -5'V  Am. 

Explanation.  To  raise  a  fraction  to  the  second  power 
we  multiply  it  by  itself.  This  is  in  effect  multiplying  the 
two  numerators  together  3X3,  to  get  9  for  the  numerator 
of  the  power  and  multiplying  the  denominators  together, 
5X5,  to  get  25  for  the  denominator  of  the  power. 

111.  Roots.  Finding  the  root  of  a  number  is  just  the 
reverse  of  finding  its  power.  If  we  separate  9  into  its  two 
factors  3X3,  the  factor  3  is  said  to  be  the  square  root  of  9. 
In  a  similar  manner,  if  we  separate  the  number  125  into 
its  three  factors  5X5X5,  the  factor  5  is  said  to  be  the  cube 
root  of  125. 

The  square  root  of  a  number  is  one  of  the  two  equal 
factors  into  which  the  number  may  be  separated.  The 
cube  root  is  one  of  the  three  equal  factors  into  which  a 
number  may  be  separated.  The  fourth  root  is  one  of  the 
four  equal  factors,  and  so  on  for  the  higher  roots.  To  indi- 
cate that  a  root  is  to  be  taken  of  a  number  we  use  a  sign 
y/~  called  the  radical  sign.  A  small  figure  placed  in  the 
opening  of  the  sign  indicates  what  root  is  to  be  extracted. 
This  figure  is  called  the  index  of  the  root.  For  example 
'V^27  indicates  the  cube  root  of  27.  The  small  figure  3  is 
the  index  of  the  root.  When  the  square  root  is  intended 
the  index  figure  is  omitted,  since  it  is  understood.  The 
operation  of  finding  the  root  of  a  given  quantity  is  called 
evolution. 

Roots  are  of  two  kinds.  Those  which  may  be  extracted 
without  a  remainder  are  called  perfect  roots.  Those  which 
have  a  remainder  are  imperfect  roots.      It  is  impossible  to 


POWERS  125 

find  the  exact  value  of  an  imperfect  root,  but  it  may  be  found 
correctly  to  any  required  number  of  decimal  places.  Three 
decimal  places  are  usually  sufficient. 

112.  Square  Root.  If  we  square  the  numbers  1,  2,  3, 
4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  the  squares  of  these  numbers  will  be  1,  4,  9,  16, 
25,  36,  49,  64  and  81.  Thus  1  is  the  square  root  of  1,  2  is  the 
square  root  of  4,  3  is  the  square  root  of  9,  4  of  16  and  so  on. 
It  is  worth  while  to  remember  these  figures  and  to  be  able 
to  recognize  them  when  you  see  them.  The  square  root  of 
numbers  above  one  hundred  are  not  so  easy  to  determine. 
To  do  this  we  must  go  through  a  somewhat  complicated 
process. 

Example.    Find  Vl  19025. 

Vll'90'25  ( 345  Ans. 

9 
64        1290 
|2_56 
3425 
3425 


685 


Explanation.  First  point  off  the  number  into  periods 
of  two  figures  each  beginning  at  the  right  and  placing  a 
mark  between  them. 

The  next  step  is  to  find  the  largest  perfect  square  which  ■\<^,^c 
is  equal  to  or  less  than  the  first  period  at  the  right.  This  ^ '  '^ 
may  readily  be  determined  by  inspection.  In  this  case 
the  perfect  square  is  9  and  the  root  of  the  square  is  3.  Put 
the  9  under  the  first  period,  11,  and  put  its  square  root,  3, 
to  the  right  as  the  first  figure  in  the  root  or  answer.  Now 
subtract  9  from  11  to  get  2.  Bring  down  the  next  period, 
90,  and  write  it  with  this  remainder  to  get  290. 

Multiply  the  first  figure  of  the  root,  which  is  3,  by  2  and 
write  the  product,  6,  at  the  left  of  290  as  a  trial  divisor. 


126    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Divide  the  first  two  figures  of  the  number  290,  which  are  29, 
by  this  6  and  write  the  result  as  the  next  figure  of  the  root. 
Six  will  go  into  29  four  times  and  so  we  write  4  as  the  second 
figure  of  the  root  to  the  right  of  the  figure  6  to  get  64  as  the 
first  divisor. 

Multiply  the  trial  divisor,  64,  by  4,  the  second  figure  of 
the  root,  and  subtract  the  product,  256,  from  290.  The 
remainder  is  34.     Bring  down  the  next  period  to  get  3425. 

Multiply  the  first  two  figures  of  the  root  as  found,  34, 
by  2  and  write  the  product,  68,  to  the  left  of  the  number 
3425.  Using  the  first  three  figures,  342,  find  how  many  times 
68,  the  second  trial  divisor,  is  contained  into  342.  It  is  con- 
tained 5  times.  Write  5  as  the  third  figure  in  the  root.  Also 
write  5  to  the  right  of  the  68  to  get  685  as  the  second  divisor. 
685  is  contained  into  3425  five  times  without  a  remainder. 
The  square  root  of  the  number  119,025,  is,  therefore,  345. 

The  process  of  finding  the  square  root  of  a  number 
which  is  not  a  perfect  square  is  similar  to  that  just  described. 
The  root  of  such  a  number  must  include  a  decimal,  A 
decimal  point  and  ciphers  must,  therefore,  be  written  to 
the  right  of  the  number.  We  add  as  many  pairs  of  ciphers 
as  there  are  to  be  decimal  places  in  the  root. 

Example.    Find  V596. 

V5'96.00'00'00  (  24.413  Ans. 

4 


44 

484 

4881 

48823 


196 
176 


2000 
1936 


6400 

4881 


151900 
146469 


POWERS  127 

Explanation.  This  is  not  a  perfect  square;  that  is  to 
say  there  is  no  number  which,  multipHed  by  itself,  will  give 
596. 

To  extract  the  root  we  proceed  to  point  off  the  number 
into  periods  as  before  explained.  Since  the  root  is  to  con- 
tain a  decimal  we  must  place  a  decimal  point  at  the  right 
of  the  number  and  add  as  many  pairs  of  ciphers  as  there 
are  to  be  decimal  places  in  the  root.  We  will  carry  the 
result  to  three  decimal  places  and,  therefore,  we  will  add 
three  pairs  of  ciphers  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point. 
In  all  other  respects  the  solution  is  similar  to  the  example 
given  above. 

113.  Directions  for  Extracting  Square  Root.  Begin  at 
the  decimal  point  and  separate  the  number  into  periods  of 
two  figures  each,  going  both  to  the  right  and  to  the  left 
of  the  decimal  point.  If  there  is  no  decimal  point  begin 
with  the  figure  farthest  to  the  right.  Place  a  mark  between 
these  periods. 

Find  the  largest  whole  number  whose  square  will  be  con- 
tained in  the  first  left-hand  period.  Write  this  number  as 
the  first  figure  of  the  root.  Subtract  the  square  of  this 
number  from  the  first  period  and  annex  the  second  period 
to  the  remainder  thus  found. 

Multiply  the  part  of  the  root  already  found  by  2,  and 
write  the  result  at  the  left  of  the  first  remainder.  This 
gives  the  first  trial  divisor.  Divide  that  portion  of  the 
dividend  except  the  last  figure  by  the  trial  divisor,  and  write 
the  result  as  the  second  figure  of  the  root.  Annex  this 
figure  to  the  right  of  the  trial  divisor  to  get  the  first  divisor. 
Perform  the  division  and  obtain  the  remainder,  which 
together  with  the  next  period  forms  the  next  dividend. 

Repeat  the  process  just  described  above  until  the  last 
period  of  the  number  is  used  and  to  the  last  figure  of  the 


128    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

root  obtained.  If  more  decimal  places  are  required  in  the 
root  add  as  many  pairs  of  ciphers  as  there  are  decimal  places 
desired.  If  the  last  period  of  a  decimal  should  contain  but 
one  figure,  add  one  cipher  to  complete  the  period. 

If  at  any  time  the  trial  divisor  will  not  be  contained  in 
the  dividend,  write  a  cipher  as  the  next  figure  of  the  root, 
bringing  down  another  period  and  proceed. 

There  should  be  as  many  decimal  places  in  the  root  as 
there  are  periods  to  the  right  of  the  decimal  point  in  the 
number  of  which  the  root  is  to  be  extracted. 

114.  Proof  of  Square  Root.  To  prove  a  root  multiply 
it  by  itself  to  get  the  square.  If  the  number  is  not  a  perfect 
square,  the  proof  will  not  give  the  exact  square,  but  it  will 
be  very  close. 

Example.  Prove  the  root  in  the  last  example  given 
above. 

24.413 

24.413 


73239 

24413 

9 

7652 

97 

652 

488 

26 

595.994569 

Ans» 

Explanation.  Multiplying  the  root  by  itself  to  get  the 
square  we  get  very  nearly  596.  Since  this  is  not  a  perfect 
square  the  proof  will  never  be  exact. 

116.  Cube  Root.  To  find  the  cube  root  of  a  number 
means  to  find  a  factor  which  when  used  three  times  will 
give  the  number.    Thus  2  is  the  cube  root  of  8  because 


POWERS  129 

2X2X2  =  8.     The  cube  root  of  27  is  3,  of  64  is  4,  of  125  is 
5,  etc. 

To  find  the  cube  root  of  larger  numbers  we  may  perform 
an  operation  similar  to  the  one  for  square  root.  This  is 
somewhat  more  complicated  than  the  method  of  finding  the 
square  root.  Instead  of  working  it  out  we  usually  make 
use  of  a  table  of  cubes  or  cube  roots  or  solve  the  problem 
by  means  of  logarithms.  The  carpenter  has  httle  occasion 
to  find  the  cube  root  and  for  that  reason  the  process  is 
omitted  from  these  lessons. 

116.  Practical  Applications.  The  practical  applications 
of  the  processes  of  involution  and  evolution  which  occur 
in  the  daily  work  of  the  carpenter  have  to  do  mostly  with 
the  properties  of  regular  geometric  figures. 

117.  The  Side  of  a  Square.  If  the  area  of  a  square 
is  given  we  can  find  the  length  of  the  side  by  extracting 
the  square  root  of  the  area.  This  is  self-evident,  because 
we  find  the  area  by  squaring  the  length  of  the  side  and  to 
find  the  side  we  would  naturally  expect  to  extract  the  square 
root  of  the  area. 

Example.  A  builder  has  sufficient  material  to  lay  1250 
sq.ft.  of  floor.  What  is  the  length  of  the  side  of  the  largest 
square  that  can  be  covered? 

Vl2'  50  (  35.3  ft.  Ans. 

65       350 

325 

703 


2500 
2109 


Explanation.  Extracting  the  square  root  of  1250  gives 
35.3  approximately.  This  is  the  length  in  feet  of  the  side 
of  the  square  which  can  be  covered  by  the  material. 


130    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


118.  The  Right  Triangle.    A  triangle  is  a  figure  which 

has  three  straight  sides  and  three  angles.     A  right  triangle 

is  a  triangle  one  of  whose  angles  is  a  right 

angle.     Fig.  37  represents  a  right  triangle. 

The  side  marked  a  is  called  the  altitude; 

the  side  marked  h  is  called  the  base  and 

the  side  marked  c,  which  is  the  longest  side, 

is    called    the  hj^otenuse.     To   find    the 

length  of  the  hypotenuse  when  the  length 

of  the  altitude  and  base  are  known,  we 

may  square  the  value  of  the  length  of  the 

base  and  the  length  of   the   altitude,  add 

A  Right  Triangle,   tiiem  together  and  extract  the  square  root 

of  this  sum. 

Example.     What  is  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a 

right  triangle  whose  base  is  18"  and  whose  altitude  is  12"  ? 


Fig.  37. 


18 

X 

18 

12 

X 

12 

144 

24 

18 

1|2 

324 

144 

V4'68'.00'00(21.63" 

4 

144 
324 

468 


Arts. 


41 

426 

4323 

68 
41 

2700 

2556 
14400 
12969 

POWERS 


131 


Explanation.     We  square  the  value 
get  324  and  the  value  of  the  altitude,  12" 
these  two  together  gives  468  for  their 
root  of  468  is  21.63.     The  hypotenuse 
therefore,  21.63"  long. 

We  may  also  find  the  length  of  the 
angled  triangle  if  we  know  the  length 
and  base  by  turning  this  rule  around. 


of  the  base  18"  to 

to  get  144.    Adding 

sum.     The  square 

of  the  triangle  is, 

altitude  of  a  right- 
of  the  hypotenuse 
The  altitude  of  a 


Fir..  38. 


right  triangle  is  equal  to  the  square  root  of  the  difference 
of  the  squares  of  the  hypotenuse  and  the  base.  We  may 
also  say  that  the  base  is  equal  to  the  square  root  of  the 
difference  of  the  squares  of  the  hypotenuse  and  the  alti- 
tude. 

Example.  In  Fig.  38  the  length  of  the  rafter  from  the 
ridge  center  to  the  plate  is  14.42  ft.  and  one-half  the  span 
of  the  roof  is  12  ft.  What  is  the  vertical  distance  from  the 
plate  to  the  ridge? 


132    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


14.42 

12 

14.42 

X 

12 

2884 
5  768 
57  68 

24 
12 

144  2 

=  208 

144 

207.9364= 

208 

144 

64 

V64  =  8' 

• 

Ans. 

Explanation.  We  first  find  the  square  of  the  hypote- 
nuse, which  is  208,  very  nearly,  and  then  the  square  of  the 
base,  which  is  144.  The  difference  between  them  is  64. 
The  square  root  of  this  difference  is  8.  The  required  dis- 
tance is,  therefore,  8  ft. 

119.  The  Circle.  The  processes  of  involution  and  evo- 
lution are  quite  common  in  connection  with  calculations 
of  the  circle.  If  we  wish  to  find  the  number  of  square 
inches  in  a  circle,  for  example,  we  square  the  radius  in 
inches  and  multiply  this  result  by  ir  or  3.1416.  Also  if  we 
wish  to  find  the  radius  of  a  circle  when  the  area  is  given 
we  divide  the  area  by  3.1416  and  extract  the  square  root 
of  this  quotient. 

Example.  Find  the  area  of  a  circle  in  square  inches,  the 
radius  of  which  is  30". 

302  =  900 

900X3.1416  =  2827.44  sq.ins.  Ans. 


POWERS  133 

Explanation.  Multiplying  30  by  itself  to  get  its  square 
gives  900  and  multiplying  this  by  ir  or  3.1416  gives  2827.44 
sq.in.  in  the  circle. 

Example.  What  is  the  radius  of  a  circle  whose  area  is 
1017.87  sq.  in.? 

3.1416)1017.8700(324 

942  48 


75  390 
62  832 

12  5580 
12  5664 

V3'24 
1 

28   224 
224 

(18" 

Ans. 


Explanation.  This  problem  is  just  the  reverse  of  the 
one  given  above.  Divide  1017.87  by  tt  to  get  324,  nearly. 
Extract  the  square  root  of  324  to  get  18",  which  is  the 
required  radius. 

If  we  work  with  the  diameter  instead  of  the  radius  we 
use  the  value  .7854  in  place  of  3.1416.  The  radius  of  a 
circle  is  one-half  the  diameter;  therefore  the  square  of  the 
diameter  will  be  four  times  the  square  of  the  radius.  This 
accounts  for  the  use  of  the  value  .7854  instead  of  3.1416 
when  using  the  diameter.     .7854  =  J  of  3.1416. 

120.  Capacities  of  Circular  Tanks  and  Cisterns.  The 
builder  often  finds  it  necessary  to  determine  the  number  of 
gallons  or  barrels  that  a  cistern  will  hold.  This  information 
may  usually  be  found  in  tables,  but  it  is  convenient  to  kno\»' 


134    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

how  to  figure  it  so  that  if  you  do  not  have  a  table  at  hand 
you  can  figure  it  out  for  yourself. 

Find  the  area  of  the  bottom  of  the  tank  in  square  feet 
and  multiply  this  by  the  height  in  feet.  This  product  gives 
the  contents  in  cubic  feet.  There  are  7^  gallons  of  water 
to  every  cubic  foot,  so,  in  order  to  get  the  contents  in  gallons, 
we  multiply  the  total  cubic  feet  by  7^.  There  are  31^ 
gallons  to  a  barrel;  therefore,  to  get  the  capacity  in  barrels 
we  divide  the  total  number  of  gallons  by  31^.  Multipl5dng 
by  7^  and  dividing  by  31^  is  the  same  as  multipljdng  by 
.238,  because  7^ -i- 31^  =  .238.  Hence  to  find  the  capacity 
in  barrels  we  may  multiply  the  contents  in  cubic  feet  by  238. 

Example:  Find  the  number  of  gallons  a  circular  tank 
will  contain  if  the  diameter  is  6  ft.  and  the  height  is  10  ft. 

62  =  36 

36 

.7854 


144 
180 
2  88 
25  2 

28.2744 

28.27 
10 

sq.ft. 

282.70 

282.7 
7.5 

cu.ft. 

141  35 
1978  9 

21?0. 25  =  21201  gallons.  Ans. 


POWERS  135 

Explanation.  The  square  of  the  diameter  6  is  36  and 
the  product  of  this  multiplied  by  .7854  gives  28.27  sq.ft. 
in  the  bottom  of  the  cistern.  It  is  10  ft.  high  and  10  times 
28.27  gives  282.7  cu.ft.  as  the  contents  of  the  cistern.  Mul- 
tiplying this  by  7.5  gives  2120j  gallons  as  the  capacity  of 
the  cistern. 

Example.     How  many  barrels  will  this  tank  contain? 

31.5)  2120.25  (67.3  barrels.  Ans. 

1890 


2302 
2205 

975 
945 


Explanation.  We  have  just  figured  the  number  of 
gallons  the  tank  will  contain.  There  are  31 1  gallons  to 
the  barrel.  If  we  divide  the  number  of  gallons  2120.25 
by  31.5  the  result,  67.3,  will  give  the  answer  in  barrels. 

Example.  How  many  barrels  will  a  cistern  hold  the 
cubic  contents  of  which  is  282.7  cu.ft.? 

282.7     cu.ft. 
.238 


2  2616 

8  481 

56  54 

67.2826  =  67.3  barrels.  Ans. 

Explanation.    This  example  is  used  to  show  that  if  we 
multiply  the  cubic  contents  of  a  cistern  expressed  in  cubic 


136    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARrENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

feet  by  .238  we  will  get  the  same  result  approximately  as 
to  multiply  by  7 5  and  divide  by  31 5.  The  value  given  here, 
282.7  cu.ft.,  is  the  same  as  that  found  in  the  second  example 
above.  Multiplying  this  by  .238  gives  67.2826  barrels,  which 
is  very  nearly  67.3  barrels  as  found  above. 


POWERS  137 


Summary  of  Chapter  XI 

64.  To  find  the  power  of  a  number,  use  it  as  many  times 
as  a  factor  as  is  indicated  by  its  exponent:  that  is,  to  find 
the  second  power  use  the  number  twice  as  a  factor;  to  find 
the  third  power  use  the  number  three  times  as  a  factor, 
(Sec.  109.) 

65.  To  raise  a  fraction  to  a  given  power,  raise  the  nu- 
merator to  the  required  power  and  also  the  denominator. 
(Sec.  110.) 

66.  To  find  the  square  root  of  a  number,  follow  the 
explicit  directions  given  in  Sec.  113. 

67.  To  prove  a  square  root,  multiply  the  root  by  itself 
to  get  the  square.     (Sec.  114.) 

68.  To  find  the  side  of  a  square  when  its  area  is  given, 
find  the  square  root  of  the  area.  The  result  will  be  the 
length  of  the  side  of  the  square.     (Sec.  117.) 

69.  To  find  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a  right 
triangle  when  the  base  and  the  altitude  are  given,  square 
the  base  and  the  altitude  and  extract  the  square  root  of 
their  sum.     (Sec.  118.) 

70.  To  find  the  length  of  the  altitude  of  a  right  triangle, 
square  both  the  hypotenuse  and  the  base  and  extract  the 
square  root  of  their  difference.     (Sec.  118.) 

71.  To  find  the  length  of  the  base  of  a  right  triangle, 
square  the  hypotenuse  and  altitude  and  extract  the  square 
root  of  their  difference.     (Sec.  118.) 

72.  To  find  the  area  of  a  circle,  square  the  radius  and 
multiply  by  3.1416  or  square  the  diameter  and  multiply 
by  .7854.     (Sec.  119.) 

73.  To  find  the  diameter  of  a  circle  when  the  area  is 
given,  divide  the  area  by  .7854  and  extract  the  square  root 


138    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

of  the  quotient.     If  the  radius  is  wanted,  divide  by  3.1416 
and  extract  the  square  root  of  the  quotient.     (Sec.  119.) 

74.  To  determine  the  contents  of  a  circular  tank  in 
gallons,  find  the  area  of  the  bottom  in  square  feet,  multiply 
by  the  height  of  the  tank  in  feet  and  multiply  this  by 
7i     (Sec.  120.) 

75.  To  find  the  capacity  of  a  circular  tank  in  barrels, 
multiply  the  contents  in  cubic  feet  by  .238.     (Sec.  120.) 


Fig.  39. — Roof  for  a  Leau-to. 

PROBLEMS 

162.  Find  the  value  of  the  following: 


(o)     V178084                          422 

Ans 

(b)     V198.1369                  14.070 

Ans 

(c)     V.  571384                      .7559 

Ans 

163.  Find  the  value  of  the  following: 

(a)     14»                         (c)    9^X3.1416 

(6)     286*                        (rf)    (f)^ 

POWERS 


139 


164.  A  pergon  standing  requires  a  space  20"X20".  What  are 
the  dimensions  of  a  square  platform  large  enough  to  hold  75  people, 
allowing  1  ft.  extra  all  around  the  edge? 

165.  What  will  be  the  length  of  a  brace  cut  for  6  ft.  run  and 
6  ft.  rise? 

166.  Fig.  39  shows  a  roof  for  a  lean-to.  The  run  is  13  ft.  and 
the  rise  is  6  ft.  Find  the  necessary  length  of  a  2X4  rafter  allowing 
12"  for  overhang  and  6"  for  trimming.  What  length  of  2X4 
would  you  order? 


Fig.  40. — Scissors  Roof  Truss. 


167.  What  will  be  the  length  of  a  rafter  for  12  ft.  run  and  10 
ft.  rise  allowing  about  4"  for  trimming  and  2  ft.  for  overhang? 

168.  Fig.  40  shows  a  scissors  roof  truss  and  the  diagram  to  the 
right  gives  the  dimensions.  What  is  the  length  of  the  main  rafter 
A  and  what  is  the  length  of  the  strut  B? 

169.  Fig.  41  shows  the  stringer  for  a  flight  of  stairs.  What  is 
the  length  of  the  stringer? 

170.  Fig.  42  shows  a  queen-post  truss  and  the  diagram  to  the 
right  gives  the  dimensions  on  the  center  lines.  Find  the  missing 
dimensions  which  are  indicated  by  letters. 

171.  A  circular  platform  has  an  area  of  240^  sq.ft.  What  is 
its  diameter? 

172.  What  is  the  area  in  square  inches  of  a  circle  two  feet  in 
diameter? 


140    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

173.  A  circular  window  opening  is  54"  in  diameter.    How 
many  square  feet  of  glass  surface  does  it  contain? 

174.  What  is  the  capacity  of  a  circular  cistern  5  ft.  in  diameter 
and  8  ft.  deep?    Give  the  answer  in  barrels. 


Fig.  41. — Stringer  for  a  Flight  of  Stairs. 

175.  A  hot- water  tank  for  an  apartment  house  is  said  to  hold 
100  gallons.  It  is  22"  in  diameter  and  60"  high.  Does  it  hold 
100  gallons  as  stated?    If  not,  what  is  its  capacity? 


Fig.  42. — Queen-post  Truss. 


176.  A  circular  cistern  is  5'  6"  in  diameter  and  10'  deep.  How 
large  must  a  square  cistern  be  built  of  the  .same  height  to  contain 
the  same  amount  of  water?  Why  are  cisterns  usually  built  round 
instead  of  square? 


POWERS  141 

177.  A  40-gallon  tank  is  18"  in  diameter.  How  high  must 
it  be? 

178.  A  concrete  silo  is  16  ft.  in  diameter  and  30  ft.  high.  What 
is  its  capacity  in  cubic  feet? 

179.  Silage  weighs  about  40  lbs.  per  cubic  foot.  How  many 
tons  of  silage  will  the  above  silo  hold? 

180.  What  must  be  the  height  of  a  circular  silo  to  hold  10,000 
cu.ft.  if  its  diameter  is  18  ft.? 

181.  What  must  be  the  diameter  of  a  drain  tile  into  which  one 
4"  and  one  6"  tile  empty?  The  large  tile  must  have  an  area 
equivalent  to  the  two  small  ones. 


CHAPTER  XII 

LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS.     FLOORING. 
SHINGLES. 

121.  Lumber  Trade  Customs.  Our  methods  of  grading 
and  measuring  lumber  are  the  result  of  custom  and  these 
customs  vary  somewhat  in  different  localities.  The  sizing 
and  grading  of  lumber  is  regulated  by  the  various  lumber 
manufacturers'  associations.  Some  of  the  terms  and  cus- 
toms are  of  such  wide  usage  that  they  may  be  explained  here. 

122.  Ltmiber  Terms.  The  term  timber  is  generally 
applied  to  sticks  more  than  4"  in  thickness  the  smaller  way, 
and  the  term  liunber  is  applied  to  sticks  less  than  4"  in 
thickness.  A  plank  is  a  piece  from  1|"  to  4"  thick;  while 
a  board  is  a  piece  less  than  1^"  in  thickness.  A  scantling 
is  a  piece  of  lumber  4"X6"  in  size  or  less.  The  term  is 
most  frequently  applied  to  a  2"  X4"  stick,  though  it  may 
refer  to  a  4"X4"  or  2"X6"  stick  equally  well. 

Rough  stock  means  lumber  that  is  sawn  so  as  to  admit 
of  dressing  but  that  is  not  dressed.  Dressed  stock  means 
lumber  that  has  been  planed  or  surfaced  on  one  or  more 
sides.  S.  1  S  is  an  abbreviation  for  "  surfaced  on  one  side." 
S.  2  S.  means  "  surfaced  on  two  sides,"  S.  1  S.  1  E.  means 
"  surfaced  on  one  side  and  one  edge  "  and  S.  4  S.  means 
"  surfaced  on  four  sides." 

Dimension  Lumber  is  usually  dressed  on  one  side  and 
one  edge  in  order  to  size  it.    Finishing  lumber  is  lumbei 

142 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


143 


intended  for  interior  or  exterior  finishing.     It  is  dressed 
on  one  or  both  sides  or  as  directed. 

123.  Allowance  for  Dressing.     In  planing  or  dressing  a 
board  about  h"  is  removed  for  each  surface  dressed.     Lumber 


2-Door8 


Fig.  43. — Garage. 


which  has  not  been  thoroughly  dried  and  seasoned  before 
being  dressed  will  shrink  sufficiently  to  cause  considerable 
reduction  in  the  width  of  a  board.  A  board  which  is  nom- 
inally one  inch  in  thickness  which  has  been  dressed  on  one 
or  both  sides  will  measure  actually  about  xi"  in  thickness. 
If  lumber  is  wanted  to  full  dimensions  after  it  is  dressed, 


144    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

it  is  necessary  to  specify  that  the  dimensions  must  be  full 
size  after  the  stock  is  dressed.  Dressed  stock  is  measured 
strip  count;  that  is,  at  the  full  size  of  the  rough  material 
used  to  manufacture  the  piece. 


Fig.  44. — Floor  Plan  of  a  Small  Cottage. 


124.  Width  of  Lumber.  Boards  run  in  multiples  of  one 
inch  in  width.  Owing  to  the  processes  used  in  manufacture 
there  may  be  considerable  actual  variation  from  the  rule. 
If  a  board  is  more  than  j"  scant  on  the  8"  width  or  of  less 
width  it  is  counted  in  the  next  lower  width.  A  board  may 
be  I"  scant  on  the  9"  or  10"  widths  or  5"  scant  on  the  11" 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


145 


or  12"  widths  or  wider.  If  the  boards  of  any  specified 
nominal  width  do  not  meet  these  requirements  they  are 
counted  in  the  next  lower  width. 


PLAN 


END  ELEVATION 

Fig.  45.— Plan  of  Roof. 

125.  Standard  Lengths.  Rough  stock  or  finish  lumber 
is  usually  cut  in  multiples  of  two  feet  in  length.  Standard 
lengths  for  finishing  lumber  are  usually  in  multiples  of  one 
foot. 

126.  Sizes  of  Common  Boards.    Boards  of  1"  nominal 


146    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


size  S.  1  S.  or  S.  2  S.  as  previously  explained,  are  dressed  to 
\l"  thick;  ly  nominal  size  S.  1  S.  or  S.  2  S.  are  dressed 
to  liV";    H"  nominal  size  S.  1  S,  or  S.  2  S.  are  dressed  to 

127.  Sizes  of  Dimension  Lumber.  The  sizes  of  dressed 
scantling  and  dimension  lumber  are  given  in  the  following 
table: 


li^zSShipUp 
I'x  «-3'o.c. 

z  1* braces 


iSfUlong 


SECTION  O^ 
1  Vt"/.  S'SHIP  LAP 


V 

ELEVATION 

Fig.  46. — Forms  for  Concrete. 

TABLE  XIII 
SIZES   OF  DIMENSION  LUMBBB 


R 


Nominal  Size. 

Drcssod. 

Actual  Size. 

2X4 

2X6 

2X8 

2X10 

2X12 

S.  1  S.  1  E. 
S.  1  S.  1  E. 
S.  1  S.  1  E. 
S.  1  S.  1  E. 
S.  1  S.  1  E. 

if"x.3r 

li"X5|" 

ii"x7r' 

1|"X9|" 

irxiu" 

If  the  lumber  is  dressed  on  all  four  sides,  the  pieces  may 
be  I"  less  in  thickness  and  width  than  S.  1  S.  1  E. 

128.  Sizes  of  Dressed  Finishing  Ltunber.  Finish  lum- 
ber is  dressed  to  the  same  thickness  that  common  boards 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


147 


are.  Thus,  1"  nominal  size  S.  1  S.  or  S.  2  S.  is  dressed  to 
if"  in  thickness;  U"  S.  1  S.  or  S.  2  S.  is  dressed  to  1^"  in 
thickness;  U"  S.  1  S.  or  S.  2  S.  is  dressed  to  1  j^"  in  thick- 
ness. Stock  which  is  nominally  4"  in  width  is  dressed  to 
3^"  when  finished.  Other  widths  are  also  dressed  to  Y' 
less  than  nominal  widths. 

129.  Flooring.     To  allow  for  the   tongue   and   groove 
matching  1"X3",  1"X4"  and  1"X6" 
thick  and  show  2^",  3i"  and  5i"  face. 


flooring  will  run  jf" 


'Ceiling  line 


Drawers 


^Floor  line 
ELEVATION 


SECTION 


Fig.  47. — Cupboard. 


130.  Sizes  of  Framing  Lumber.  Joists  are  reduced  j" 
on  the  side  and  |"  on  the  edge  if  surfaced  on  one  side  and 
one  edge  when  green  and  unseasoned.  If  they  are  surfaced 
on  four  sides,  they  are  reduced  |"  for  each  side  surfaced. 
When  rough  and  green,  they  should  not  be  more  than 
j"  scant  in  width  or  thickness.  Joists  may  be  had  in 
the  following  nominal  sizes:  2",  2^"  and  3"X10",  12" 
and  14". 

131.  Measurement  of  Lumber.  The  unit  of  measure- 
ment of  lumber  is  the  board  foot.     The  board  foot  is  the 


148    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

measure  of  a  board  an  inch  thick  and  a  foot  square.  Boards 
less  than  one  inch  thick  are  counted  the  same  as  though 
they  were  one  inch  thick.  If  the  boards  are  more  than  an 
inch  in  thickness  they  are  counted  at  their  nominal  size. 
Finish  and  dimension  lumber  is  counted  at  the  size  neces- 
sary to  manufacture  the  piece  as  previously  explained. 

For  boards  one  inch  or  less  in  thickness  and  of  various 
widths  the  following  table  gives  a  convenient  method  of 
figuring  board  feet. 

TABLE  XIV 

BOARD    FEET    IN    LUMBER    OF    DIFFERENT    WIDTHS 

Boards  3"  wide  will  contain  i  as  many  board  feet  as  they  are  ft.  long. 

4"  J 

6"  J 

9"  f 

12"  wide  contain  as  many  board  ft.  as  they  are  ft.  long. 
15"  wide  will  contain  1 J  as  many  board  ft.  as  they  are  ft.  long. 
16"  U 

In  general  the  following  rule  may  be  used  for  finding 
the  board  measure  of  any  board,  plank  or  timber.  Multi- 
ply the  width  in  feet  by  the  length  in  feet  by  the  thickness  in 
inches.  If  the  width  is  given  in  inches,  divide  by  12  to  gel 
it  in  feet. 

Example.  How  many  board  feet  are  there  in  a  scant- 
ling 2"  X4"X  16  ft.? 

2><|><i^  =  ^  =  lof  f t .  B.M.  Ans. 

3 

Explanation.  To  change  the  width  to  feet  we  must 
divide  the  4"  by  12  but  this  may  be  done  by  expressing  the 
operation  and  canceling.  Thus  4  divided  by  12  is  \  and 
the  result  is  ^  or  10|  ft.  B.M. 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


149 


132.  Counting  Lumber.  In  the  yard,  at  the  car  or  on 
the  dock,  the  tallyman  is  expected  to  count  the  lumber.  His 
record  is  kept  in  a  small  book  called  the  tally  book.    The 


J2 
O 


tally  is  recorded  in  different  ways,  depending  upon  the  kind 
of  material.  Framing  lumber  and  other  lumber  of  specified 
lengths  is  generally  tallied  by  the  piece.     Shiplap,  sheathing, 


150    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

ceiling  and  flooring  is  generally  tied  in  bundles  containing 
a  certain  number  of  feet  B.M.  and  tallied  by  bundles. 

133.  Flooring.  In  figuring  quantities  of  lumber  required 
to  cover  surfaces,  we  must  allow  for  matching  and  waste. 
A  1"X4"  flooring  board  will  show  only  3j"  face.  We  must, 
therefore,  allow  sufficient  quantity  to  make  up  for  this 
difference.  It  is  necessary  to  add  about  20%  in  board 
measure  to  the  surface  measure  for  this  purpose  and  from 
5%  to  10%  for  waste. 

Example.  How  many  board  feet  of  1"X4"  flooring  will 
be  required  to  lay  a  floor  28  ft.  wide  by  62  ft.  long,  allowing 
25%  for  matching  and  waste? 

62' 
28' 

496 
124 


1736  sq.ft. 
.25  % 


86  80 
347  2 


434.00    Add. 
1736 


2170  ft.  B.M.  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  number  of  square  feet  floor  surface 
is  found  by  multiplying  the  length  62  ft.  by  the  width  28  ft. 
to  get  1736  sq.ft.  25%  of  this  is  434  sq.ft.  which  when 
added  to  the  actual  area  gives  2170  ft.  B.M.  of  flooring 
required. 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


151 


134.  Shingles.  Shingles  are  figured  by  the  thousand. 
A  thousand  common  shingles  are  equal  to  1000  shingles  4" 
wide.  They  are  put  up  in  bundles  of  different  quantities 
according  to  the  thickness  of  the  butts.  Shingles  18"  long 
having  5  butts  to  2^'  are  packed  five  bundles  to  the  thou- 
sand. Shingles  16"  and  18"  having  5  butts  to  2"  are  packed 
four  bundles  to  the  thousand. 


W 


-58}i- 


A- 


-40— — *^5- 


2  X  8'  4^ 

88" 


ELEVATION 

Fig.  49.— Work  Bench. 


-18'  'I  I 


END  VIEW 


1 X 10  i 


The  common  unit  for  measuring  roof  surface  is  the 
square.  A  square  is  a  surface  containing  100  sq.ft.,  or 
it  is  equivalent  to  a  surface  10  feet  square. 

Shingles  are  laid  so  that  from  4"  to  5"  of  the  butts  are 
exposed  to  the  weather.  The  table  given  below  indicates 
the  number  of  shingles  required  to  cover  a  square  of  roof 
surface  when  laid  with  various  exposures  allowing  some 
waste. 


152    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


TABLE  XV 
AREA   COVERED   BY   SHINGLES* 

Laid  to  the  weather. 

1000  will  cover  square  feet. 

No.  shingles  to  a  square. 

4" 

44" 

41" 
5" 

100 
110 
120 
133 

1000 
910 
833 
752 

*  Kidder's  Pocket  Book. 

Example:  How  many  shingles  laid  4^"  to  the  weather 
will  be  required  to  cover  a  roof  12  ft.  by  24  ft.?  How  many 
bundles  if  the  shingles  are  5  butts  to  2"? 

24' 
12' 

48 
24 

288  sq.ft.  =  2.88  squares. 

2.88 
833 


8  64 
86  4 
2304 


2399.04  =  2.4  thousand  shingles. 

2.4 

4 


9 . 6  or  10  bundles  of  shingles.     Ana. 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


153 


Explanation.  From  the  above  table  we  find  that  when 
shingles  are  laid  4|"  to  the  weather  833  are  required  per 
square.  We  must  first  find  the  number  of  squares  of  roof 
surface  to  be  covered.  There  are  288  sq.ft.  or  2.88  squares. 
At  833  shingles  per  square,  it  would  require  about  2400 
shingles.  Counting  4  bundles  to  the  thousand,  it  would 
require  10  bundles  to  cover  the  roof. 


Fig.  50.— Roof. 


135.  Material  Lists.  The  builder  is  frequently  called 
upon  to  make  out  material  lists  or  lumber  bills  for  various 
structures.  In  doing  this  work  it  is  imperative  that  it 
should  be  done  in  an  orderly  manner.  The  different  kinds 
of  material  should  be  grouped  and  their  use  in  the  structure 
designated.  A  reference  mark  on  the  drawing  and  a  cor- 
responding mark  on  the  computations  will  often  serve  to 
connect  the  two.  The  results  should  be  recorded  in  such 
a  way  that  they  may  be  readily  understood  at  anv  time. 


154    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

If  the  habit  of  neat  and  orderly  work  in  making  out  lumber 
bills  and  purchasing  lists  is  formed  early  it  will  be  of  great 
value  during  the  entire  business  career  of  the  builder.  The 
following  example  will  show  a  convenient  method  of  making 
out  lumber  bills. 

Example:    Make  out  the  lumber  bill  for  the  private 
garage  shown  in  Fig.  43. 


A  = 

■■   Ipc   4X4X6' S.  IS.  IE. 

• 

Ipc   4X4X12'      ** 

Sill 

2  pes  4X4X18'      " 

B  = 

30  pes  2X4X10'  S.  IS.  IE. 

Posts 

C  = 

=  2  pes  2X4X12' S.  IS.  IE. 

1  Plate 

2  pes  2X4X18'        " 

D  = 

=  28  pes  2X4X10' S.  1  S.  1  E. 

Rafters 

E  = 

=   1  pc   2X6X22'  S.  2  S. 

Ridge 

F  = 

=  3  pes  2X4X14' S.  IS.  IE. 

Belt 

G  = 

=  2  pes  2X4X10' S.  IS.  IE. 

Headers 

H  = 

=  375  ft.  B.M.  1X6  S.  IS. 

Sheathing 

1  = 

=  14  bundles  shingles 

J  = 

=  700  ft.  B.M.  f"X5i"  drop  siding 

K  = 

=  4  pes  2X6X10' S.  1  S.  1  E. 
2  pes  2X6X12 

Stiles  and  rails 

Explanation.  For  most  of  the  material  in  this  list 
it  is  only  necessary  to  take  the  quantities  off  of  the  plan, 
adjusting  the  lengths  to  the  proper  stock  sizes.  Some 
judgment  must  be  exercised  in  making  this  adjustment, 
but  one  soon  becomes  accustomed  to  the  work  and  can  tell 
at  a  glance  the  proper  lengths  to  specify.  Since  so  much 
does  depend  upon  judgment  one  man's  list  will  not  be 
exactly  like  another's  on  the  same  structure.  The  sheathing 
is  figured  as  previously  explained,  allowing  10%  for  waste 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS 


155 


and  adding  sufficient  material  for  the  ridge  board.  Twenty 
per  cent  is  allowed  for  lapping  and  waste  in  figuring  the 
siding.  It  is  always  better  to  allow  for  liberal  quantities 
rather  than  to  run  short  of  material  on  the  job. 

This  is  not  a  purchasing  list.     In  sending  the  list  to 


Fig.  51. — Garage, 


the  lumber  dealer  the  items  should  be  arranged  so  that 
all  the  material  of  a  given  kind  and  length  is  grouped 
together.  This  material  list  should  be  carefully  preserved 
and  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  foreman  when  the  material 
is  delivered  on  the  job  so  that  he  will  know  without  ques- 
tion just  where  every  stick  belongs  in  the  structure. 


156    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


\ 


;:0.8- 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS  157 

Summary  of  Chapter  XII 

76.  To  find  the  number  of  feet  board  measure  in  a 
piece  of  lumber,  multiply  the  width  in  feet  by  the  length 
in  feet  by  the  thickness  in  inches.     (Sec.  131.) 

77.  To  find  the  number  of  feet  board  measure  of  fioor- 
mg  to  cover  a  given  floor,  find  the  area  of  the  floor  in  square 
feet  and  add  25%  to  30%  for  matching  and  waste.  (Sec. 
133.) 

78.  To  find  the  mmiber  of  shingles  required  to  cover 
a  given  roof  surface,  find  the  size  of  the  surface  in  squares 
and  multiply  by  the  number  of  shingles  required  per 
square  as  given  in  the  table.  Multiply  the  number  of 
thousand  of  shingles  thus  obtained  by  4  or  5  according 
to  the  number  of  bundles  to  the  thousand.     (Sec,  134.) 

PROBLEMS 

182.  How  many  board  feet  in  a  piece  of  lumber  1"X8",  14' 
long? 

183.  Six  pieces  of  finish  lumber  l5"X8",  12'  long  are  required 
for  a  certain  job.     How  many  board  feet  are  there  in  the  lot? 

184.  A  contractor  orders  the  following  bill  of  dimension  stuff 
for  concrete  forms.    How  many  feet  B.M.  are  there  in  each  lot? 

24  pes.  4X4  S.  1  S.  1  E.  16' long 
180  pes.  2X4  S.  1  S.  1  E.  10'  long 
200  pes.  UXS  S.  1  S.  1  E.  12'  long. 

185.  How  many  board  feet  are  there  in  200  pieces  2"X14" 
joists  16'  long? 

186.  How  many  board  feet  of  sheathing  1"X6"  are  required 
to  cover  the  side  of  a  barn  12'  high  and  20'  long,  allowing  10% 
for  waste? 

187.  How  many  feet  B.M.  of  sheathing  1"X6"  are  required 
to  sheath  a  roof  surface  16'  wide  and  32'  long,  allowing  a  2"  space 
between  boards  and  10%  for  waste? 


158    ARITHMETIC  FOB  CAKPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


l.A. 


LUMBER  TERMS  AND  DIMENSIONS  159 

188.  A  man  wishes  to  build  a  sidewalk  6'  wide  and  150'  long. 
The  planks  are  1§"X8"  S.  1  S.  1  E.  He  iJUts  in  3  sleepers  4"X4" 
under  the  planks  for  nailing.  How  many  board  feet  must  he  order 
of  each  lot,  allowing  10%  waste? 

189.  How  many  board  feet  of  1"X3"  tongue-and-groove  floor- 
ing will  be  required  to  lay  a  floor  14'X16',  allowing  for  face  measure 
and  5%  for  waste? 

190.  Fig.  44  shows  the  first-floor  plan  of  a  small  cottage.  How 
many  feet  B.M.  of  l"x4"  flooring  will  be  required,  including  the 
porches,  allowing  5%  for  waste? 

191.  Fig.  45  shows  the  plan  of  an  ordinary  ridge  roof.  How 
many  feet  B.M.  will  be  required  to  sheath  the  roof  using  1"X6" 
sheathing  spaced  2"  apart? 

192.  Fig.  46  shows  the  forms  for  a  concrete  job  in  which  1  j"X8" 
shiplap  is  used.     How  many  feet  B.M.  of  shiplap  will  be  required? 

193.  How  much  material  will  be  required  to  make  the  cupboard 
shown  in  Fig.  47? 

194.  Figure  the  lumber  required  to  make  the  kitchen  cabinet 
shown  in  Fig.  48.     Give  the  number  of  pieces  and  the  B.M. 

195.  How  much  material  will  be  required  to  make  the  work- 
bench shown  in  Fig.  49.     Give  the  number  of  pieces  and  the  B.M. 

196.  How  many  thousand  shingles  will  be  required  for  the  roof 
shown  in  Fig.  50,  if  they  are  laid  4j"  to  the  weather? 

197.  How  many  bundles  of  shingles  will  be  required  for  the 
garage  shown  in  Fig.  51,  if  they  are  laid  4^"  to  the  weather? 

198.  Make  out  the  complete  lumber  bill  in  pieces  for  the  shed 
shown  in  Fig.  52.  Give  the  number  of  pieces  of  each  different 
length. 

199.  Make  out  the  complete  lumber  bill  for  the  barn  shown  in 
Fig.  53. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY.  GEOMETRIC  CONSTRUC- 
TIONS. ANGLES  AND  ANGULAR  MEASURE. 
ELLIPSE.     POLYGONS. 

136.  Use  of  Geometry.  The  carpenter  and  wood- 
worker has  to  deal  largely  with  points,  straight  and  curved 
lines,  plane  and  curved  surfaces  and  various  kinds  of 
solids.  Geometry  is  a  study  of  the  properties,  construction 
and  measurement  of  lines,  surfaces  and  solids.  A  thorough 
knowledge  of  geometry  is  very  useful. 

137.  Geometric  Points  and  Lines.  A  point  has  no 
dimensions;  it  merely  has  position.  In  marking  points 
with  a  pencil  or  scriber,  we  must  give  them  some  size  in 
order  to  see  them,  but  theoretically  they  are  only  imaginary. 

A  line  has  only  one  dimension,  that  of  length.  A 
line  drawn  with  a  pencil  or  chalk  has  some  width,  but  in 
theory  it  should  have  no  width.  Lines  may  be  straight 
or  curved.  A  straight  line  is  one  that  does  not  change  its 
direction.  A  curved  line  is  one  which  changes  its  direction 
at  every  point.  A  broken  line  consists  of  a  series  of  straight 
lines  variously  directed  and  joined  together. 

138.  Geometric  Surfaces  and  Solids.  A  surface  has 
two  dimensions — length  and  breadth.  A  plane  surface  is 
one  which  will  wholly  contain  a  straight  line  no  matter  in 
which  direction  the  line  is  laid  in  the  plane.  A  curved 
surface  is  one  which  changes  its  direction  in  accordance 

160 


BUILDERS'   GEOMETRY  161 

with  a  given  law.     The  surface  of  a  cyhnder  or  sphere  is  a 
curved  surface. 

The  definition  of  a  plane  surface  gives  a  practical 
method  of  testing  for  a  true  plane.  If  a  surface  has  a 
warp  or  wind,  it  may  easily  be  detected  by  laying  a  straight- 
edge on  the  surface  in  different  positions  and  sighting  for 
unevenness.  If  the  plane  is  true,  the  straightedge  will 
lie  wholly  in  the  surface  in  whatever  position  it  may  be 
placed.     This  method  of  testing  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  54, 


Fig.  54. — Testing  a  Surface. 

A  solid  is  space  completely  surrounded  by  surfaces. 
A  solid  has  length,  breadth,  and  thickness. 

139.  Geometric  Angles.  An  angle  is  formed  by  two 
straight  lines  which  meet  at  a  point.  The  point  is  called 
the  vertex  of  the  angle.  A  right  angle  is  one  in  which  the 
two  intersecting  lines  are  perpendicular  to  each  other. 
The  angle  between  the  two  edges  of  a  steel  square  is  a 
right  angle.  An  acute  angle  is  one  in  which  the  lines 
make  less  than  a  right  angle.  An  obtuse  angle  is  one  in 
which  the  lines  make  more  than  a  right  angle. 

An  angle  is  designated  by  letters  placed  at  the  point 
or  vertex  and  on  the  sides  or  legs.  The  letter  at  the  vertex 
is  always  written  between  the  letters  representing  the  sides. 


162    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

In  Fig.  55  the  angle  DAB  is  a  right  angle,  as  is  also 
the  angle  BAC,  for  the  reason  that  the  line  AB  is  -per-: 
pendicular  to  the  line  DC  at  the  point  A.  The  angles 
EOF  and  GOH  are  both  acute  angles  because  each  is  less 
than  a  right  angle.  The  angles  EOG  and  FOH  are  both 
obtuse  angles  because  each  is  greater  than  a  right  angle. 

140.  Circular  or  Angular  Measure.  In  Chapter  X  the 
circle  was  studied  in  part  and  some  of  its  properties  were 
investigated.  In  this  chapter  additional  definitions  and 
properties  will  be  considered.    The  arc  of  a  circle  is  a 


Riffht 
Angle 


Right 
Angle 


Fig.  55. 

part  of  its  circumference.  The  part  of  the  circumference 
between  the  points  A  and  C  in  Fig.  56  is  called  the  arc  ABC. 
A  chord  is  a  straight  line  connecting  two  points  on  the 
circumference  of  a  circle.  The  straight  line  joining  the 
points  A  and  C  in  Fig.  56  is  spoken  of  as  the  chord  ADC. 

Circular  arcs  are  measured  in  degrees.  In  a  complete 
circle  there  are  360  degrees.  In  a  fourth  of  a  circum- 
ference or  quadrant,  there  are  90  degrees  of  arc.  An  angle 
at  the  center  is  measured  by  the  number  of  degrees  of 
arc  intercepted  between  the  sides  of  the  angle;  the  num- 
ber of  degrees  in  the  arc  gives  the  number  of  degrees  in 
the  angle.  For  precise  measurements  degrees  are  divided 
into  minutes  and  minutes  are  again  divided  into  seconds. 


BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY  163 

There  are  60  seconds  in  one  minute  and  60  minutes  in 
one  degree.  Degrees,  minutes,  and  seconds  are  designated 
by  the  symbols  °,  ',  ",  respectively.  Thus  34  degrees, 
42  minutes  and  30  seconds  are  written  34°  42'  30''. 

141.  Sectors  and  Segments.  The  area  included  be- 
tween two  radii  and  the  arc  is  called  a  sector.  In  Fig. 
57  the  area  AOBC  is  a  sector  of  the  circle.  A  segment 
is  that  part  of  a  circle  which  is  included  between  an  arc 


Fig.  56.— Chord  and  Arc.  Fig.  57. — Segment. 

and  its  chord.  Thus  in  Fig.  57  the  shaded  portion  ACBD 
is  a  segment. 

142.  To  Bisect  a  Line  and  to  Erect  a  Perpendicular. 

To  bisect  a  line  means  to  divide  it  into  two  equal  parts. 
Ordinarily  it  would  only  be  necessary  to  measure  the 
total  length  of  the  Une,  divide  this  measure  by  two  and 
lay  off  the  half  distance  on  the  Hne.  By  the  methods  of 
geometry  we  not  only  can  bisect  a  line  without  actually 
measuring  it,  but  we  can  also  erect  a  perpendicular  line, 
or  a  line  making  a  right  angle  with  the  first,  at  the  middle 
point. 


164    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Let  AC,  Fig.  58,  be  the  line  of  which  we  wish  to  find 
the  middle  point.     Using  the  ordinary  carpenter's  compass, 

set  the  points  a  Uttle 
more  than  half  the  length 
of  the  line  AC  apart.  With 
this  distance  as  a  radius 
and  the  points  A  and  C  as 
centers,  strike  two  arcs  so 
that  they  cross  above  and 
below  the  line  ylC  at  D 
and  E.  Through  these 
points  draw  the  line  DE. 
The  line  DE  will  bisect 
AC  at  the  point  F  and  is 
also  perpendicular  to  AC. 


Fig.  68. — Perpendicular  Bisector. 


DE  is  called  the  perpendicular  bisector  of  AC 

143.  To  Bisect  an  Angle.     Let  AOB  in  Fig.  59  be  an 
angle  which  is  to  be  divided  into  two  equal  angles.     With 


Fig.  59. — Bisecting  an  Angle. 

O  as  a  center  and  any  convenient  distance  as  a  radius, 
draw  an  arc  which  cuts  the  legs  of  the  angle  at  C  and  D. 


BUILDERS'   GEOMETRY 


165 


Then,  with  C  and  D  as  centers,  and  any  convenient  radius 
strike  two  arcs.  These  will  intersect  at  the  point  E.  Join 
0  and  E.  The  line  OE  divides  the  angle  into  two  equal 
parts  because  it  is  everwhere  equally  distant  from  the 
lines  OA  and  OB. 

144.  To  Erect  a  Perpendicular  at  any  Point  on  a  Line. 
We  have  already  learned  how  to  erect  a  perpendicular 
bisector  to  any  line,  but  suppose  we  wish  to  erect  a  per- 
pendicular to  a  line  at  a  given  point  on  the  line.  Let 
DB,  Fig.  60,  be  the  line  on  which  we  desire  to  erect  a  per- 


FiG.  60. — Erecting  a  Perpendicular. 


pendicular  at  the  point  C.  From  any  convenient  point 
above  the  line,  such  as  0,  strike  an  arc  passing  through 
C,  the  given  point.  It  will  also  cut  DB  at  another  point 
F.  From  F  draw  a  line  through  the  center  0  and  extend 
it  to  cut  the  arc  at  A.  Join  A  and  C.  This  line  AC  will 
be  perpendicular  to  DB. 

145.  To  Construct  a  Right  Angle.  The  following 
method,  known  as  the  "  3,  4,  5  "  method,  is  frequently  used 
to  lay  out  a  right  angle. 

On  the  line  AC  in  Fig.  61  measure  three  units,  say 
three  feet,  from  A  to  E.  With  A  as  a  center  strike  an  arc 
four  units  long.     With  E  as  a,  center  strike  an  arc  five  units 


IQQ    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

long.  They  will  intersect  at  D.  Join  D  and  A.  AD 
will  make  a  right  angle  with  AC.  In  other  words  the  line 
AB,  which  is  a  continuation  of  AD,  will  be  square  with  AC. 
The  reason  for  the  above  is  that  a  right  triangle  is 
formed.  We  have  learned  that  in  a  right  triangle  the 
square  of  the  hypotenuse  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  squares 
of  the  other  two  sides.  If  this  is  true,  then  3^+4^  must  be 
equal  to  5^,  3^+42  =  25.      Also,  5^  equals  25,  which  estab- 


Fin.  61. — Constructing  a  Right  Angle. 


lishes  the  truth  of  the  proposition.  Notice  that  any 
multiple  of  the  units  3,  4,  and  5  may  be  used,  such  as  9, 
12,  and  15,  or  12,  16,  and  20. 

In  laying  out  foundations,  batter  boards  are  set  up 
and  lines  estabUshed  as  shown  in  Fig.  62.  The  accuracy 
of  the  right  angle  at  the  corner  may  be  tested  by  using 
the  "  3,  4,  5  "  method.  A  cloth  measuring-tape  is  held 
with  the  zero  mark  at  A,  the  intersection  of  the  lines. 
Measure  out  9  ft.  to  the  point  E  and  let  out  27  ft.  of  tape. 
Grasp  the  tape  at  a  point  15  ft.  from  E  and  secure  the 
36  ft.  mark  at  A.     Draw  the  tape  taut  and  a  right  angle 


BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY 


167 


will  be  formed  the  sides  of  which  are  9',  12',  and  15'  long. 
The  lines  may  then  be  estabUshed  square  with  each  other. 


Fig.  62. — Laying  out  Foundations. 

146.  To  Construct  Various  Angles.  A  right  angle  may 
be  constructed  as  directed  above  or  it  may  be  laid  out 
by  means  of  the  steel  square.  An  angle  of  45°  may  be 
obtained  by  bisecting  a  right  angle.  It  may  also  be  con- 
structed by  drawing  a  diagonal  of  a 

square.     To    lay     out    a   60°   angle, 

draw  a  horizontal  line,  as  AB  in  Fig. 

63.     With  AB  as  a,  radius  and  A  and 

B  as  centers,  scribe   arcs  intersecting 

at  C.     Draw   the    line   AC   and   the 

angle   BAC   will   be    60°.     If   BC  is 

drawn,  each    of   the    angles    will    be     ^i^  b 

60°.     A  30°  angle  may  be  found  by  fig.  63.— A  60°  Angle. 

bisecting  a  60°  angle. 

147.  To  Find  the  Center  of  an  Arc  or  Circle.  The 
carpenter  often  finds  practical  cases  in  which  it  is  necessary 


168    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

to  find  the  radius  of  a  circle  when  the  segment  or  arc  is 
given.  In  Fig.  64  it  is  desired  to  find  the  radius  of  the 
circle  of  which  the  arc  is  a  part.  From  any  point  on  the 
arc,  such  as  A,  draw  the  two  chords  interescting  the  arc 
in  any  two  points  as  B  and  C.  With  the  points  A,  B,  and 
C  as  centers  and  any  convenient  radius,  draw  the  short 
intersecting  arcs  dd',  ee',  ff,  and  gg'.    Through  the  points 


Fig.  64. — Finding  the  Radius  of  a  Circle 

in  which  these  arcs  intersect,  draw  the  lines  MO  and  NO. 
These  lines  will  be  the  perpendicular  bisectors  of  the  chords 
AC  and  AB  and  they  will  intersect  each  other  at  the 
point  0,  which  is  the  center  of  the  required  circle.  The 
distance  from  0  to  the  given  arc  is  the  required  radius. 

148.  The  Ellipse.  The  practical  man  sometimes  has 
occasion  to  use  the  ellipse  in  laying  out  work.  Such  work 
is  most  usual  in  the  construction  of  concrete  forms  for 


BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY 


169 


Fig.  65. — Constructing  an  Ellipse. 


sewers  and  arches.  There  are  several  methods  of  construct- 
ing an  ellipse,  but  the  most  convenient  is  by  means  of  the 
trammel. 

To  construct  an  ellipse  by  the  trammel  method,  having 
given  the  length  and  width  of  the  ellipse,  lay  out  the  long 
and  short  axes  at  right  angles  to  each  other  as  shown  in 
Fig.  65.      The   short   axis 
CD  is'called  the  minor  axis  d 

and  the  long  axis  AB  is 
the  major  axis.  With  a 
straightedge  or  the  tram- 
mel, using  three  trammel 
points,  lay  off  the  distance 
from  0  to  D,  or  one-half 
the  minor  axis  between 
the  points  a  and  b  on  the 
straightedge.  From  a,  again 
lay  off  one-half  the  major  axis  or  the  distance  from  0  to 
B.  This  will  locate  the  point  c  on  the  straightedge.  Now 
keep  the  point  h  on  the  major  axis  and  the  point  c  on  the 
minor  axis  and  locate  several  positions  of  the  point  a  by 
making  a  mark  in  the  wood  or  paper  as  shown  in  the  figure. 
Join  the  points  thus  found  with  a  smooth  curve  and  the 
result  will  be  an  ellipse.  The  points  should  be  located 
fairly  close  together  in  order  to  make  the  curve  a  smooth  one. 

149.*  Polygons.  A  polygon  is  a  plane  figure  bounded 
by  any  number  of  straight  lines.  The  side  of  a  polygon 
is  any  one  of  these  lines.  The  point  where  two  lines  meet 
is  called  a  vertex.  A  polygon  is  designated  by  reading  the 
letters  at  the  vertices.  A  triangle  is  a  polygon  which  has 
three  sides.  A  quadrilateral  is  a  polygon  which  has  four 
sides.  A  parallelogram  is  a  quadrilateral  whose  opposite 
sides  are  parallel  to  each  other.     Fig.  66  shows  a  parallel- 


170    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CAHPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

ogram.     When   all   the   angles   are   right   angles  and   the 
sides  are  all  equal  the  figure  is  a  square.     When  all  of  the 

angles  are  right  angles  but 
when  the  opposite  sides 
only  are  equal  to  each 
other,  the  figure  is  a  rect- 
angle. A  hexagon  is  a 
polygon  having  six  equal 
sides  and  six  equal  angles. 
An  octagon  is  a  figure 
having  eight  equal  sides  and  eight  equal  angles. 

160.  To  Construct  a  Hexagon.  To  construct  a  hexagon 
in  a  given  square,  proceed  as  follows:  First,  find  the  center 
of  the  square  by  drawing  a  diagonal  from  comer  to  coiner 
as  shown  in  Fig.  67.     Then  inscribe  a  circle  within  the  square 


D  C 

Fig.  66. — ^A  Parallelogram. 


Fig.  67. 
Constructing  a  Hexagon. 


C  d 

Fig.  68.    ' 
Constructing  an  Octagon. 


SO  that  the  circumference  of  the  circle  just  touches  the  sides 
of  the  square.  With  the  center  of  one  side  of  the  square, 
the  point  A  for  example,  as  a  starting  point,  and  with  the 
length  of  the  radius  of  the  circle  as  a  measure,  step  off 
around  the  circle.     This  should  divide  the  circle  exactly 


BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY  171 

into  six  equal  parts.     Now  join  these  points  just  found  with 
a  straight  hne  to  form  the  hexagon  ABCDEF. 

151.  To  Construct  an  Octagon.  The  octagon  or  eight- 
sided  figure  may  be  constructed  as  shown  in  Fig.  68.  Find 
the  center  of  the  square  as  explained  above.  Then  with 
the  distance  from  0  to  J.  as  a  radius  and  with  the  points 
A,  B,  C,  and  D  used  one  after  the  other  as  centers,  draw 
arcs  to  cut  the  edge  of  the  square  in  the  points  a,  a',  b, 
b',  etc.     Join  these  points  to  form  the  octagon. 


172    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


Summary  of  Chapter  XIII 

79.  Geometry  is  a  study  of  the  properties  of  lines,  sur- 
faces, and  solids.     (Sec.  136). 

80.  A  point  is  a  geometric  representation  which  has 
position  only.     (Sec.  137). 

81.  A  line  is  a  geometric  representation  which  has 
direction  and  length.  Lines  may  be  straight  or  curved. 
(Sec.  137). 

82.  A  surface  is  a  geometric  representation  which 
has  length  and  breadth,  but  no  thickness.  Surfaces  may 
be  either  plane  or  curved.     (Sec.  138). 

83.  A  solid  is  a  geometric  representation  which  has 
length,  breadth,  and  thickness.     (Sec.  138). 

PROBLEMS 

Note.  To  lay  out  the  construction  asked  for  in  the  following  prob- 
lems, use  a  small  steel  square  or  wooden  or  celluloid  triangle  and  a 
compass  or  dividers.  A  cheap  compass  which  may  be  attached  to 
a  lead  pencil  may  be  obtained  at  any  book  store.  Use  a  fairly  hard 
lead  pencil  so  that  your  work  will  not  smear  and  get  dirty. 

200.  Construct  a  square  exactly  4"  on  a  side  and  square  the 
corners  by  the  method  given  in  Section  144. 

201.  Two  lines  are  stretched  for  the  corner  of  a  concrete 
foundation.  Show  how  you  can  test  them  by  the  "3, 4,  5,"  method. 
Make  a  diagram. 

202.  Construct  angles  of  60°,  45°,  and  30°. 

203.  Construct  the  largest  hexagon  you  can  draw  in  a  4" 
square. 

204.  Construct  the  largest  octagon  you  can  draw  in  a  4" 
square. 

205.  Construct  a  hexagon  each  side  of  which  is  2|"  long. 

Hint.  The  radius  of  the  circle  in  which  it  is  inscribed  must  be 
2i". 


BUILDERS'  GEOMETRY  173 

206.  Draw  an  ellipse  by  the  trammel  method,  using  a  straight 
piece  of  paper  as  a  straightedge.  Make  the  eUipse  3"  wide  and 
5"  long. 

207.  Lay  out  a  circle  4'  in  diameter  in  six  segments  so  that  it 
may  be  built  from  8"  boards.  Make  your  drawing  to  a  scale 
of  l|"  =  r.  How  long  must  the  pieces  be  cut  to  make  each 
segment? 

208.  Draw  a  circle  4"  in  diameter  and  lay  out  in  it  a  sector 
of  which  the  angle  at  the  center  is  60°. 

209.  A  window  is  to  be  constructed  in  the  form  of  a  half 
circle  or  semicircle  with  a  radiuo  of  1|  ft.  The  glass  is  to  set  in 
lead.  At  the  center  is  a  small  semicircle  with  a  3"  radius  and 
the  rest  of  the  glass  area  consists  of  six  sectors.  Make  a  drawing 
showing  the  size  and  shape  of  all  the  pieces  in  the  window. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

AREAS  OF  SURFACES  AND  VOLUMES  OF  SOLIDS. 
AREA  OF  TRIANGLE,  PYRAMID,  CYLINDER  AND 
CONE.  VOLUME  OF  CYLINDER,  PRISM,  PYRAMID 
AND  CONE.    MEASURING  SURFACES  AND  VOLUMES 


We  have  already  learned  how  to  find  the  area  of  the 
square  and  rectangle  and  also  how  to  find  the  length  of 
the  hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle.  The  student 
should  review  these  subjects  carefully  before  taking  up  this 
chapter. 

152.  Area  of  a  Triangle.  Fig.  69 
shows  how  two  triangles  are  formed 
by  drawing  a  diagonal  line  from  one 
corner  to  the  other  of  a  rectangle. 
You  can  readily  see  that  the  area  of 
each  of  these  triangles  will  be  one-half 
of  the  area  of  the  rectangle.  If  the 
letter  S  stands  for  the  area  of  the 
rectangle,  L  for  its  length,  and  W  for 
its  width;  then. 


y_. 


Fig.  69. 


S  =  LXW. 


The  area  of  each  triangle  is  one-half  the  area  of  the 
rectangle.  Let  the  letter  s  stand  for  the  area  of  the  tri- 
angle, b  for  its  j^ase  and  a  for  its  altitude;  then 

s  =  iS  =  ^bXa. 

174 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES  175 

If  you  look  at  the  rectangle  you  will  now  see  that  the 
length  of  the  rectangle  is  the  same  as  the  altitude  of  the 
triangle  and  that  the  width  of  the  rectangle  is  equal  to  the 
base  of  the  triangle.  We  may  now  formulate  the  rule  that 
the  area  of  a  triangle  is  equal  to  one-half  the  product  of  the 
base  hy  the  altitude.  Please  note  that,  as  in  the  case  of  finding 
the  area  of  the  square  and  of  the  rectangle,  the  altitude 
and  the  base  must  he  expressed  in  the  same  units. 

Example.     Find  the  area  of  one  triangle  in  Fig.  69  if 
7.  =  30"andTf  =  20". 

20" 
30" 


2)600   sq.in. 

300   sq.in.  area  of  triangle.  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  area  of  a  rectangle  30"  in  length  and 
20"  in  width  equals  20"  X  30'-' =  600  sq.in.  The  area  of 
the  triangle  formed  on  these  sides  is  one-half  the  area  of 
the  corresponding  rectangle.  Hence,  we  divide  this  product 
by  2  and  get  300  sq.in  as  the  area  of  the  triangle. 

153.  Area  of  a  Pyramid.  A  sohd  whose  base  is  a  poly- 
gon and  whose  sides  are  all  triangles  which  meet  in  a  com- 
mon point  above  the  base  is  called  a  pyramid.  The  common 
point  in  which  the  sides  meet  is  called  the  vertex  or  the 
apex.  When  the  vertex  is  perpendicularly  above  the  center 
of  the  base  the  pyramid  is  a  right  pyramid.  If  the  upper 
portion  of  a  pyramid  is  removed,  as  by  a  saw  cut  parallel 
to  the  base,  the  portion  that  remains  is  called  the  frustimi 
of  the  pyramid.  Pyramids  are  named  according  to  the 
number  of  sides  there  are  in  the  base.  If  the  base  is  a 
square,  it  is  called  a  square  pyramid.  If  the  base  is  a 
hexagon,  it  is  called  a  hexagonal  pyramid.     Various  forms 


176    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

of  the  pyramid  are  often  found  in  roofs,  walls,  bins,  hoppers, 
etc.     Fig.  70  is  an  example  of  the  hexagonal  pyramid. 

Since  the  sides  of  a  pyramid  are  triangles,  we  can  use 
the  information  given  above  to  find  the  surface  area  of  a 


Fig.  70.— Hexagonal  Pyramid.       Fig.  71.— Square  Pyramidal  Rpof. 

pyramid.     An  example  applying  to  a  pyramidal  roof  is  given 
below. 

Example.    Find  the  number  of  feet  B.M.  necessary  to 
cover  the  square  pyramidal  roof  shown  in  Fig.  71. 

72  =  49 
72  =  49 


98 


9.9' 
•  T 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES 
V^  =  9.9'  =  length  of  a. 


177 


69 . 3  sq.ft.  in  one  side 
4  sides 


277.2  sq.ft.  in  roof 
20%  for  waste 


55.440 

277.2 
55.4 


332.6  sq.ft.  or  say  335  ft.  B.M.  of  lumber  required. 

Ans. 

Explanation.  Since  the  surface  we  are  measuring  is 
inclined,  the  altitude  of  the  triangle  the  area  of  which  we 
require  is  the  line  a.  This  length  is  found  by  solving  for 
the  hypotenuse  of  a  triangle 
when  the  base  and  the  alti- 
tude are  given.  The  altitude 
in  this  case  is  the  line  EO  =  7' 
and  the  base  is  AE  =  \^-  =  7'. 
Solving  the  triangle  we  get 
9.9'  as  the  length  of  the  line 
a.  When  we  lay  the  side  of 
the  roof  out  flat,  it  appears  as 
shown  in  Fig.  72.  The  alti- 
tude is  9.9'  and  the  base  is  14'.  If  we  divide  14  by  2  before 
multiplying  it  will  amount  to  the  same  thing  as  dividing 
the  product  by  2.  Multiplying  9.9'  by  7'  gives  69.3  sq.ft. 
for  the  area  of  the  triangle.     Since  there  are  four  sides,  we 


Fig.  72. 


178    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


multiply  by  4  to  get  the  total  area  of  the  roof.  Allowing 
20%  for  waste  gives  332.6  sq.ft  or  say  335  ft.  B.M.  of  lum- 
ber required. 

154.  Area  of  a  Cylindrical  Surface.  A  cylinder  is  a 
solid  whose  ends  or  bases  are  two  parallel  circles  and  the 
side  of  which    is  a   curved   surface.     A  cylinder  may  be 

formed  by  revolving  a  rectangle 
about  one  of  its  sides  as  an 
axis,  in  which  event  the  cylinder 
is  a  right  cylinder.  Fig.  73 
shows  a  right  cylinder.  We  have 
many  familiar  examples  of  the 
use  of  cylinders  in  practical 
building  construction. 

If  we  should  roll  a  cylinder 
out  on  a  flat  surface  as  shown 
in  Fig.  74,  it  would  form  a 
rectangle  the  width  of  which 
would  equal  the  height  of  the 
cylinder  and  the  length  of  which 
would  be  equal  to  the  circum- 
ference of  the  base  of  the  cylin- 
der. Therefore,  to  find  the  area  of  the  surface  cf  a  cylinder, 
find  the  circumference  of  the  base  and  multiply  by  the  height 
of  the  cylinder.  To  find  the  total  area  add  to  this  the 
area  of  the  two  bases. 

We  have  already  learned  that  the  circumference  of  a 
circle  is  equal  to  t  times  the  diameter  and  that  the  area  of 
a  circle  is  equal  to  the  radius  squared  times  tt.  Let  h  equal 
the  height  of  the  cylinder  and  r  equal  the  radius.  Then 
the  diameter  d  equals  2r.  If  s  represents  the  area  of  the 
surface;  then 

s=2irrh=irdh/ 


Fig.  73.— Cylinder. 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES  179 

If  S  represents  the  total  area,  then, 

S  =  2'irrh-\-2irr^  =  Tdh+^Td^. 

Example.  Find  the  number  of  feet  B.M.  required  to 
build  the  walls  of  a  wooden  stave  silo  12'  in  diameter  and 
30'  high.  Plank  2"  thick  are  to  be  used.  Add  20%  for 
matching  and  cutting. 

3.1416 

12'  d  =  2r 


6  2832 
31  416 


37.6992  ft. 

circumference. 

37.7' 

30'  high 

1131.0  sq.ft 

.  in  surface. 

1131 

2  for  2" 

plank. 

2262 

2262 

20%  for  matching  and 

cutting. 

452.40 

2262 

452 

2714  ft.  B.M.  of  lumber  required.         Ans. 

Explanation.  Multiply  the  diameter  by  x  to  get  the 
circumference.  This  times  the.  height  in  feet  will  give  the 
number  of  square  feet  in  the  surface.     If  2"  plank  are  used 


180    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

and  20%  allowed  for  matching  and  cutting,  the  total  number 
of  feet  B.M.  required  will  be  about  2700. 

155.  Area  of  the  Stirface  of  a  Cone.  A  cone  is  a  solid 
the  base  of  which  is  a  circle  and  the  side  of  which  is  curved 
surface  which  closes  in  to  a  point  called  the  vertex.  The 
distance  from  the  vertex  to  a  point  on  the  circumference 
of  the  base  is  called  the  slant  height.  A  cone  may  be  formed 
by  revolving  a  right  triangle  about  its  altitude  as  an  axis. 


Fig.  74. 


When  the  upper  portion  of  a  cone  is  cut  away  as  with  a 
saw  cut,  the  part  that  remains  is  called  a  frusttun  of  a  cone. 
Fig.  75  shows  a  cone  and  a  frustum.  This  surface  is  found 
in  practical  construction  in  the  roofs  of  round  buildings 
and  towers. 

If  we  should  roll  a  cone  out  upon  a  flat  surface  as  we 
did  for  the  cylinder,  we  would  get  a  part  or  sector  of  a  circle. 
This  is  shown  in  Fig.  76.  The  length  of  the  arc  AB,  Fig.  76, 
is  equal  to  the  circumference  of  the  base  of  the  cone.  The 
radius  of  the  sector  is  equal  to  the  length  of  the  slant  height 
or  the  line  a  on  the  cone.    This  length  may  be  found  by 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES 


181 


solving  for  the  hypotenuse  of  the  triangle  OEK,  Fig.  75. 
The  area  of  this  sector  is  equivalent  to  the  area  of  a  triangle 
which  has  a  base  equal  to  the  length  of  the  arc  AB  and  an 
altitude  equal  to  the  slant  height  of  the  cone.  If  we  let  s 
equal  the  lateral  area  of  the  cone,  r  the  radius  of  the  base 
and  a  the  slant  height,   then 

s  =  §-2-7rra=7rra. 


Fig.  75. — Cone  and  Frustum. 


Just  as  in  the  triangle  it  is  equal  to  one-half  the  circum- 
ference of  the  base  times  the  slant  height.  The  circum- 
ference of  the  base  is  equal  to  27rr  and  canceling  the  2  with 
I  the  formula  reads  irra.  In  other  words  this  is:  The  lateral 
area  of  a  cone  is  equal  to  the  product  of  ir  by  the  radius  of  the 
base  and  by  the  slant  height.  If  the  total  area  S  is  wanted, 
it  is  equal  to  S=irra-\-jrr^,  and  is  found  by  adding  the  area 
of  the  base  circle  to  the  lateral  area. 


182    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Example.    How  many  shingles  laid  i^''  will  be  required 
to  cover  the  roof  of  the  silo  shown  in  Fig.  77? 

72-1-72  =  98 

V98  =  9.9'  slant  height  the  roof. 
3.1416 

r 


21.9912=     22' 
9.9 


198 
198 


217.8  sq.ft.  in  roof. 
217.8 

10%  for  waste 


21      add  for  waste 
217.8 


238.8  sq.ft.  or  say  2§  squares. 
833 
2i 


416 
1666 


2082  shingles  required. 

4  bundles  to  the  thousand 


8.328,  say  9  bundles  of  shingles  required.       Ans. 

Explanation.  Solve  the  triangle  to  find  the  slant  height 
of  the  roof.  Find  the  product  of  w  times  the  radius  of  the 
base  and  times  the  slant  height.  Add  10%  for  waste  and 
count  4  bundles  of  shingles  to  the  thousand. 


AREAS   OF  SURFACES 


183 


156.  Volume.  We  have  already  learned  something 
about  cubic  measure  and  how  to  find  the  volume  of  a  cube. 
It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  know  how  to  find  the  cubic 
contents  of  bins  and  other  structures,  having  various  shapes. 
It  will  usually  be  possible  to  separate  an  irregularly  formed 
structure  into  parts  which  are,  or  very  nearly  are,  classed 
under  one  of  the  regular  forms.  We  should,  therefore,  know 
how  to  figure  the  volume  of  the  cylinder,  the  pyramid  and 
its  frustum  and  the  cone  and  its  frustum. 


157.  Volume  of  a  Cylinder.  We  have  already  learned 
that  the  volume  of  a  cylinder  is  equal  to  the  product  of  the 
area  of  the  base  by  the  height  of  the  cylinder.  We  can  now 
express  this  as  a  formula.  Let  V  equal  the  volume  of  the 
cylinder,  r  the  radius  of  the  base  and  h  the  height  of  the 
cylinder;  then 


Example.    How   many   cubic   feet   in   a   concrete   silo 
baving  12  ft.  inside  diameter  m^  30  ft.  high? 


184    ARITHMETIC   FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

62  =  36 
36X3.1416  =  113  sq.ft.  in  bottom. 
113  X  30  =  3390  cu.f t.  in  silo.  Ans. 


Fig.  77.— SUo. 

Explanation.  Find  the  area  of  the  bottom  of  the  silo 
by  squaring  the  radius  and  multiplying  by  tt.  Multiply  this 
by  the  height  to  get  the  cubic  contents. 

158.  Volume  of  a  Prism.  A  solid  whose  ends  are  parallel 
polygons  and  whose  sides  are  parallelograms  is  called  a 


AREAS   OF  SURFACES 


185 


prism.  When  the  edges  of  the  sides  make  right  angles  with 
the  edges  of  the  base,  the  prism  is  a  right  prism.  Our  most 
famihar  example  of  a  right  prism  is  simply  a  square  or 
rectangular  block  of  wood.  The  volume  of  a  prism  is  equal 
to  the  product  of  the  area  of  the  base  by  the  height. 


A  F 

Fig.  78. — Three  Pyramids  Cut  from  a  Cube. 


159.  Volume  of  a  Pyramid.  Fig.  78  shows  how  three 
pyramids  may  be  cut  out  of  a  cube.  This  demonstrates 
that  a  pyramid  contains  one-third  as  much  as  the  corre- 
sponding cube  or  prism.  Therefore,  the  volume  of  a  pyramid 
is  equal  to  one-third  the  product  of  the  area  of  the  base  by  the 
altitude. 


186    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTEKA   ^ND  BUILDERS 

If  a  represents  the  length  of  one  side  of  the  base,  h  the 
length  of  the  other  side,  h  the  altitude,  then  if  V  represents 
the  volume, 

V  =  \ahh 


Fig.  79. — Bin  with  Hopper. 


Fig.  80. — Gas  Container. 


Example.  Fig.  79  shows  a  bin  with  an  inverted  pyramid 
for  a  hopper  at  the  bottom.  Find  the  total  contents  of 
the  bin  in  bushels. 

For  the  volume  of  the  upper  prism : 

10'  X 10'  X  20'  =  2000  cu.f t. 


For  the  volume  of  the  hopper: 

|XlO'X10'X8'  =  266cu.ft. 


A^EAS  OF  SURFACES  187 

For  the  total  volume : 

2000+266  =  2266  cu.ft. 
There  are  1.25  cu.ft.  in  a  bushel, 

2266-^1.25  =  1813  bu.  Ans. 

Explanation.  To  find  the  contents  of  the  upper  bin, 
multiply  the  length  by  the  width  and  again  by  the  height. 
To  find  the  contents  of  the  hopper  take  one-third  of  the 
product  of  the  area  of  the  base  by  the  altitude.  Adding 
this  to  the  quantity  for  the  upper  portion  we  have  2266  cu.ft. 
for  the  total  contents  of  the  bin.  There  are  Ij  cu.ft.  in 
each  bushel;  hence  we  divide  the  contents  in  cubic  feet  by 
11  to  get  1813  bushels. 

160.  Volume  of  a  Cone.  The  method  of  finding  the 
volume  of  a  cone  is  the  same  as  that  for  finding  the  volume 
of  a  pyramid.  It  is  equal  to  one-third  the  product  of  the  area 
of  the  base  by  the  height.    The  volume  is 

V  =  iT7^h, 

in  which  r  is  the  radius  of  the  base  and  h  is  the  height  or 
altitude. 

Example.  A  gas  container  is  in  the  form  of  a  cyhnder 
topped  by  a  cone.  The  dimensions  of  the  container  are 
given  in  Fig.  80.  How  many  cubic  feet  of  gas  will  the  con- 
tainer hold? 

Note.  Squaring  the  diameter  and  multiplying  by  .7854  is  the  same 
as  squaring  the  radius  and  multiplying  by  3.1416. 

52  =  25 
25 X. 7854  =  19.63  sq.ft. 
19.63X8=157  cu.ft.  in  the  cylinder. 


188    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

19.63X2.5  =  49.07. 

^X49.07  =  16.35  cu.ft.  in  cone. 

157+16.35  =  173.35  cu.ft.  total.  Ans. 

Explanation.     Find  the  contents  of  the  cylinder  in  the 
usual  way.     Find  the  contents  of  the  cone  by  taking  |  of 


^ 

k 

/ 

\    ^ 

A        / 

A  \^ 

< 

9 

B 

/        ^ 

/ 

^ 

f             a'          b 

" 

h 

D 

< 

^ 

A     y^ 

\.         A 

/      ^ 

> 

9 

1 

B 

A     \^ 

-3*- 


FiG.  81.— A  Deck  Roof 

the  product  of  the  area  of  the  base,  19.63  cu.ft.,  by  the 
altitude,  1\  ft.,  to  get  16.35  cu.ft.  Add  the  contents  of 
the  cylinder  to  the  contents  of  the  cone  to  get  173.35  cu.ft. 
as  the  total  contents  of  the  container. 

161.  Volume  of  the  Frustum  of  a  Cone  or  Pyramid. 
A  frustum  of  a  cone  or  pyramid  is  figured  by  first  finding 
what  the  contents  would  be  if  a  part  were  not  cut  away. 


AREAS   OF  SURFACES 


189 


Then  find  the  volume  of  the  part  cut  away  and  subtract 
from  the  whole  volume  to  get  the  volume  of  the  frustum. 

162.  Measuring  Surfaces  and  Volumes.     Many  of  the 
cases  which  one  finds  in  practical  work  do  not  fit  these  regu- 


FiG.  82.— Building  with  Cambrel  Roof. 


lar  forms  precisely.  It  is  necessary,  then,  to  divide  the  whole 
into  a  number  of  parts  which  will  come  into  one  of  these 
classes.  The  accuracy  of  the  result  will  depend  largely  upon 
the  judgment  used  in  making  these  divisions  and  skill  in 
carrying  out  the  operation. 


190    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Example.     Fig.  81  shows  a  deck  roof  and  gives  the 
dimensions.     Figure  the  total  area  of  the  roof. 

Slant  height  of  roof 

82=64 
82  =  64 


128  =  11.31' 
Area  of  8  small  triangles  A,  A,  A,  etc.: 

— —^ =45. 24  sq.ft.  in  one  triangle. 

45.24X8  =  361.92  sq.ft.  in  8  triangles. 
Area  of  2  rectangles  B,  B: 

11.31X18X2  =  407.16  sq.ft. 
Area  of  2  rectangles  C,  C: 

11.31X4X2=90.48  sq.  ft. 
Area  of  rectangle  D: 

18X4  =  72  sq.ft. 

Adding: 


361. 

92 

407. 

16 

90.48 

72 

931.56  sq.ft.  total.  Ans. 

Explanation.  Divide  the  roof  surface  up  into  triangles 
and  rectangles.  Figure  the  area  of  each  of  these  separately 
and  then  add  them  all  together  to  get  the  total  area. 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES 


191 


Summary   of  Chapter  XIV 

84.  The  area  of  a  triangle  is  equal  to  one-half  the  prod- 
uct of  the  base  by  the  altitude.     S  =  ^  ha.     (Sec.  152.) 

85.  The  lateral  area  of  a  cylinder  equals  two  times  t 
times  the  radius  of  the  base  times  the  height.  S  =  2Trrh. 
(Sec.  154.) 

86.  To  get  the  total  area  of  a  cylinder  add  to  the  lateral 
area  the  area  of  both  bases.    S  =  2rrh-\-2Tn^.     (Sec.  154.) 


Fig.  83. 


87.  The  lateral  area  of  a  cone  equals  w  times  the  radius 
of  the  base  times  the  slant  height.     S  =  Trra.     (Sec.  155.) 

88.  To  get  the  total  area  of  a  cone  add  to  the  lateral 
area  the  area  of  the  base.     S  =  irra-{-7rr^.     (Sec.  155.) 

89.  The  volume  of  a  cylinder  is  equal  to  r  times  the 
square  of  the  radius  of  the  base  times  the  height.  V=irr^h. 
(Sec.  157.) 

90.  The  volume  of  a  prism  is  equal  to  the  product  of 
the  area  of  the  base  by  the  height.     (Sec.  158.) 


192    ARITHMETIC   FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

I  I 


^ 


AREAS  OF  SURFACES 


193 


91.  The  volume  of  a  pyramid  is  equal  to  one-third  the 
product  of  the  area  of  the  base  by  the  height.  V  =  lahh. 
(Sec.  159.) 

92,  The  volimie  of  a  cone  is  equal  to  one-third  the 
area  of  the  base  by  the  height.     V'=lirr^h.     (Sec.  160.) 


Fig.  85. 


PROBLEMS 

210.  A  triaogle  has  a  base  of  20'  and  an  altitude  of  15'.     What 
will  be  the  side  of  a  square  having  the  same  area? 

211.  Fig.  82  shows  the  end  view  of  a  building  with  a  gambrel 
roof.     Figure  the  area  of  the  walls  and  area  of  the  roof. 


194    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


212.  In  the  problem  above  how  many  feet  B.M.  of  T'XS" 
shiplap  will  be  required  to  sheath  the  walls?  How  many  feet  B.M. 
of  r'X4"  laid  2"  apart  will  be  required  to  sheath  the  roof?  How 
many  shingles  will  be  required  for  the  roof? 

213.  In  Fig.  83  find  the  length  of  rafters,  struts  and  other 
parts  not  given. 

214.  Fig.  84  shows  the  framing  for  a  hip  roof.  How  many 
feet  B.M.  will  be  required  if  2"X4"  are  used  for  jack  rafters  and 
2"  X  6"  for  hip  and  ridge? 


Roof  for  a  Pavilion. 


215.  An  octagonal  tower  is  20'  across  from  side  to  side.  The 
height  of  the  apex  is  11  ft.  above  the  eaves.  How  many  shingles 
will  be  required  for  the  roof?  Draw  the  octagon  to  scale  to  find 
the  length  of  a  side. 

216.  How  many  cubic  feet  in  a  monoUthic  concrete  silo  16' 
in  diameter  on  the  outside  and  45'  high,  if  the  walls  are  9"  thick? 

217.  Find  the  number  of  shingles  required  for  the  roof  shown 
in  Fig.  85. 

218.  How  many  square  feet  of  surface  in  a  conical  roof  15' 
in  diameter  at  the  base  and  8'  high? 

219.  Fig.  86  shows  a  roof  for  a  pavilion.  If  t^e  shingles  cost 
$5.00  per  thousand  and  they  are  laid  5"  to  the  weather  what  will 
be  the  cost  of  shingling  the  roof?  Figure  $3.00  per  M  shingles 
for  labor  and  nails. 


CHAPTER  XV 

USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE.  BRACE  MEASURE. 
OCTAGONAL  SCALE.  ESSEX  BOARD  MEASURE. 
DIAGONAL  SCALE.  POLYGON  SCALE.  GEOMETRIC 
APPLICATIONS 

163.  Carpenter's  Square.  The  steel  square  or  car- 
penter's square  is  probably  the  most  useful  tool  which  the 
carpenter  has  in  his  kit.  In  the  usual  form  it  consists  of 
blade  or  "  body  "  24  in.  long  and  2  in.  wide  and  a,"  tongue  " 
16  in.  long  and  1|  in.  wide.  The  tongue  makes  an  exact 
right  angle  or  an  angle  of  90°  with  the  blade.  Both  the 
blade  and  the  tongue  are  graduated  in  inches  and  fractions 
of  an  inch.  These  graduations  begin  at  the  corner  and  run 
out  on  both  edges  of  the  tongue  and  blade.  The  fractional 
graduations  are  usually  in  thirty-seconds,  sixteenths, 
twelfths,  tenths  and  eighths.  The  square  is  also  supplied 
with  a  brace  measure,  an  octagonal  scale,  the  Essex  board 
measure  and  a  diagonal  scale,  the  uses  of  each  of  which 
will  be  explained.  Some  squares  give  a  rafter  table  instead 
of  the  Essex  board  measure  scale.  The  side  of  the  square 
which  has  the  maker's  name  stamped  upon  it  is  called  the 
face  and  the  opposite  side  is  called  the  back.  Fig.  87  shows 
the  face  of  a  steel  square  and  Fig.  88  shows  the  back. 

164.  The  Brace  Measure.  The  brace  measure  is  used 
to  determine  the  length  of  a  diagonal  brace.  When  the 
length  of  two  sides  of  a  square  are  known,  the  length  of  the 
diagonal  may  be  found  by  using  the  brace  measure.     The 

195 


196    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


ITI'I'I'I'I'I'ITI'I'I'I'ITI'I'ITITI 


figures  along  the  cen- 
ter of  the  back  of  the 
tongue  as  shown  in 
Fig.  88  constitute  the 
brace  measure.  The 
equal  figures,  one 
above  another,  repre- 
sent the  side  of  the  square  and  the  figure  to 
the  right  and  between  them  represents  the 
length  of  the  diagonal. 

Example.  What  is  the  length  of  a  diag- 
onal brace  for  a  square  48"  on  a  side? 

Explanation.  Look  on  the  brace  meas- 
ure to  find  If.  Between  these  two  figures 
and  the  right  you  will  find  67.88.  This  the 
length  of  the  required  brace  in  inches  and 
decimals. 

165.  The  Octagonal  Scale.  The  octag- 
onal scale  is  sometimes  called  the  "  eight 
square  scale."  It  is  shown  along  the  center 
of  the  face  of  the  tongue  in  Fig.  87.  To 
use  the  scale  you  take  as  many  divisions 
from  the  scale  as  there  are  inches  in  the 
width  of  the  stick.  Lay  this  distance  off 
on  each  side  of  the  center  line  of  the  end 
of  the  stick  after  it  has  been  carefully  cen- 
tered. Connect  these  points  diagonally 
across  the  corners  of  the  square  and  an 
octagon  or  "  eight  square  "  figure  will  be  the 
result.  This  method  is  nearly  correct  but  is 
not  exact. 

Example.  Lay  out  an  octagon  on  a 
stick  that  is  12"  square. 


ill 


—  i>_:z 


—   M     -= 


-!>>    .:i.-*- 


_fc     -»     ~= 


«      _  fcj     — = 


-<g    ~= 


-»       — = 


I'lG.  87. 


USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE 


197 


v>  «*     — 


—      1^  lO 


00  V>     — 


0\  t*     — 


Explanation.  This 
example  is  illustrated 
in  Fig.  89.  Find  the 
center  of  the  stick 
by  drawing  diagonals 
from  corner  to  corner 
and  scribe  the  center 
line,  using  a  try-square.  This  will  give  the 
lines  A  B  and  C  D  shown  in  the  figure.  The 
stick  is  12"  square;  therefore,  you  should 
take  twelve  divisions  off  of  the  scale.  Lay 
this  distance  off  in  each  direction  to  the 
right  and  left  of  the  points  A,  B,  C  and  D. 


Fig.  88. 


J         B        I 
Fig.  89. — Laying  out  an  Octagon. 

Join  these  points  with  straight  lines  across 
the  corners.     The  result  will  be  an  octagon. 

166.  The  Essex  Board  Measure.  The 
Essex  board  measure  is  used  to  determine 
the  number  of  board  feet  contained  in  a 
stick  without  figuring  it  out.     This  scale  is 


198    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


shown  along  the  cen- 
ter of  the  body  in 
Fig.  90.  The  start- 
ing point  for  each 
determination  is  the 
figure  12  on  the  outer 
edge.  This  is  the  number  of  board  feet 
in  a  1"  board  12"  wide  and  12  feet  long. 
The  small  figures  in  a  line  under  the 
12  mark  represent  other  lengths  of 
boards.  To  find  the  number  of  board 
feet  in  a  piece  which  is  more  or  less  than 
12"  wide  and  from  8  to  15  ft.  long,  run 
down  the  column  under  the  12  mark 
until  the  proper  length  is  found.  Then 
run  along  either  to  the  right  or  left  un- 
til under  a  mark  on  the  outer  edge 
which  corresponds  to  the  proper  width 
of  the  board  and  the  small  figure  will 
be  the  required  value  in  board  feet. 

Since  a  board  12  feet  long  would 
have  as  many  board  feet  as  it  is  inches 
wide,  the  figures  are  omitted  for  this 
length.  Since  a  board  6  feet  long  would 
have  one-half  as  many  board  feet  as  it  is 
inches  wide,  this  length  is  also  omitted. 
If  a  board  is  less  than  8  feet  long  its 
board  measure  may  be  found  by  divid- 
ing its  double  by  two.  If  a  board  is 
longer  than  the  lengths  given  on  the 
scale,  divide  the  length  into  two  parts, 
find  the  board  measure  for  each  of  these 
and  add  them  together.     Don't  try  to 


1. 

«  wo* 

*.mm  at    — 

^■»» 

t0  ^  9  -^ 
^  ^  99 

itf «»           — 

cp».»  A    = 

" 

9         99 

CO  00^  a> 

^ 

~PI 

»9i*  ^     — 

fe- 

C- 

o  •  n  vj 

O  *"                   ~ 

W-» 

fe- 

«..o.0B    r 

^ 

m- 

*  CD  * 

-.  O  «  OD 

«     *          _ 

w-^ 

s-, 

>i>a«0    — 

E- 

E- 

9  9  99 

0.^.5  = 

P"C9 

E- 

E- 

E- 

a  »2  M 
to  C  ^  C 

-= 

~«o 

^ 

...-"^ 

E- 

E- 

*  o  —  "* 

3*"  w    = 

'~o 

z- 

E- 

^ 

E-r: 

^ 

Fig.  90. 


USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE 


199 


work  out  a  problem  on  the  Essex  board  measure  if  you  can 
do  it  quicker  in  your  head. 

Example.  How  many  board  feet  in  a  board  1"  thick, 
15  feet  long  and  8"  wide? 

Explanation.  Referring  to  Fig.  90  under  the  figure  12 
on  the  outer  edge  look  down  until  you  find  15,  which  is  the 
length  of  the  board.  Then  run  between  the  lines  to  the  left 
until  you  are  under  the  figure  8  on  the  outer  edge  of  the 
scale.  This  represents  the  width  of  the  board.  Here  you 
will  find  the  figure  10.     There  are  10  feet  B.M.  in  the  board. 

Example.  How  many  board  feet  in  a  board  2"  thick, 
22  feet  long  and  10"  wide? 

Explanation.  Divide  the  length  into  two  parts,  one  10 
ft.  and  one  12  ft.  We  know  at  once  that  a  board  10"  wide 
and  12  ft.  long  will  have  10  ft.  B.M.  Since  this  board  is 
2"  thick  this  part  will  contain  20  ft.  B.M.  For  the  part 
10  ft.  long  look  down  under  the  figure  12  to  find  10  and  to 
the  left  until  you  come  to  the  figure  10  on  the  outer  edge  of 
the  body.  Here  read  8-4  which  means  Sy'V  or  8|  ft.  B.M. 
Since  the  board  is  2"  thick  double  this  to  get  16|.  Adding 
this  to  the  value  20,  previously 
found  in  the  first  part,  we  get  36| 
ft.  B.M.  in  the  piece. 

167.  The  Diagonal  Scale.  Fig. 
91  shows  the  diagonal  scale  used 
on  some  steel  squares.  Its  purpose 
is  to  enable  the  workman  to  make 
measurements  to  the  hundredth  of 
an  inch.  A  square  one  inch  on  a 
side  is  divided  into  ten  equal  parts 
on    each    side.      In    one   direction 

these   lines   are   joined   with   lines  parallel  to  the  sides  of 
the  square.     In  the  other  direction  the  point  marked  0  is 


„0  1   2  3   4   5   6   7  8   9  10 

— r 


0123466789  10 


Fig.  91. 


200     ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 


joined  to  the  point 
1  on  the  opposite 
side.  You  will  now 
see  that  the  dis- 
tance on  the  line 
61  from  the  zero 
vertical  line  to  the 

diagonal  intersection  is  ^^jfth^  of  an  inch. 
In  like  manner  the  distance  from  the  zero 
vertical  line  to  the  diagonal  intersection 
on  hi  is  x^^ths  of  an  inch.  To  read 
.78"  on  the  scale,  using  a  pair  of  dividers 
you  place  one  point  on  the  intersection  of 
the  zero  vertical  line  with  the  horizontal 
line  iS.  The  other  divider  point  should 
be  extended  to  touch  the  diagonal  in- 
tersection on  iS  just  beyond  the  vertical 
line  marked  7.  The  distance  between  the 
divider  points  will  then  be  iVV+ifir  = 
■^%  =  .78,  which  is  the  required  distance. 
Read  tenths  on  the  horizontal  scale  and 
hundredths  on  the  vertical  scale. 

168.  The  Polygon  Scale.  This  scale 
is  useful  for  finding  the  correct  angle  to 
cut  sticks  of  lumber  so  that  they  will 
form  regular  polygons  when  fitted  to- 
gether. It  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  92.  On 
some  squares  this  scale  is  placed  along  the 
center  of  the  face  of  the  tongue.  The 
first  figure  indicates  the  number  of  sides 
in  the  polygon.  The  second  figure  indi- 
cates the  point  on  the  body,  and  the  third 
figure  the   point  on  the   tongue   that  is 


-  hj 


-   -»       «*       JW-E 


Ci> 


01 


0> 


OD 


01 


0)  ^ 


H  ^ 


y      ~z 


OD 


<D 


Fig.  92. 


USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE 


201 


made  to  coincide  with  the  edge  of  the  stick  in  order  to  get 
the  correct  angle  as  shown  in  Fig.  93.  If  it  is  desired  to 
cut  a  polygon  of  eight  sides  you  would  take  18  on  the 
body  and  7|  on  the  tongue  of  the  square.  Mark  the 
stick  along  the  edge  of  the  tongue  as  illustrated  in  the 
figure.  Eight  pieces  of  equal  length  cut  to  this  angle  will 
fit  together  to  make  an  eight-sided  figure. 

169.  Geometric  Applications.  If  the  workman  under- 
stands fully  the  properties  of  the  right  triangle  and  the 
applications   of  geometry,  he  will  have  but    little  trouble 


^2^ 


Mark  here 


Fig.  93. — Getting  Correct  Angle  for  a  Polygon  Frame. 


in  making  his  steel  square  serve  him  as  a  very  useful  tool. 
A  few  of  the  common  applications  are  given  here.  Others 
will  occur  to  the  practical  man  in  connection  with  his  daily 
work. 

170.  Hypotenuse  of  a  Right-angled  Triangle.  To  find 
the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle 
when  the  base  and  altitude  are  unequal,  lay  a  two-foot 
rule  across  the  square  with  the  zero  mark  of  the  rule  at  the 
point  on  the  body  which  corresponds  to  one  leg  of  the  tri- 
angle and  the  edge  of  the  rule  crossing  the  tongue  at  a  point 
corresponding  to  the  other  leg  of  the  triangle.  The 
reading  of  the  rule  will  give  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse. 

Example.  What  is  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a 
triangle  the  base  of  which  is  8  ft.  and  the  altitude  14  ft.? 


202    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Explanation.  In  this  case  it  is  convenient  to  allow  1" 
on  the  rule  and  on  the  square  to  represent  a  foot  in  the 
triangle.  Referring  to  Fig.  94,  we  place  the  zero  mark  of 
the  rule  on  the  8"  mark  on  the  body  and  lay  the  edge  of 
the  rule  across  the  14"  mark  on  the  tongue.  At  this  point 
the  rule  reads  16|".  This  means  that  the  hypotenuse  is 
16J  ft.  long  or,  expressing  this  in  feet  and  inches,  16'  Ij". 


'  I  1  'I  I  '  I  '  'I  I  1  1  I 


Fig.  94. — Finding  Length  of  Hypotenuse. 


171.  To  Divide  a  Line.  Suppose  we  wish  to  divide  the 
width  of  a  board  into  ten  equal  parts  for  ripping  into  strips. 
Lay  the  square  diagonally  across  the  board  so  that  the 
zero  mark  is  at  one  edge  of  the  board  and  the  10"  mark  is 
at  the  other  edge  as  shown  in  Fig.  95.  Then  make  a  mark 
exactly  at  each  one  of  the  inch  divisions  on  the  edge  of  the 
square.  Drawing  a  line  parallel  to  the  edge  of  the  board 
through  each  one  of  these  points  will  divide  the  board  into 
ten  equal  strips. 

172.  To  Bisect  an  Angle.    Measure  out  equal  distances 


USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE 


203 


on  each  leg  of  the  angle,  OA  and  OB  in  Fig.  96.     Hold  the 
square  so  that  the  same  figure  on  each  side  of  the  square 


Fig.  95.— Finding  Width  of  Strips. 

coincides  with  the  points  A  and  B.     The  vertex  or  point 
of  the  square  will  then  be  at  the  exact  middle  of  the  angle. 


Fig.  96. — Bisecting  an  Angle. 

Mark  this  point  D  and  join  it  with  a  straight  line  to  the 
vertex  of  the  angle  0.  The  line  OD  is  the  required  bisector 
of  the  angle. 


204    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

Summary  of  Chapter  XV 

93.  The  brace  measure  is  used  to  find  the  length  of  a 
diagonal  brace.     (Sec.  164.) 

94.  The  octagonal  scale  is  used  to  find  the  correct  angle 
for  dressing  a  square  stick  into  an  octagon.     (Sec.  165.) 

95.  The  Essex  board  measure  scale  is  used  to  find  the 
number  of  feet  B.M.  in  any  board.     (Sec.  166.) 

96.  The  diagonal  or  hundredth  scale  is  used  to  measure 
hundredths  of  an  inch.     (Sec.  167.) 

97.  The  polygon  scale  is  used  to  find  the  correct  angle  to 
cut  sticks  of  equal  length  to  form  polygons  having  from  five 
to  twelve  sides.     (Sec.  168.) 

98.  The  steel  square  may  be  used  to  find  the  length  of 
the  hypotenuse  of  any  right-angled  triangle.     (Sec.  170.) 

99.  The  steel  square  may  be  used  to  divide  a  given  Une 
into  any  number  of  equal  parts.     (Sec.  171.) 

100.  The  steel  square  may  be  used  to  bisect  an  angle. 
(Sec.  172.) 

PROBLEMS 

220.  Fiild  the  length  of  a  diagonal  brace  for  a  square  54"  on 
a  side. 

221.  Find  the  length  of  a  diagonal  brace  for  a  square  4'  9" 
on  a  side. 

222.  Find  the  length  of  a  diagonal  brace  for  a  square  10'  on 
a  side. 

223.  Draw  a  diagram  showing  how  to  lay  out  an  octagon  on 
a  stick  6"  square,  using  the  octagon  scale.  If  you  take  your  work 
from  Fig.  87  you  will  have  to  make  your  drawing  half  size. 

224.  Using  the  Essex  board  measure  scale  find  how  many 
board  feet  there  are  in  a  board  2"  thick,  9"  wide  and  16'  long. 

225.  How  many  feet  B.M.  are  there  in  16  pieces  li"XlO", 
26' long? 

226.  How  many  feet  B.M.  are  there  in  a  board  1"X14",  18' 
long? 


USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE"     205 

227.  A  six-sided  figure  each  side  of  which  is  18"  long  is  required. 
Tell  how  to  find  the  correct  angles  to  cut  the  boards. 

228.  What  is  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a  triangle  the 
base  of  which  is  6  ft.  long  and  the  altitude  10  ft.? 

229.  What  is  the  length  of  the  hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled 
triangle  16"  on  a  side? 

230.  Divide  a  line  which  is  6"  long  accurately  into  13  equal 
parts. 

231.  Construct  a  diagonal  scale  similar  to  the  one  shown  in 
Fig.  91.     Show  the  distance  .78"  on  your  diagram. 

232.  Bisect  a  45°  angle,  using  a  steel  square. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

USE  OF  THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE  IN  FRAMING. 
FLOOR  BRIDGING.  STAIR  BEAMS.  RAFTER 
FRAMING.  ROOF  PITCHES.  RAFTER  TABLE. 
ROOF  FRAMING.  HIP  OR  VALLEY  RAFTERS.  JACK 
RAFTERS 

Not  only  may  the  steel  square  be  used  for  the  purposes 
indicated  in  the  last  chapter,  but  it  may  also  be  used  very 
conveniently  in  the  processes  required  for  framing  a  building. 
As  everyone  knows,  it  may  readily  be  used  for  determining 


Fig.  97. — Cuts  for  Floor  Bridging. 

a  right  angle.  It  may  also  be  used  to  determine  many  of 
the  other  angles  to  which  it  is  necessary  to  cut  the  lumber 
in  framing.     These  angles  are  called  cuts  or  bevels. 

173.  To  Find  the  Cuts  for  Floor  Bridging.  Take  the 
width  of  the  joist  on  the  tongue  of  the  square  and  the  dis- 
tance between  the  joist  on  the  body.  Take  the  measure- 
ments on  opposite  sides  of  the  stick  as  shown  in  Fig.  97. 
The  tongue  will  give  the  cut  and  the  body  will  give  the 
length. 

206 


THE  CARPENTER'S  SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        207 

174.  To  Find  the  Cuts  on  a  Stair  Beam.  Suppose  the 
stair  is  to  be  laid  out  with  7|"  risers  and  9"  treads.  Then 
it  is  simply  necessary  to  lay  the  square  on  the  beam  in  such 
a  manner  that  the  reading  on  the  tongue  from  the  edge  of 
the  beam  is  7^"  and  a  similar  reading  on  the  body  is  9",  as 
shown  in  Fig.   98.     Mark   the  line   and   repeat  for  each 


Fig.  98. — Laying  out  Cuts  on  a  Stair  Beam. 


succeeding  step.  Remember  that  the  thickness  of  the  floor 
must  be  taken  into  account  when  laying  out  the  top  and 
bottom  steps. 

175.  Rafter  Framing.  Before  taking  up  the  subject  of 
roof  framing  it  is  necessary  to  explain  some  of  the  terms 
and  customs  commonly  used.  The  span  of  the  roof  is  the 
same  as  the  width  of  the  building  as  shown  in  Fig.  99.  The 
run  of  the  rafter  is  one-half  of  the  span  and  the  rise  is  the 
vertical    distance  from  the  top  of  the  plate  to  the  top  of 


208    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

the  ridge.  The  pitch  of  the  rafter  is  the  ratio  of  the  rise  to 
the  span.  The  rafter  length  is  the  distance  from  the  outside 
comer  of  the  plate  to  the  center  of  the  ridge.  The  exten- 
sion is  the  distance  from  the  outside  corner  of  the  plate  to 
the  end  of  the  rafter.  When  finding  the  actual  length  of  a 
rafter,  the  distance  from  the  outer  corner  of  the  plate  to  the 
center  of  the  ridge  is  first  found.     The  square  is  then  set  for 


Fig.  99.— Span  of  a  Roof. 


the  ridge  cut  as  explained  in  Sec.  177  and  one-half  the  width 
of  the  ridge  subtracted  in  the  direction  of  the  body  of  the 
square.  Sufficient  length  must  then  be  added  for  the  exten- 
sion.   The  result  will  be  the  exact  length  of  the  rafter. 

176.  Pitch.  The  most  common  pitches  are  indicated 
in  the  table.  They  can  be  found  on  the  steel  square  by 
laying  a  straightedge  across  the  square  with  one  end  on 
the  figure  12  on  the  body  and  the  other  end  on  that  figure 
of  the  tongue  which  corresponds  to  the  rise  as  illustrated  in 
Fig.  100. 


THE  CARPENTER'S   SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        209 


TABLE  XVI 
COMMON    ROOF    PITCHES 
i  pitch  IS  12  on  the  body  and    4  on  the  tongue. 


12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 


6 

8 
10 
12 
15 
18 


'  '  '  I  '  '  '  I  I  I  I  '^ I  r  I  I  I  I 

12 


12 
Fig.  100.— Finding  Pitch 


177.  To  Find  the  Cuts  for  a  Common  Rafter.     The  cut 

at  the  top  of  the  rafter  is  called  the  ridge  cut  or  the  plumb 
cut.  The  cut  at  the  lower  end  of  the  rafter  is  called  the 
bottom  cut  or  heel  cut. 

First,  to  find  the  plumb  cut  place  the  square  as  shown 
in  the  upper  position  of  Fig.  101.  Use  12  on  the  body  and 
other  figures  on  the  tongue,  depending  upon  the  pitch  of 
the  roof.  For  example,  if  the  rafter  is  to  be  set  at  one-third 
pitch  use  12  on  the  body  and  8  on  the  tongue  as  indicated 
in  the  table  above.     For  pitches  not  given  in  the  table 


210    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

multiply  the  pitch  by  2,  express  as  a  proportion  and  solve 
for  the  tongue  reading:  Thus,  for  one-fifth  pitch 


iX2  =  | 

2:  5::x:  12 

a:  =  244-5=4|. 


Ans. 


Next,  to  find  the  heel  cut  place  the  square  as  shown  in 
the  lower  portion  of  Fig.  101.     If  the  rafter  is  to  extend 


-  Mark  here 


X  Pitch 


Repeat  Plumb  cut  here 

Fig.  101. — Finding  Rafter  Cuts. 


beyond  the  plate,  the  square  is  again  set  so  as  to  give  the 
plumb  cut  indicated  in  the  figure.  The  process  is  repeated 
again  for  the  end  cut. 

178.  The  Rafter  Table.  The  rafter  table  found  on  the 
back  of  the  body  of  rafter  squares  or  framing  squares  is  used 
to  find  the  length  of  a  common  rafter  for  various  pitches. 
This  table  is  shown  in  Fig.  102.  The  graduations  on  the 
outside  edge  of  the  body  are  used  in  connection  with  the 


THE  CARPENTER'S    SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        211 


^NJ 


^0) 


table.  These  grad- 
u  a  t  i  o  n  s  are  in 
twelfths  and  the 
inches  may  be  used 
to  represent  either 
inches  or  feet  while 

the  twelfth  marks  represent  either 
twelfths  of  a  foot  (inches)  or  twelfths 
of  an  inch.  These  figures  on  the  edge 
when  making  use  of  the  table  corre- 
spond to  the  run  of  the  rafter.  To  use 
the  rafter  table,  look  at  the  left  end  of 
the  table  to  find  the  required  pitch. 
Then  under  the  mark  on  the  outer 
edge  which  corresponds  to  the  run  of 
the  rafter  in  feet  will  be  found  the 
required  length  in  feet,  inches  and 
twelfths  of  an  inch.  Thus  a  rafter  set 
at  one-half  pitch  with  a  run  of  ten  feet 
is  14'  ly\"  long.  Again  a  rafter  set  at 
quarter  pitch  with  a  run  of  12  ft.  is  13' 
5"  long. 

When  the  run  is  given  in  inches  the 
length  will  be  in  inches.  Thus,  a  rafter 
set  at  quarter  pitch  with  a  run  of  8" 
would  be  8i|"4-i\  of  -^-^" ,  which,  neg- 
lecting the  added  fraction,  is  approxi-  pi 
mately  Sji".  If  the  run  is  given  in  both 
feet  and  inches  find  each  separately  and 
add  the  lengths  together. 

Example.  What  is  the  length  of  a 
common  rafter  set  at  one-third  pitch 
with  a  run  of  10  ft.  6  in.? 


—      RAFTERS 

1      FEET-INCHES  

--*  AND  TWELFTHS 


^0) 


-co 


01 


0)  = 


3~ 


00 


<0    = 


o  = 


Fig.  102. 


212    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  GUILDERS 

For  run  of  10  ft.  the  rafter  length  is  12'  0/^" 
For  run  of  6"  the  rafter  length  is  1^" 


Total  length  12'  7^\"  Ans. 

Explanation.  Looking  for  the  run  in  feet,  we  first  find 
that  the  length  for  a  10  ft.  run  will  be  12'  0^\".  Now  finding 
the  length  for  the  run  in  inches  we  get  7^^",  disregarding 
the  last  figure  in  the  table.  Adding  these  figures  together 
gives  12'  1  ^^"  for  the  distance  from  the  outer  edge  of  the 
plate  to  the  center  of  the  ridge.  For  the  actual  length 
deduct  one-half  the  thickness  of  the  ridge  and  add  sufficient 
for  the  extension. 

179.  Roof  Framing.  Up  to  this  point  we  have  taken 
up  only  the  lengths  and  cuts  for  common  rafters.  Any  roof 
which  is  framed  for  gables,  hips  and  valleys  will  require 
rafters  of  various  lengths  having  both  plumb  cuts  and  side 
cuts.  Fig.  103  shows  the  framing  for  such  a  roof.  The 
ridge  board  marked  A  is  the  piece  at  the  center  to  which 
the  rafters  are  nailed.  The  plate  marked  B  is  the  board 
placed  on  top  of  the  studs  to  which  the  foot  of  each  rafter  is 
secured.  The  common  rafters,  C,  are  those  which  set  square 
against  the  ridge  board  and  which  have  no  side  cut.  Hip 
rafters  are  those  marked  D.  Valley  rafters  are  those 
marked  E.  Jack  rafters,  marked  F,  are  those  the  upper  end 
of  which  set  against  the  hip  rafter.  Cripple  rafters — rafters 
having  no  foot — span  the  space  between  the  ridge  board 
and  valley  rafter  or  between  hip  and  valley  rafters.  They 
are  marked  G  in  the  illustration. 

180.  Length  of  Hip  or  Valley  Rafters.  The  length  of 
the  hip  rafter  is  the  hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle, 
one  side  of  which  is  the  common  rafter  and  the  other  side 
is  the  distance  on  the  plate  from  the  foot  of  the  hip  rafter  to 


Pi 


tat 

"a 


214    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

the  foot  of  the  common  rafter.  The  length  of  the  valley 
rafter  is  also  the  hypotenuse  of  a  similar  triangle,  and  for 
this  reason  the  following  example  and  explanation  will  apply 
to  a  valley  rafter  as  well. 


/ 

4  . 

A 

A 

// 

>l 

A 

^ 

'  ' 

r 

< 

— 4! >! 

^ 

\ 

\ 

a  . 

(. 

\ 

Fia.  104.— Hip  Rafter. 

Example.     What  is  the  length  of  the  hip  rafter  shown 
in  Fig.  104? 

5' 8"  =  5.66' 

5.662  =  32 
42  =  16 
16+32=48 
V48  =  6.93 

6.93' =  6'  11  A"  Ans. 


THE  CARPENTER'S    SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        215 

Explanation.  The  length  of  the  common  rafter  having 
4  ft.  run  for  one-half  pitch  roof  is  5'  8".  The  distance  from 
the  foot  of  the  hip  rafter  to  the  foot  of  the  common  rafter 
is  4'.  The  hip  rafter  is  the  hypotenuse  of  this  triangle. 
Solving  by  finding  the  square  root  of  the  sum  of  the  squares 
of  the  base  and  altitude  gives  6'  11^"  for  the  length  of  this 
rafter.  Notice  that  the  hip  rafter  is  not  shown  in  its  true 
length  in  the  figure. 

181.  Cuts  for  Hip  or  Valley  Rafters.  The  rise  for  a 
hip  or  valley  rafter  is  the  same  as  the  rise  for  the  common 
rafter.  The  run  of  a  hip  rafter  is  the  horizontal  distance 
from  the  outside  comer  of  the  plate  at  the  foot  to  a  vertical 
line  from  the  center  of  the  ridge  against  which  it  rests. 
This  is  equivalent  to  the  length  of  the  corresponding  com- 
mon rafter.  In  every  case  the  ratio  of  the  run  for  the  hip 
or  valley  rafter  to  the  run  of  the  common  rafter  is  as  17  is  to 
12.  To  find  the  plumb  and  heel  cuts  for  a  hip  or  valley 
rafter  for  a  given  roof  pitch  we  proceed  exactly  as  for  a 
common  rafter,  but  we  use  the  17  mark  on  the  body  instead 
of  the  12  mark. 

Example.  What  figures  should  be  used  in  marking  the 
plumb  and  heel  cuts  for  the  hip  rafter  of  a  roof  of  one-third 
pitch  when  the  run  of  the  common  rafter  is  8  ft.? 

Explanation.  To  find  the  plumb  and  heel  cut  of  a  com- 
mon rafter  having  one-third  pitch  use  12  on  the  body  and 
8  on  the  tongue  as  explained  in  Sec.  177.  For  the  hip 
rafter  use  17  on  the  body  and  8  on  the  tongue. 

182.  Hip  Rafter  Table.  The  necessary  information  for 
finding  the  side  cuts  for  hip  and  valley  rafters  and  the  length 
and  side  cuts  for  jack  rafters  may  be  found  in  the  hip  rafter 
table  shown  in  Fig.  105. 

In  the  table  under  the  heading  PITCH  is  given  the  read- 
ing for  the  pitches  in  common  use.     The  fractions  represent 


216    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS   AND  BUILDERS 


i|i|i|'|T|'i'|'i'|'i'|'i'|'i'|'i'l''T''l''T'' 


=-  PAID.  APPO.  FOR 


—  o 

CO 

o 

in 

;;; 

n 

a 

CD 

— 

M 

—  ^ 

-  Z 

:-     o 

=-  * 
= — * 
=-  o 
u 

M 

0>~ 

m 

CO 

CM 

o 

to 

» 

o~ 

in 

- 

e 
e 

a> 

ee 

0) 

» 

03 

«—    _ 

-  ,3 

-  a 

- o 

(O 

s 

?; 

a 

«0 

t-    _ 

Fia.  105. 


the  pitches  and  the 
figures  to  the  right 
are  the  ones  used 
for  determining  the 
plumb  and  heel  cuts 
of  common  rafters. 
The  next  set  of  figures  under  the 
heading  H I P  indicate  the  length  of  the 
hip  and  valley  rafters  for  each  foot  of 
run  for  the  common  rafter  of  the  differ- 
ent pitches.  To  show  how  this  is  used 
let  us  take  the  same  example  that  is 
worked  out  above. 

Example.  What  is  the  length  of  the 
hip  rafter  shown  in  Fig.  104? 

1-8-10x4  =  4-32-40 

4-32-40  =  4'  32f|"  =  6'  11,V'  =  6'  11^" 

Ans. 

Explanation.  From  the  table  for 
every  foot  run  of  the  common  rafter  the 
hip  rafter  is  1'  8j|"  long.  Since  the  run 
of  the  common  rafter  is  4'  we  multiply 
this  by  4  and  reducing  the  product  to  its 
simplest  form  find  the  length  of  the  hip 
rafter  to  be  6'  11 3",  which  is  approxi- 
mately the  same  value  that  we  got  by 
solving  the  triangle. 

183.  Jack  Rafters.  The  next  set  of 
figures  on  the  hip  rafter  table  gives  the 
length  of  the  shortest  jack  rafter  when 
they  are  spaced   16"  on  center.     Since 


THE  CARPJi.iNTER'S    SQUARE   IN   FRAMING        217 


Mark  here 


these  rafters  are  evenly  spaced  the  second  will  be  twice  as 
long  as  the  first  and  the  third  three  times  as  long  as  the 
first.    The  lengths  for  24"  spacing  are  also  given. 

Example.  Find  the  length  of  the  third  jack  rafter  set 
at  one-half  pitch. 

22f"X3  =  67r  =  5'  7|"  Ans. 

Explanation.  The  first 
jack  rafter  set  16"  on  centers 
at  one-half  pitch  will  be  22|" 
long  as  indicated  in  the  table. 
The  third  rafter  will  be  three 
times  as  long  as  this  or  5'  7|". 

The  plumb  and  heel  cuts 
for  jack  rafters  are  the  same 
as  for  common  rafters  of  the 
same  pitch.  To  find  the  side 
cut  use  the  next  set  of  figures 
to  the  left  in  the  table.  For 
one-half  pitch  take  17  on  the 
body  and  12  on  the  tongue 
and  and  mark  the  rafter  as 
shown  in  Fig.  106. 

184.  Side  Cut  for  Hip 
Rafters.  To  find  the  side  cut 
for  hip  or  valley  rafters  use 
the  figures  under  the  heading 

HIP  marked  SIDE-CUT.  For  one-half  pitch  the  setting 
on  the  square  will  be  8  on  the  body  and  11  on  the  tongue. 
Mark  the  cut  along  the  tongue. 

185.  Length  of  Hip  or  Valley  Rafters.  The  remainder 
of  the  table  indicates  the  length  of  the  hip  or  valley  rafters 
for  the  run  of  the  corresponding  common  rafter  for  the 


Fig.  106.— Side  Cut  for  Rafter. 


218    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

various  pitches.  Find  the  run  of  the  common  rafter  on  the 
outside  edge  of  the  scale.  Under  this  figure  will  be  found 
the  length  of  the  hip  or  valley  rafter  for  the  corresponding 
pitch. 

Example.  Find  the  length  of  hip  rafter  required  for 
one-half  pitch  roof  when  the  building  is  24  ft.  wide. 

Explanation.  The  run  of  the  common  rafter  is  one-half 
the  width  of  the  building.  Under  the  figure  12  on  the  outer 
edge  and  to  the  left  between  the  lines  which  represent  one- 
half  pitch  find  the  figures  20—9—5.  This  means  that  the 
hip  rafter  is  20'  9^%"  long. 

186.  Cuts  for  Cripple  Rafters.  The  plumb  and  side  cuts 
for  cripple  rafters  are  the  same  as  for  jack  rafters.  The 
cuts  at  the  bottom  of  a  cripple  rafter  are  the  same  as  those 
at  the  top. 

187.  Actual  Lengths.  In  all  of  the  above  tables  the 
lengths  given  are  from  the  outside  edge  of  the  plate  to  the 
center  of  the  ridge  or  hip.  To  find  the  actual  length  deduct 
one-half  the  width  of  the  ridge  or  hip  and  add  sufficient 
material  for  the  extension  at  the  eaves. 


THE  CARPENTER'S   SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        219 


Summary  of  Chapter  XVI 

101.  The  steel  square  may  be  used  to  find  the  cuts  for 
floor  bridging  as  explained  in  Sec.  173. 

102.  It  may  be  used  to  find  the  cuts  on  a  stair  beam. 
(Sec.  174.) 

103.  It  may  be  used   to  find  the  cuts  on  a  common 
rafter.     (Sec.  177.) 


Fig.  107.— Struts. 


104.  The  rafter  table  may  be  used  to  find  the  length  of 
common  rafters  required  for  various  runs  and  pitches. 
(Sec.  178.) 

105.  The  length  of  a  hip  or  valley  rafter  is  equal  to  the 
hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle,  the  base  of  which  is 
the  distance  from  the  foot  of  the  hip  rafter  to  the  foot  of 
the  common  rafter  and  the  altitude  of  which  is  equal  to  the 
length  of  the  common  rafter.     (Sec.  180.) 

106.  The  plumb  and  heel  cuts  for  hip  and  valley  rafters 
may  be  found  by  using  17  on  the  body  instead  of  12  as 
explained  in  Sec.  181. 


220    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

107.  The  hip  rafter  table  may  be  used  to  find  the  plumb 
and  heel  cuts  of  common,  hip  and  jack  rafters;  to  find  the 
side  cuts  of  these  rafters,  and  to  find  the  length  of  hip, 
valley  and  jack  rafters.     (Sec.  182.) 


\ 

/ 

/ 

1 
\ 

> 

1 

\ 

\ 

/. 

/ 

\ 

)_ 

"^     N 

/    ' 

\ 

/ 

> 

/ 

0> 

\ 

1 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

, 

-26- 


,2x6  Ridge 


.2z6^It> 


Jack  Bafteis 

Fig.  108.— Roof  Framing. 


108.  The  cuts  for  cripple  rafters  are  the  same  as  for  jack 
rafters  except  that  the  bottom  cuts  are  like  the  top  cuts. 
(Sec.  186.) 

109.  The  actual  length  of  the  rafters  is  found  by 
deducting  one-half  of  the  ridge  or  hip  and  adding  sufficient 
material  for  the  overhang.     (Sec.  187.) 


THE  CARPENTER'S   SQUARE  IN  FRAMING        221 


PROBLEMS 

233.  Ten  inch  floor  joists  are  placed  16"  on  centers.  Draw  a 
diagram  to  scale  showing  how  to  find  the  top  and  bottom  cuts 
for  the  bridging. 


Fig.  109.— Plan  of  Roof. 


234.  A  stair  joins  two  floors,  the  second  of  which  is  10'  3"  above 
the  first.  Twice  the  riser  plus  the  tread  should  about  equal  24". 
Make  a  sketch  showing  how  to  lay  out  the  cuts  on  the  stair  beam. 

235.  A  building  is  24'  wide.  The  roof  ridge  is  8'  above  the 
plate.    What  is  the  pitch  of  the  roof? 


222    ARITHMETIC  FOR  CARPENTERS  AND  BUILDERS 

236.  A  building  is  32'  wide.  The  roof  ridge  is  16'  above  the 
plate.  How  would  you  determine  the  plumb  and  heel  cuts  for  the 
common  rafters? 

237.  The  roof  of  a  building  has  a  pitch  of  three-eighths.  How 
would  you  find  the  plumb  and  heel  cuts  of  the  common  rafters? 

238.  What  is  the  length  of  a  common  rafter  set  at  five-twelfths 
pitch  when  the  run  is  12'  6"? 

239.  What  would  be  the  length  of  the  hip  rafters  for  the  roof 
in  the  problem  above? 

240.  What  is  the  length  of  a  valley  rafter  for  a  roof  of  one-half 
pitch  when  the  span  is  16  ft. 

241.  Show  how  to  find  the  cuts  for  the  struts  marked  a  and  I 
in  Fig.  107. 

Hint. — Struts  b  are  perpendicular  to  the  rafters. 

242.  By  using  the  hip  rafter  table  wherever  possible  find  the 
number  of  lineal  feet  2x6,  2x4  and  4x4  required  for  the  roof 
framing  in  Fig.  108. 

Note. — ^The  pitch  of  the  lower  section  is  not  to  be  found  in 
the  rafter  table. 

243.  Show  how  to  find  the  side  cuts  for  the  jack  rafters  shown 
in  Fig.  108. 

244.  Show  how  to  find  the  side  cuts  for  the  hip  rafters  shown 
in  Fig.  108. 

245.  Using  the  hip  rafter  table,  find  the  length  of  a  hip  rafter 
for  a  roof  having  one-fourth  pitch  when  the  building  is  18  ft.  wide. 

246.  Find  the  actual  lengths  of  all  the  rafters  in  the  roof  shown 
in  Fig.  109.  Make  a  roof  framing  plan  to  accompany  your  solution. 
Space  the  rafters  16"  on  centers. 


I 

4 


INDEX 


Abbreviations,  2 
Accounts,  wage,  55 
Accuracy  of  results,  66 
Actual  length  of  rafters,  218 
Acute  angle.  An,  161 
Adding  feet  and  inches,  2 
Allowance  for  dressing,  143 
Altitude  of  right  triangle,  to  find, 

131 
Altitude  of  triangle,  130 
Analysis  of  problems  in  percent- 
age, 83 
Angle,  An,  161 

acute,  161 

obtuse,  161 

right,  161 
Angle,  designating  an,  161 
Angle,  to  bisect,  164 
Angles,  to  construct,  167 
Angular  measure,  162 
Apex  of  a  pyramid,  175 
Arc  of  a  circle,  162 
Area,  108 

of  a  circle,  132 

of  a  cylindrical  surface,  178 

of  a  pyramid,  175 

of  a  rectangle,  108 

of  a  square,  108 

of  surface  of  a  cone,  180 

of  a  triangle,  174 


Area  covered  by  shingles,  table  of, 
152 

Assets,  54 

Avoirdupois  system  of  weight,  107 

B 

Bank  accounts,  50 

balance,  51 

check,  51 

deposit,  50 

pass  book,  50 
Barrel,  number  of  gallons  in,  134 
Base  of  triangle,  130 
Batter  Boards,  166 
Bearing  power  of  soils,  115 
Belts,  rule  for  the  width  of,  74 
Bisect  an  angle,  to,  164 

with  the  steel  square,  202 
Bisector,  perpendicular,   to  find, 

163 
Board,  142 
Board  feet  in  lumber  of  different 

widths,  table  of,  148 
Board  feet,  rule  for,  76 
Board  foot,  147 
Board  measure,  Essex,  197 
Board  measure,  to  find,  148 
Boards,  sizes  of,  145 
Body  of  steel  square,  195 
Bottom  cuts  for  rafters,  209 
Brace  measure,  195 

223 


224 


INDEX 


British    system   of   weights   and 

measures,  105 
Broken  line,  A,  160 
Building  estimates,  57 
Building  material,  weight  of,  114 


Cancellation,  33 
Capacity,  measures  of,  106 
Capacity  of  cisterns  and  circular 

tanks,  133 
Carpenters'  square,  195 
Cement  and  concrete  mixtures,  92 
Center  of  an  arc  or  circle,  to  find, 

167 
Changing  a  common  fraction  to  a 

decimal,  67 
Changing  a  decimal  to  a  common 

fraction,  66 
Changing  a  fraction  to  a  per  cent, 

82 
Changing  improper  fractions,  15 
Changing  mixed  numbers,  14 
Changing  whole  numbers  to  im- 
proper fractions,  14 
Check  for  addition,  78 

for  division,  79 

for  multipUcation,  79 

for  subtraction,  78 
Chord,  A,  162 
Circle,  109 

arc  of,  162 

circumference,  109 

diameter,  109 

radius,  109 
Circle,  to  find  area  of,  132 
Circle,  to  find  radius  when  area  is 

given,  133 
Circular  measure,  162 


Circumference  of  a  circle,  109 
Circumference,  to  find,  110 
Cisterns  and  circular  tanks,  ca- 
pacities of,  133 
Common  rafters,  212 

to  find  cuts  for,  209 
Comparative  values,  liquid  and 

dry  measure,  107 
Compound  fractions,  41 
Compound  interest,  88 
Concrete,  quantities  of  materials 

per  cubic  yard,  117 
Cone,  A,  180 

frustum  of,  180 

slant  height  of,  180 

vertex,  180 

volume  of,  187 

volume  of  frustum  of,  188 
Construct  a  right  angle  to,  165 
Counting  lumber,  149 
Cripple  rafters,  212 

cuts  for,  218 
Crow-bar,  100 
Cube  root,  124 

to  find,  129 
Cube,  volume  of,  112 
Cubic  foot,  112 
Cubic  inch,  112 
Cubic  measure,  106 
Curved  fine.  A,  160 
Curved  surface.  A,  160 
Cylinder,  A,  178 

right,  178 
Cylinder,  volume  of,  183 
Cylindrical  surface,  area  of,  178 

D 

Decimal  equivalents  of  the  frac- 
tions of  an  inch,  69 


INDEX 


225 


Decimal  fractions,  60 

addition,  62 

division,  64 

multiplication,  63 

reading,  61 

subtraction,  63 

writing,  60 
Decimal  point.  The,  48 
Degrees,  162 

Designating  an  angle,  161 
Diagonal  scale,  199 
Diameter  of  a  circle,  109 

to  find.  111 
Difference,  4 
Dimension  lumber,  142 

sizes  of,  146 
Discounts  and  list  prices,  86 
Divide  a  line,   to,  with  the  steel 

square,  202 
Dividend,  5 
Dividing  a  whole  number  by  a 

fraction,  41 
Division  of  feet  and  inches,  5 
Divisor,  5 
Dressed  finishing  lumber,  sizes  of, 

146 
Dressed  stock,  142 
Dressing,  allowance  for,  143 
Dry  measure,  table  of,  107 

E 

Eight  square  scale,  196 
EUipse,  The,  168 

major  axis,  169 

minor  axis,  169 
Essex  board  measure  scale,  197 
Estimates,  building,  57 
Evolution,  124 

practical  applications,  129 


Extension  of  rafter,  208 
Extracting  square  root,  directions 

for,  127 
Extremes  of  a  proportion,  94 


Factors,  32 

Feet  board  measure,  76 

Finishing  lumber,  142 

Floor  bridging,  to  find  cuts  for, 

206 
Flooring,  107 

to  find  amount  required,  150 
Foot,  1 

Footings,  to  find  size  of,  116 
Force  arm,  98 
Formulas,  76 

how  to  use,  76 
Fraction,  terms  of  a,  10 
Fractions,  10 

adding,  20 

changing  to  a  per  cent,  82 

compound,  41 

denominator,  11 

division  of,  39 

improper,  12 

multiplication  of  mixed  num- 
bers, and,  29 

multiplying  a  group  of  whole 
numbers  and,  31 

numerator,  11 

of  an  inch,  12 

powers  of,  123 

product  of  two,  30 

product  of  whole  numbers  and, 
29 

proper,  11 

reading,  11 

reduction  to  higher  terms,  13 


226 


INDEX 


Fractions,    reduction    to     lower 
terms,  13 

subtracting,  20 

writing,  11 
Framing  lumber,  sizes  of,  147 
Framing,  rafter,  207 

roof,  212 
Framing  squares,  210 
Frustum  of  a  cone,  180 

volume  of,  188 
Frustum  of  a  pyramid,  175 

volume  of,  188 
Fulcrum,  98 

G 

Gallons  of  water  per  cubic  foot, 

134 
Gallons  of  water  to  a  barrel,  134 
Geometric  applications  of  the  steel 

square,  201 
Geometry,  160 
uses  of,  160 

H 

Heel  cut  for  rafter,  209 
Hexagon,  170 

to  construct,  170 
Hexagonal  pyramid,  176 
Hip  rafters,  212 

side  cut  for,  217 
Hip  rafter  table,  215 
Hip  or  valley  rafters,  cuts  for,  215 

length  of,  212,  217 
Hypotenuse  of  a  right  triangle, 
130 

to  find,  130 
Hypotenuse  of  a  right  triangle, 
steel  square  method,  201 


Inch,  1 
Interest,  87 

compound,  88 
Inverse  proportion,  94 
Inverse  ratio,  91 
Involution,  122 

practical  apphcations,  129 


Jack  rafters,  212 
length  of,  216 


Least  common  denominator,  15 

to  find,  17 

to  reduce  to,  19 
Length,  measures  of,  105 
Length  of  lumber,  standard,  145 
Levers,  98 

arrangement  of,  99 

force  arm,  98 

fulcrum,  98 

types,  99 

weight  arm,  98 
LiabiUties,  54  . 
Line,  A,  160 

broken,  160 

curved,  160 

straight,  160 
Liquid  measure,  table  of,  106 
List  prices  and  discounts,  86 
Lumber,  counting,  149 

measurement  of,  147 

weight  of,  113 

width  of,  144 
Lumber  tally  book,  149 
Lumber  terms,  142 


INDEX 


227 


Lumber,  board,  142 

dressed  stock,  142 

plank,  142 

rough  stock,  142 

scantling,  142 

timber,  142 
Lumber  trade  customs,  142 

M 

Major  axis  of  ellipse,  169 
Material  lists,  153 
Means  of  a  proportion,  94 
Measurement  of  lumber,  147 
Measures  of  capacity,  106 

of  surface,  106 

of  volume,  106 

of  weight,  107 
Measuring  materials  for  concrete, 

92 
Measuring  surface  and  volumes, 

189 
Metric    system    of    weights    and 

measures,  105 
Mile,  2 

Minor  axis  of  ellipse,  169 
Minuend,  4 
Minutes,  162 
Mixed  numbers,  12 

adding,  26 

dividing,  41 

multiplication  of  fractions  and 
29 

multiplying,  32 

subtracting,  27 

working  with,  26 
Mixtures,   cement  and  concrete, 

92 
Money,  47 

addition,  48 


Money  division,  50 

multiplication,  49 

subtraction,  49 
Money  sums,  writing  and  reading, 

47 
Multiplicand,  5 
Multiplier,  5 
Multiplying  feet  and  inches,  5 

N 

Numbers,  mixed,  12 
Numerator,  11 

O 

Obtuse  angle,  An,  161 
Octagon,  170 

to  construct,  171 
Octagonal  scale,  196 
Of  means  times,  30 


Parallelogram,  169 

Pay  roll,  55 

Percentage,  82,  83  T 

amount,  83 

analysis  of  problems,  83 

base,  83 

difference,  83 

meaning  of  term's,  83 

rate,  83 
Per  centum,  meaning  of,  82 
Perpendicular   bisector,    to    find, 
163 

to  erect  at  any  point  on  a  line, 
165 
Pi=x  =  3.1416,  110 
Pitch  of  a  roof,  208 
Plane  surface.  A,  160 


228 


INDEX 


Plank,  142 
Plate,  212 
Plumb  cut,  209 
Point,  A,  160 
Polygon  scale,  200 
Polygons,  169 

hexagon,  170 

octagon,  170 

parallelogram,  169 

quadrilateral,  169 

rectangle,  170 

side,  169 

square,  170 

triangle,  169 

vertex  of,  169 
Powers,  122 

base,  122 

exponents,  122 

of  common  fractions,  124 
Principal,  87 
Prism,  185 

right,  185 

volume  of,  185 
Product,  5 
Profits,  87 

rroof  of  square  root,  128 
Proportion,  94 

extremes,  94 

inverse,  94 

levers,  99 

meaning  of,  94 

means,  94 

solving  a,  94 

statement  of  a,  96 

statements  about  a,  95 
Problems,  43 

classes  of,  42 

conclusion,  42 

operation,  42 


Problems,  soluticHi  of,  42 

statement  of,  42 
Problems,  analysis  of  in  percent- 
age, 83 
Problems  in  percentage,  solution 

of,  85 
Pulley  sizes,  rule  for,  73 
Pyramid,  175 

apex,  175 

frustum,  175 

right,  175 

vertex,  175 

volume  of,  185 

volume  of  frustum  of,  188 
Pyramidal  roof,  176 

Q 

Quadrant,  162 

Quadrilateral,  169 

Quantity  of  materials  per  cubic 

yard  of  concrete,  117 
Quotient,  5 

R 

Radical  sign,  124 
Radius  of  a  circle,  109 

to  find.  111 

to  find  when  area  is  given,  133 
Rafter,  common,  to  find  cuts,  for, 

209 
Rafter  extension,  208 
Rafter  framing,  207 
Rafter,  hip,  side  cuts  for,  217 
Rafter,  hip,  table,  215 
Rafter,  length,  208 
Rafter,  pitch  of,  208 
Rafter  rise,  207 
Rafter  run,  207 


INDEX 


229 


Rafter  squares,  210 
Rafter  table,  210 
Rafters,  212 

common,  212 

cripple,  212 

hip,  212 

jack,  212 

valley,  212 
Rafters,  actual  length  of,  218 
Rafters,  cripple,  cuts  for,  218 
Rafters,  hip,  side  cuts  for,  217 
Rafters,  jack,  length  of,  216 
Rafters,  length  of  hip  or  valley, 

212 
Ratio,  91 

inverse,  91 

meaning  of,  92 
Receipt,  54 
Rectangle,  170 

area  of,  108 
Rectangular  block,  volume  of,  112 
Ridge  board,  212 
Ridge  cut,  209 
Right  angle.  A,  161 

to  construct,  165 
Eight  triangle,  130 

altitude,  130 

base,  130 

hypotenuse,  130 
Right  prism,  185 
Rise  of  a  rafter,  207 
Rod,  2 

Roof  framing,  212 
Roots,  124 

imperfect,  124 

index,  124 

radical  sign,  124 
Rough  stock,  142 
Rules,  73 


Rules  for  pulley  sizes,  73 
for  the  width  of  belts,  74 
using  letters  in,  76 

Run  of  a  rafter,  207 

S 

Scantling,  142 
Seconds,  162 
Sector,  A,  163 
Segment,  A,  163 

Shingles,  area  covered  by,  table 
of,  152 

to  find  amount  of,  151 
Short  methods,  78 

addition,  78 

division,  79 

multiphcation,  79 

subtraction,  78 
Side  of  a  square,  to  find,  129 
Sign  of  division,  10 
Significance  of  position,  61 
Sizes  of  common  boards,  145 
Sizes  of  dimension  lumber,  146 
Sizes  of  dressed  finishing  lumber, 

146 
Sizes  of  framing  lumber,  147 
Slant  height  of  a  cone,  180 
Slopes,  97 

Soils,  bearing  power  of,  115 
Solid,  A,  161 

Solution  of  problems  in  percent- 
age, 85 
Solving  a  proportion,  94 
Span  of  a  roof,  207 
Square,  170 

area  of,  108 

to  find  side  of,  129 
Square  of  roof  surface,  151 
Square  or  surface  measi  re,  108 


230 


INDEX 


Square  root,  124 

directions  for  extracting,  127 

periods,  125 

proof  of,  128 

to  find,  125 

to  locate  decimal  point,  126 
Square,  steel,  195 

back,  195 

body,  195 

face,  195 

tongue,  195 
Stair  beam,  to  find  cuts  on,  207 
Standard  lengths  of  lumber,  145 
Statement,  52 

Statement  of  a  proportion,  96 
Statements  about  a  proportion,  95 
Steel  square,   geometric  applica- 
tions, 201 
Stone  measure,  106 
Straight  line.  A,  160 
Strip  count,  144 
Subtracting  feet  and  inches,  4 
Subtrahend,  4 
Surface,  A,  160 

curved,  160 

cylindrical,  area  of,  178 

plane,  160 
Surface,  measures  of,  106 
Surface,  testing  a  plane,  161 
Surfaces  and  volumes,  measuring, 
189 


Table  of  area  covered  by  shingles, 
152 
avoirdupois  weight,  107 
bearing  power  of  soils,  116 
board  feet  in  lumber  in  differ- 
ent widths,  148 


Table  of  common  cubic  measure, 
106 
common  linear  measure,  105 
common  liquid  measure,  106 
comparative    values    of    liquid 

and  dry  measure,  107 
decimals  of  an  inch  for  each  ^, 

68 
dry  measure,  107 
quantities  of  material  per  cubic 

yard  of  concrete,  117 
sizes  of  dimension  lumber,  146 
weight  of  lumber  per  cubic  foot, 

114 
weight  of  various  building  ma- 
terials per  cubic  foot,  114 
Tally  book,  lumber,  149 
Terms  of  a  ratio,  92 
Testing  a  plane  surface,  161 
Timber,  142 
Time  book,  55 
Tongue  of  steel  square,  195 
Trammel  method  of  constructing 

ellipse,  169 
Triangle,  130,  169 
area  of,  174 


U 

Units  of  length,  1 
Using  letters  in  rules,  76 


Valley  rafters,  212 
cuts  for,  215 
length  of,  212,  217 
Vertex  of  a  cone,  180 
Vertex  of  a  pyramid,  175 


INDEX 


231 


Volume,  183 

measures  of,  106 

of  a  cone,  187 

of  a  cylinder,  183 

of  a  prism,  184 

of  a  pyramid,  185 
Volumes  and  surfaces,  measuring, 
189 

W 

Wage  accounts,  55 
Weight  arm,  98 


Weight,  avoirdupois,  table  of,  107 
Weight  of  building  material,  114 
Weight  of  lumber,  113 

per  cubic  foot,  table  of,  114 
Weight  measures  of,  107 
Weights  and  measures,  105 
Width  of  belts,  rule  for,  74 
Width  of  lumber,  144 


Yard,  1 


THE  WILEY  TECHNICAL  SERIES 

EDITED   BY 

JOSEPH   M.   JAMESON 


A  series  of  carefully  adapted  texts  for  use  in  technical, 
vocational,  and  industrial  schools.  The  subjects  treated 
will  include  Applied  Science;  Household  and  Agricultural 
Chemistry;  Electricity;  Electrical  Power  and  Machinery; 
Applied  Mechanics;  Drafting  and  Design;  Steam;  Gas 
Engines;  Shop  Practice;  Applied  Mathematics;  Agriculture; 
Household  Science,  etc. 

The  following  texts  are  announced;  others  are  being 
added  rapidly: 

ELECTRICITY 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  ELECTRICITY;  For  Technical  Students. 

By  W.  H.  TiMBiE,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering  and  Indus- 
trial Practice,  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology.  Second 
Edition,  Rev\Titten.  xi4-624  pages,  5}4  hy  8.  428  figures.  Cloth, 
S3. .50  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  ELEMENTS  OF  ELECTRICITY. 

5  by  73^:4.     Paper  cover,  50  cents  net. 

THE  ESSENTIALS  OF  ELECTRICITY;  A  Text-book  for  Wire- 
men  and  the  Electrical  Trades.  By  W.  II.  Ti.\itfiK,  Massa- 
chusetts Institute  of  Technology,  xiii+271  pages,  5  by  734- 
222  figures.     Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  ESSENTIALS  OF  ELECTRIC- 
ITY.    5  by  7}4-    Paper  cover,  25  cents  7iet. 

CONTINUOUS  AND  ALTERNATING  CURRENT  MACHIN- 
ERY. By  J.  H.  MoRECROFT,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering, 
Columbia  University.  ix-|-466  pages,  5}i  by  8.  288  figures. 
Cloth,  $2.75  net. 

12/18/25 


CONTINUOUS  AND  ALTERNATING  CURRENT  MACHIN- 
ERY PROBLEMS,  liy  W.  T.  Ryan,  E.K.,  Professor  <if  EU-ptric 
Power  Engineering,  The  University  of  Minnesota,  vii+37  pages, 
5]4  by  8.     Cloth,  50  cents  net. 

ALTERNATING  CURRENT  ELECTRICITY  AND  ITS  APPLI- 
CATION TO  INDUSTRY.  By  W.  H.  Timbie,  and  H.  H. 
HiGBiE,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering,  University  of 
Michigan.  First  Course.  x+.'i34  pages,  51  by  8.  389  figures. 
Cloth,  $3.50  net. 

Second  Course,  ix+729  pages.  5i  by  8.  357  figures.  Cloth, 
$4.00  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  ALTERNATING  CURRENT 
ELECTRICITY.  First  and  Second  Courses.  5  by  7}4.  Paper 
cover,  50  cents  mi. 

ESSENTIALS  OF  ALTERNATING  CURRENTS.  By  W.  H. 
TiMBiK  and  H.  H.  HiGBiE.  viii+374  pages.  5  by  7.  223  figures. 
Cloth,  $2.25  nel. 

ANSWERS  TO  ESSENTIALS  OF  ALTERNATING  CURRENTS. 

5  by  7^.     Paper  cover,  25  cents  net. 

INDUSTRIAL  ELECTRICITY.  Direct-Current  Machines.  By 
W.  H.  Timbie.  xiii +735  pages.  5^  by  7f .  469  figures.  947 
problems.     Cloth,  .$3.50  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  INDUSTRIAL  ELECTRI- 
CITY.    5by7i.     Paper  cover,  50  cents,  net. 

IllvVr  AND  HEAT  ENGINEERING 

HEAT;    A   Manual  for  Technical  and  Industrial  Students.     By 

J.  A.  Randall,  formerly  Acting  Head  of  Department  of  Physics, 
Pratt  Institute,  xiv+331  pages,  51^  by  8.  80  figures.  Cloth, 
S2.00  net. 

GAS  POWER.  By  C.  F.  Hirshfeld,  formerly  Professor  of  Power 
Engineering,  Sibley  College,  Cornell  University,  and T.  C.  Ulbricht, 
formerly  Instructor,  Department  of  Power  Engineering.  Cornell 
University,    x+209  pages,  5}4,  by  8.   60  figures.   Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

STEAM  POWER.  By  C.  F.  Hibshfeld,  formerly  Professor  of  Power 
Engineering,  Sibley  College,  Cornell  University,  and  T.  C. 
Ulbricht,  formerly  Instructor,  Department  of  Power  Engineering, 
Cornell  University. .  Second  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged,  xi  + 
474  pages.    5^  by  7^-     252  figures.    Cloth,  $3.25  net. 


MECHANICS  AND  MATHEMATICS 

ELEMENTARY  PRACTICAL  MECHANICS.  By  J.  M.  Jameson, 
Vice-President,  (Jirard  College,  formerly  of  Pratt  Institute.  Second 
Edition,   xii+321  pages,  5  by  73^4.    212  figures.    Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

MATHEMATICS  FOR  MACHINISTS.  By  R.  W.  Burnham, 
Principal,  Ilaaren  High  8cho(jl,  New  York  City,  vii+229  pages, 
5  by  7.     175  figures.     Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  MATHEMATICS  FOR 
MACHINISTS.     4|  by  G^    Paper  cover,  25  cents  net. 

PRACTICAL     SHOP     MECHANICS    AND     MATHEMATICS. 

By  Jamks  F,  Johnson,  formerly  Superintendent  of  the  State  Trade 
School,  Bridgeport,  Conn,  viii  +  130  pages,  5  by  7.  81  figures 
Cloth,  $1.40  net. 

PRINCIPLES  OF  MECHANISM.  By  Walter  H  .  James,  Associate 
Professor  of  Meciianical  Engineering  Drawing,  Massachusetts  In- 
stitute of  Technolojiy,  and  Malcolm  C.  Mackenzie,  formerly 
Instructor  in  Mechanical  Engineering,  Massachusetts  Institute 
of  Technology,  v+241  pages,  534  by  73^.  244  figures.  Cloth, 
$2.00  net. 

ARITHMETIC    FOR    CARPENTERS    AND    BUILDERS.     By 

R.  BuuDETTE  Dale,  M.  E.,  Professor,  Rensselaer  Polytechnic 
Institute.    ix+ 231  pages,  5  by  7.     109  figures.    Cloth,  $1.75  ne<. 

MATHEMATICS   FOR  SHOP   AND   DRAWING   STUDENTS. 

By  H.  M.  Keal,  Head  of  Department  of  Mathematics,  and  C.  J. 
Leonard,  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  Cass  Technical  High  School, 
Detroit,  Miehigan.  vii+213  pages,  4|  by  7.  188  figures.  Cloth, 
$1.60  net. 

MATHEMATICS   FOR  ELECTRICAL  STUDENTS.    .By  H.  M. 

Keal  and  C.  J.  Leonard.  vii4-230  pages,  4|  by  7.  165  figures. 
Cloth,  $1.60  nef. 

PREPARATORY  MATHEMATICS  FOR  USE  IN  TECHNICAL 
SCHOOLS.  By  Harold  B.  Ray  and  Arnold  V.  Doub,  Instructors 
in  Mathematics,  Cass  Technical  High  School,  Detroit,  Michigan. 
vii+70  pages,  4J  by  7.    70  figures.    Cloth,  $1.00  net. 

MATHEMATICS  FOR  TECHNICAL  AND  VOCATIONAL 
SCHOOLS.  By  Samuel  Slade,  B.S.,  C.E.,  Assistant  to  the  Direc- 
tor of  Vocational  Activities,  New  York  City  Board  of  Education, 
General  Assistant,  New  York  Evening  School  of  Industrial  Art,  and 
Louis  Margolis,  A.B.,  C.E.,  Teacher  of  Shop  Mathematics  in  the 
Brooklyn  Vocational  School  and  in  the  Stuyvesant  Evening  Trade 
School,    ix  +  491  pages.    5i  by  7f .    353  figures.    Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  MATHEMATICS  FOR  TECH- 
NICAL AND  VOCATIONAL  SCHOOLS.  5  by  7i  Paper 
cover,  25  cents  net. 


SHOP  TEXTS 

MACHINE  SHOP  PRACTICE.  By  W.  J.  Kaup,  Consulting 
Engineer.  Se<'oncl  l<>lition,  llcvised.  xii  +  198  pages,  5^4  by  8. 
163  figures.  Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

PATTERN  MAKING.    By  Frederick  W.  Turner  and  Daniel 
CI.  Town,  Mechanic  Arts  High  School,  Boston,    v+114  pages, 
■     5  by  7.    88  figures.     Cloth,  $1.25  ne/. 

PLAIN  AND  ORNAMENTAL  FORGING.  By  Ernst  Schwartz- 
KOPF,  Instructor  at  Stuyvesant  High  School,  New  York  City. 
X +267  pages,  5  J^  by  8.     Over  400  figures.     Cloth,  $2.00  ne<. 

CONCRETE 

CONCRETE  WORK.  By  William  K.  Hatt,  C.E.,  Ph.D.,  Pro- 
fessor of  Civil  Engineering,  Purdue  University,  and  Walter 
C.  Voss,  B.S.,  Head,  Department  of  Architectural  Construction, 
Wentworth  Institute,  Boston,  Mjiss.  Vol.  L  ■xix+451  pages, 
6i  by  7f,  224  figures  and  20  full-page  plates.  Cloth,  $4.00  net. 
Vol.  II,  xiv+206  pages,  5\  by  7|,  37  figures,  97  job  sheets. 
Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

ANSWERS  TO  PROBLEMS  IN  CONCRETE  WORK,  Volume  I. 

5 g  by  73.    Paper  cover,  25  cents  net. 

DRAFTING  AND  DESIGN 

DECORATIVE  DESIGN.      A  Text-Book  of  Practical  Methods. 

By  Joseph  Cummings  Chase,  Instructor  in  Decorative  Design  at 
the  College  of  the  City  of  New  York  and  at  Cooper  Union  Woman's 
Art  School,  vi+73  pages.  8  by  10%.  340  figures,  97  job  sheets. 
Cloth,  $2.25  net. 

AGRICULTURAL  DRAFTING.  By  Charles  B.  Howe,  M.E., 
Bush  wick  Evening  High  School,  Brooklyn,  viii+63  pages,  8  by 
103^.     45  figures,  26  plates.     Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

ARCHITECTURAL  DRAFTING.  By  A.  B.  Greenberg,  Stuy- 
vesant Technical  High  School,  New  York,  and  Charles  B.  Howe, 
Bushwick  Evening  High  School,  Brooklyn.  viii-|-110  pages, 
8  by  lOM-     53  figures,  12  plates.    Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

MECHANICAL  DRAFTING.  By  Charles  B.  Howe,  M.E., 
Bushwick  Evening  High  School,  Brooklyn.  x-|-147  pages,  8  by 
lOM-     165  figures,  38  plates.     Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

DRAWING  FOR  BUILDERS.  By  R.  Burdette  Dale,  M.E., 
Professor,  Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute,  v  +  166  pages,  8  by 
10%.     69  figures,  50  plates.  Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

ELEMENTS  OF  MACHINE  DESIGN.  By  Henry  L.  Nachman, 
Associate  Professor  of  Kinematics  and  Machine  Design,  Armour 
Institute  of  Technology.  v4-245  pages,  6  by  9.  269  figures. 
Cloth,  $2.25  net. 


AGRICULTURE  AND  HORTICULTURE 

FIELD     AND     LABORATORY     STUDIES     OF     SOILS.      By 

A.  G.  McCaIiL,  Professor  of  Geology  and  Soils,  Maryland  State 
College,     viii+77  pages,  5  by  7.     32  figures.    Cloth,  75  cents  net. 

FIELD  AND  LABORATORY  STUDIES  OF  CROPS.     By  A.  G. 

McCall.     viii  +  133  pages,  5  by  7.     54  figures.     Cloth,  $1.00  net. 

MARKET  GARDENING.  By  F.  L.  Yeaw,  Oasis  Farm  &  Orchard 
Company,  Roswell,  New  Mexico.  Formerly  Professor  of  Market 
Gardening,  Massachusetts  Agricultural  College,  vi+102  pages, 
5  by  7.    36  figures.     Cloth,  $1.00  net. 

THE  CHEMIbTRY  OF  FARM  PRACTICE.  By  T.  E.  Keitt, 
formerly  Chemist  of  South  Carolina  Experiment  Station,  and 
Professor  of  Soils,  Clemson  Agricultural  College,  xii+253  pages, 
5H  by  8.     81  figures.     Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

AGRICULTURAL    DRAFTING.      By  Charles  B.  Howe,  M.E. 

63  pages,  8  by  lO^,^.    45  figures,  26  plates.     Cloth,  $2.00  7iet. 

SCHOOL  ENTOMOLOGY.  For  Secondary  Schools  and  Short 
Agricultural  Courses.  By  E.  Dwight  Sanderson,  Professor  of 
Rural  Social  Organization,  Cornell  University,  and  L.  M.  Peairs, 
Professor  of  Entomology,  West  Virginia  University,  vii  +  356 
pages,  6  by  9.     233  figures.     Cloth,  $2.50  net. 


BIOLOGY 

LABORATORY    MANUAL    IN    GENERAL    MICROBIOLOGY. 

Prepared  by  the  Laboratory  of  Bacteriology  and  Hygiene,  Mich- 
igan Agricultural  College,  Ward  Giltner,  Head  of  Department. 
Second  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged,  xvi+469  pages,  5j  by  8. 
77  figures.     Several  tables  and  charts.    Cloth,  $3.50  net. 


COSTUME  DESIGNING 

COSTUME  DESIGN  AND  ILLUSTRATION.  By  Ethel  H. 
Traphagen,  Instructor  and  Lecturer  at  Cooper  Union  and  The 
New  York  Evening  School  of  Industrial  Art,  Lecturer  at  New  York 
University,  ix+199  pages,  8  by  10^.  Upwards  of  200  illustra- 
tions, including  several  in  colors  and  a  color  spectrum  chart. 
Cloth,  $3.50  net. 


STUDENTS'  MANUAL  OF  FASHION  DRAWING.  Thirty 
Ijt'ssons  with  Conventional  Charts.  By  Edith  Youno,  Director 
of  the  Edith  Young  Art  School.  Newark,  N.  J.,  formerly  Art 
Director  of  the  Albert  Studio  of  Fa.shion  Drawing,  Albert  Business 
College,  Newark,  N.  ,1.,  formerly  Instructor  in  Fashion  Drawing 
at  the  Young  Women's  Christian  As'=iociation,  Newark,  N.  J.  vii4- 
106  pages.  8  by  lOiJ^,  30  full-page  plates  of  original  drawings. 
Cloth,  $2.50  net. 

PRINTING 

PRINTING.  A  Textbook  for  Printers'  Apprentices,  Continuation 
Classes  and  for  General  Use  in  Schools.  By  Frank  S.  Henry, 
Central  High  School.  Philadelphia,  ix+318  pages.  514  by  7^. 
153  figures.    Cloth,  $1.50  net. 

THE  ESSENTIALS  OP  PRINTING.  A  Textbook  for  Beginners. 
By  Frank  S.  Henry,  vii  -f  187  pages.  5^  by  7f .  97  figures. 
Cloth,  $1.25. 

DOMESTIC  SCIENCE 

FOOD:  ITS  COMPOSITION  AND  PREPARATION.  A  Text- 
book for  Classes  in  Household  Science.  By  Mary  T.  Dowd 
and  Jean  D.  Jameson,  Teachers  in  Household  Science,  Washington 
Irving  High  School,  New  York  City.  Second  Edition,  Revised, 
vii + 177  pages,  5  M  by  8.     42  figures.     Cloth,  $1.50  ne/. 

HOUSEHOLD  PHYSICS.  By  W.  G.  Whitman,  State  Normal 
School.  Salem,  Mass.  437  pages.  5\  by  7J.  328  figures.  Cloth, 
$2.50  net. 

THE  LOOSE  LEAF  LABORATORY  MANUALS 

A  series  of  carefully  selected  exercises  to  accompany  the  texts 
of  the  Series,  covering  every  subject  in  which  laboratory  or  field 
work  may  be  given.  Each  exercise  is  complete  in  itself,  and  is 
printed  separately.     8  by  10^. 

Important  Notice 

WILEY  LOOSE  LEAF  MANUALS 

The  sale  of  separate  sheets  of  the  Laboratory  Manuals  of  the  Wiley 
Technical  Series  has  been  discontinued.  These  Manuals  unit  hereafter 
be  sold  only  as  complete  books  voith  removable  leaves.  Descriptive  literature 
xdUX  be  sent  on  request. 

CHEMISTRY 

Exercises  in  General  Chemistry.  By  Charles  M.  Allen, 
Head  of  Department  of  Chemistry,  Pratt  Institute.  An 
introductory  course  in  Applied  Chemistry,  covering  a  year's 
laboratory  work  on  the  acid-forming  and  metallic  elements  and 
compounds.  62  pages,  8  by  lOJ/^.  61  exercises. 
Complete  in  paper  cover.     Removable  leaves.     $1.25  net. 


THE  LOOSE  LEAF  LABORATORY  MANUALS— Con/. 

Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis.  By  Charles  M.  Allen,  Head 
of  Department  of  Chemistry,  Pratt  Institute.  12  pamphlets.  8 
bylOJ^.   Complete  in  paper  cover.  Removable  leaves.  $1.00  nef. 

Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.  By  C.  E.  Bivins,  Instructor  in 
Qualitative  Analysis,  Pratt  Institute.  Second  Edition,  Revised 
and  Enlarged.  14  pamphlets,  supplemented  by  Work  Sheets  by 
which  the  student  is  taught  equations  and  chemical  processes 
Complete  with  work  sheets  in  paper  cover.  Removable  leaves. 
$1.50  net. 

Technical  Chemical  Analysis.  By  R.  H.  H.  Aunqst,  Instructor 
in  Chemistry,  Adelphi  College.  19  pamphlets.  8  by  lOJ/^. 
Complete.     Removable  leaves.    $1.00  net. 

MECHANICS  AND  HEAT 

Exercises  in  Mechanics.  By  J.  M.  Jameson,  Vice-President, 
Girard  College,  formerly  of  Pratt  Institute.  52  exercises. 
Complete  in  paper  cover.     Removable  leaves.    85  cents  net. 

Exercises  for  the  Applied  Mechanics  Laboratory.  Steam; 
Strength  of  Materials;  Gas  Engines;  and  Hydraulics.  By 
J.  P.  KoTTCAMP,  M.E.,  Head  of  Department  of  Industrial 
Mechanical  Engineering,  Pratt  Institute.  8  by  lOJ/^.  58 
exercises,  with  numerous  cuts  and  tables.  Complete  in  paper 
cover.     Removable  leaves.    $1.00  net. 

Exercises  in  Heat  and  Light.  By  J.  A.  Randall,  formerly 
Acting  Head  of  Department  of  Physics,  Pratt  Institute.  17  exer- 
cises, with  numerous  cuts  and  diagrams.  8  by  lOJ^.  Com- 
plete in  paper  cover.     Removable  leaves.    34  cents  net. 

ELECTRICITY 

Electrical  Measurements,  A.  C.  and  D.  C.  By  W.  H.  Timbie. 
Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering  and  Industrial  Practice, 
Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technolog3'.  52  Exercises.  Com- 
plete in  paper  cover,  85  cents  net. 

Elementary  Electrical  Testing.  By  Professor  V.  Karapetofp, 
Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y.  25  exercises.  Complete 
in  paper  cover.    Removable  leaves.    50  cents  net. 


'I'lIK  I.OOSK  L1:AF  laboratory  MANUAT.S-Con/. 

Electrical  Measurements  and  Testing'.  {Direct  and  Alternating 
Current.)  By  Chesteh  L.  Dawes,  Assistant  Professor  of  Elec- 
trical Engineering,  The  Harvard  P'.nginecring School.  In  charge 
of  Industrial  Electricity,  Franklin  Union,  Boston.  39  Exercises. 
Complete  in  paper  cover.    Removable  leaves.     75  cents  net. 

AGRICULTURE  AND  HORTICULTURE 

Studies  of  Trees:  Their  Diseases  and  Care.  By  J.J.  Levison, 
formerly  Lecturer  on  Ornamental  and  Shade  Trees,  Yale  Uni- 
versity Forest  School.  20  pamphlets,  8  by  10>^.  $1.00  net. 
A  cloth  binder  for  above  sold  separately.     50  cents  net. 

Exercises  in  Farm  Dairying.  By  C.  Larsen,  M.S. A.,  Dean  of 
Agriculture,  South  Dakota  State  College.  Loose  leaf.  8  by  lOi. 
69  Exercises.     Complete.     Removable  leaves.     $1.00  net. 


DRAWING 

AGRICULTUBAL  DRAFTING  PROBLEMS.  By  Charles  B. 
Howe,  M.E.  A  Manual  for  Students  of  Agriculture,  to  Sup- 
plement the  Text  in  Agricultural  Drafting.  26  plates.  8  by 
lOJ^.     In  paper  cover.     Removable  leaves.     50  cents  net. 

THE  ORDERS  OF  ARCHITECTURE.   By  A.  Benton Greenberg. 

.\  Manual  for  Students  of  Architecture,  to  Supplement  the 
Text  in  Architectural  Drafting.  20  plates.  8  by  lOJ'^.  In  paper 
cover.      Removable  leaves.     50  cents  net. 

GENERAL  DRAFTING  PROBLEMS.  By  Charle.s  B.  Howe, 
M.E.  A  series  of  23  sheets.  8  by  10' 2.  In  paper  cover.  Re- 
movable leaves.    50  cents  nel. 

MECHANICAL  DRAFTING  MANUAL.  By  Charles  B.  Howe, 
M.E.  A  Series  of  Le.s.sons  and  Exercises  Based  upon  the  Funda- 
mental Principles  of  Drafting.  8'2  t>y  ^H-  I"  heavy  paper 
envelopes.  Part  I:  15  Lessons.  General  Principles  of  Drafting 
and  Working  Drawings.  50  cents  net.  Part  II:  10  plates 
Geometry  of  Drawing.     50  cents  ne^     Complete,  $1.00  ne/. 


This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below 


,  JUL  1 8  mi 

OCT  1  7  1934 

MAR  2  6  1M7 

MAY  1  2  W7 


Form  L-9-35m-8,'28 


^     000  933  207 


10*5 


HMVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

■   m 

i 
LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY